Programmable Terminal NTH25/25C

Programmable Terminal NTH25/25C
Cat. No. V054-E1-1
NTH25/25C
Programmable Terminal
NTH25/25C
Programmable Terminal
Operation Manual
Produced May 1999
+
F7
POWER
F8
F1
F9
F2
F10
F3
F11
F4
F5
F6
iii
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers to an
OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PC” means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for anything
else.
The abbreviation “Host” means a controller such as an FA computer which controls a PT (programmable
terminal).
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information.
Reference Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation
of the product.
1, 2, 3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
 OMRON, 1999
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any
form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON
is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change
without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no
responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
2
3
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
Role and Operation of the NTH25/NTH25C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions of the NTH25/NTH25C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications with the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications by Using Memory Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Operating the NTH25/NTH25C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 2
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
Method for Connection to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Names and Functions of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Cable Functions and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the NTH Screen Data Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 3
CHECK Menu Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
CHECK Menu Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the NTH25/NTH25C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation Modes and the CHECK menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmitting the Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting LCD Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Clock Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Console Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 4
NTH25/NTH25C Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
PT Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NTH25/NTH25C Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Areas for Control/Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixed Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image and Library Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numeral Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiii
xiv
xiv
xiv
1
2
4
15
22
24
26
29
30
32
34
38
40
59
60
61
62
65
67
69
70
71
73
74
79
80
83
89
98
109
130
137
145
159
vii
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
Character String Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm List, Alarm History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inputting Numerals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
166
172
189
196
211
SECTION 5
Using Memory Link (NTH Protocol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
5-1
5-2
5-3
Operation of Memory Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outline of Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Structure According to Display Element and Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
220
224
230
SECTION 6
NTH Screen Data Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
6-1
6-2
6-3
Outline of NTH Screen Data Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up NTH Screen Data Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating NTH Screen Data Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
250
252
259
SECTION 7
Troubleshooting and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
7-1
7-2
7-3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance of the NTH25/NTH25C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
276
281
282
APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using an RS--232C/RS--422A Converter Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transporting and Storing the NTH25/NTH25C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making the Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Differences with NT31/NT31C Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PC Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keycode Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
286
292
293
299
300
303
316
321
323
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
viii
About this Manual:
This manual describes the basic functions and operation procedures of the NTH-series programmable
terminal NTH25/NTH25C, its operations when connected to a PC or a Host, and includes the sections
described below.
Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting
to install and operate the NTH-series programmable terminal NTH25/NTH25C.
Section 1 describes the functions and configuration of the NTH25/NTH25C.
Section 2 gives basic information on the method for connecting to the host and communication methods,
and describes the names and functions of the parts of the NTH25/NTH25C.
Section 3 describes how to use the system menu, which allows various settings and checks to be performed using the touch panel of the NTH25/NTH25C.
Section 4 describes the functions of the NTH25/NTH25C, focusing on the functions of the display elements that can be registered for the screens.
Section 5 describes how to use the NTH25/NTH25C, when using memory link
Section 6 describes how to use the NTH Screen Data Converter.
Section 7 describes the corrective action to take when the system does not function normally, and the
procedures for daily maintenance of the NTH25/NTH25C.
APPENDIX describes the specifications and method for making connector cables, and includes a list of
related parts and a PC area map.
ix
Related Manuals and Their Contents:
The related manuals are listed below.
The j symbol at the end of the manual number is the revision history number.
[Operating the programmable terminal and communicating with the host]
S NTH25/25C Programmable Terminal Operation Manual (V054-E1-j)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This manual
This operation manual is the manual for the NTH25/25C itself.
This operation manual describes the functions and handling of both the programmable terminal body and the host interface function.
[Creating and transferring screen data]
S NT-series Support Tool Operation Manual (V053-E1-j)
The screens displayed on the NTH25/25C are created with the support tool and
transferred to the NTH25/25C. This manual describes how to create and transfer
screen data.
Note that in this manual, the NT-series Support Tool for Windows 95/98 is referred to as the “Support Tool”.
x
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Terminal.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Programmable Terminal. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a
Programmable Terminal.
1
2
3
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
xii
xii
xi
Precautions
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
! Personnel in charge of introducing FA systems into production facilities.
! Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
! Personnel in charge of installing and connecting FA systems.
! Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications
described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual
or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation
systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines and equipment that may
have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult your
OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the
systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for using the Programmable Terminal. Be sure
to read this manual before attempting to use the NTH25/NTH25C and keep this
manual close at hand for reference during operation.
WARNING It is extremely important that Programmable Terminals and related devices be
used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in
applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with
your OMRON representative before applying Programmable Terminals to the
above-mentioned applications.
WARNING Do not use input functions such as PT touch switches for applications where danger to human life or serious damage is possible, or for emergency switch applications.
3
Safety Precautions
Read these safety precautions carefully and make sure you understand them before using the Programmable Terminal so that you can use it safely and correctly.
Safety Conventions and
their Meanings
This operation manual uses the following conventions and symbols to indicate-cautions, warnings, and dangers in order to ensure safe use of the NTH25/NTH25C.
The cautions, warnings, and dangers shown here contain important information
related to safety. These instructions in the cautions, warnings, and dangers must
be observed.
The conventions used and their meanings are presented below.
WARNING Indicates information that, if not heeded, could possibly result in loss of life or serious injury.
Caution Indicates information that, if not heeded, could result in relatively serious or minor
injury, damage to the product, or faulty operation.
xii
Precautions
WARNING
Do not attempt to take the unit apart and do not touch any internal parts while the power is being supplied. Doing either of
these may result in electrical shock.
Caution
! Confirm the safety of the system before turning the power ON/OFF.
! Check the operation of all screen data and host programs carefully before using them. If their operation is incorrect, the system may operate unpredictably.
! When the programming console functions are used, carefully check that the
system is safe before carrying out the following operations:
-- Changing monitor data
-- Switching the operation mode
-- Forced set or reset
-- Changing a present value or set value
! Allocate the PT status control area and PT status notify area so that they do not
overlap each other.
! Do not use the touch switch input function for applications where there is a danger to human life or the possibility of serious property damage, or for emergency stop switches.
! Do not press touch switches with a force of greater than 30 N.
! Do not press touch switches inadvertently while the backlight is OFF.
Only press touch switches after confirming system safety.
! If touch switches are pressed in rapid succession, their inputs may not be successfully received.
Confirm that the input of a touch switch has been successfully received before
moving on to the next operation.
! Be sure to use the limit check function to ensure safe use of the numeral input
function.
! When the backlight is out or the display state is ”no--display,” do not inadvertently touch a touch switch or function switch.
Check the safety of the system before you touch a touch switch or function
switch.
! Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF.
! Do not disassemble the PT for repair or modification.
xiii
SECTION 1
General
This section provides basic information about the functions and features of the NTH25/NTH25C, types of connection and
communications methods. This information will enable you to understand the applications of the NTH25/NTH25C.
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
Role and Operation of the NTH25/NTH25C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-1 Operation of an NTH25/NTH25C at an FA Production Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-2 Operations of the NTH25/NTH25C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions of the NTH25/NTH25C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-2 Comparison between NTH25 and NTH25C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-3 Comparison between NTH25/NTH25C and NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-4 Principal Functions of NTH25/NTH25C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-5 Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications with the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-1 Direct Connection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-2 Host Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-3 NT Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-4 Functions of Allocated Bits and Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications by Using Memory Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-1 Memory Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-2 Comparison between Direct Connection and Memory Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-1 Compatible Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-2 Connecting to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Operating the NTH25/NTH25C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
3
4
4
5
6
8
10
15
15
16
16
17
22
22
23
24
24
25
26
1
Role and Operation of the NTH25/NTH25C
1-1
Section 1-1
Role and Operation of the NTH25/NTH25C
The NTH25/NTH25C is a sophisticated display unit (programmable terminal)
which automatically displays information and can also be used for operations
when necessary at an FA production site. The following gives a general description of the role and operation of the NTH25/NTH25C for first--time users of a programmable terminal (PT).
1-1-1
Operation of an NTH25/NTH25C at an FA Production Site
Monitoring of Production Line Status
The NTH25/NTH25C displays in real time information about the system and
equipment and their operating status. The display is enhanced by graphs and other visuals, making the information easier to understand.
Production Control (3)
Product
NTH25
NTH25C
Today’s target
560
441
Current production
Number defective
Number repaired
305
2
7
275
8
15
% achieved
NTH25
NTH25C
Directions to Workers on the Shop Floor
The NTH25/NTH25C warns workers of system or equipment failures and prompts
the appropriate remedial action.
Alarm
Assembly line B
Positioning pin
is defective. Line stopped.
Check the following.
1. Defective pin L3
2. Position of dog M2
3. Mounting of photosensor P5
Panel Switch Functions
Setting touch switches on the NTH25/NTH25C allows workers to use the
NTH25/NTH25C as an operating panel. The results of the operations are transmitted to the host.
You can move while holding the NTH25/NTH25C in your hands, making it ideal for
fine--tuning at the production site.
Electroplating control
Transport
Electr.
Wash.
Corr. prv.
head
head
head
Clamp
Unclamp
Adv.
Int. stop
Rev.
2
Electrolyte
Wash
Corr.
prv.fluid
Role and Operation of the NTH25/NTH25C
1-1-2
Section 1-1
Operations of the NTH25/NTH25C
Displays Screens
The information to be displayed (screen data) can be created on a computer using
the Support Tool, converted for use on the NTH25/NTH25C by the NTH Screen
Data Converter, and stored in the NTH25/NTH25C. The screen data can be displayed on the NTH25/NTH25C in response to instructions from the host or touch
switch operation.
+
Host
-
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
POWER
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
The screen data specified by
instructions from the host or touch
switch operation is displayed.
Receives Data from a Host
The NTH25/NTH25C can be connected to the host by a host link, NT link or
memory link, and automatically receive necessary data from the host.
Host link, NT link
or memory link
+
-
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
Host
POWER
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
Sends Data to a Host
Data (switch ON/OFF states, numerals) input using the touch panel and function
key switches can be transmitted to the host.
Touch panel
Host
+
-
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
POWER
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
Switch ON/OFF states,
numeral values, etc.
Screen Data
The screen data to be displayed on the NTH25/NTH25C can be created on a personal computer using the Support Tool. Convert the screen data for use on the
NTH25/NTH25C using the NTH Screen Data Converter, connect the
NTH25/NTH25C to the personal computer with an RS--232C cable, and send the
data to the NTH25/NTH25C.
Send the screen data created using the
Support Tool by instructing transmission on the
NTH Screen Data Converter.
+
RS--232C
-
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
POWER
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
Personal computer
(NTH Screen Data
Converter)
Screen data
The personal computer is connected
only when communicating screen data
between the NTH25/NTH25C and
NTH Screen Data Converter.
3
Functions of the NTH25/NTH25C
1-2
Section 1-2
Functions of the NTH25/NTH25C
The NTH25/NTH25C has the following features.
1-2-1
Features
Handy PT
! Need not be mounted on operation panels.
! Easy to connect. Only connectors are needed.
Downsized Body
! Slim and light body
! The communications cable and power cable are integrated in a single, slim
cable, facilitating cable laying.
Construction Best Suited to the FA Environment
! The panel is an STN black--and--white LCD type with backlight for the NTH25
and an STN color LCD type with backlight for the NTH25C.
! Waterproofed equivalent to IP65*
*: The panel may not be usable in environments where it is exposed to oil for
long periods.
320 dots
+
240 dots
POWER
-
F1
F7
F2
F8
F3
F9
F4
F10
F5
F11
F6
Hardware switch output
! The NTH25/NTH25C’s hardware switch outputs can be used as emergency
stop switches and for preventing erroneous operation.
Touch Switch Operation
! The contrast of the display panel can be adjusted by touch switch operation.
Screen Data Check Function
! Screen data can be checked simply by operations at the NTH25/NTH25C system menu without connecting the Support Tool.
4
Functions of the NTH25/NTH25C
Section 1-2
Binary Data can be Read to/Written from the Host
! It is now possible to write binary data stored in words on the host directly to the
NTH25/NTH25C. This makes data conversion by a program at the host unnecessary, reducing the load on the host.
Complies with International Standards
! The NTH25/NTH25C meets UL standards and EC directives.
1-2-2
Comparison between NTH25 and NTH25C
Two NTH25 models are available: the NTH25 and the NTH25C. The NTH25 supports versatile graphic display functions. The NTH25C supports this and a color
display. The following table shows the differences between the NTH25 and
NTH25C:
Function
NTH25
NTH25C
Type
NTH25--ST121B (black)
NTH25C--ST141B (black)
Display panel
STN black--and--white LCD
STN color LCD type
display type (with white backlight) (with white backlight)
5
Functions of the NTH25/NTH25C
1-2-3
Section 1-2
Comparison between NTH25/NTH25C and NT31/NT31C
The screen data for NTH25/NTH25C can be created by selecting NT31/NT31C
without “--V1” on the Support Tool.
Note, however, that there are some differences between the NTH25/NTH25C and
the NT31/NT31C without “--V1”.
Item
NTH25/NTH25C
NT31/NT31C
Support Tool used
NT--ZJ3MX1/ZJCMX1--EV3 (The NTH
Screen Data Converter is needed for
sending screen data to the
NTH25/NTH25C.)
NT--ZJ3MX1/ZJCMX1--EV3
Available communications method
Host link, NT link (1:1), memory link*
Host link , NT link (1:1), NT link (1:N)
*: The memory link uses a protocol different from that of NT series PTs.
Screen data for the regular direct
connection is converted by the NTH
Screen Data Converter before it is
sent to the NTH25/NTH25C.
Memory link
-- PT memory area to be used for each
display element is already determined, so it need not be allocated.
(Only lamp bits needs to be allocated
to specified bits.)
-- Can be allocated to any area of PT
memory for each display element.
-- Created screen data is sent to the
NT31/NT31C from the Support Tool.
-- Screen data saved in mmi format on
the Support Tool is sent to the
NTH25/NTH25C by specifying
”Memory Link” on the NTH Screen
Data Converter.
Use of memory unit
Not possible
Possible
RS--232C interface
Connector (9--pin) also used as port for
screen data transfer
-- Serial port A connector (also used for
screen data transfer, 9--pin)
-- Serial port B connector (for host communications only, 25--pin)
RS--422A/485 interface
None
Serial port B (25--pin D--SUB connector)
Replacement backlight
Replacement not possible
NT31C--CFL01 (NT31/NT31C common
use)
System program data
System program cannot be changed.
The system installer and system program data are supplied with the Support
Tool.
Data backup by battery
Not possible (backed up by large--capacity capacitor)
Possible
Number of user--registered screens
Maximum of 1000
Maximum of 3999
Screen data capacity*1
(user program memory)
512 KB (flash ROM)
1 MB (flash ROM)
Numeral/character string memory
table
None (Words on the host are directly
referenced from display elements.)
Maximum of 2000
Input setting
Numeral value
Numeral value, character string
*1 This is the capacity of the flash memory that stores screen data.
6
Functions of the NTH25/NTH25C
Item
Section 1-2
NTH25/NTH25C
NT31/NT31C
Graph display
Bar graph, trend graph
Bar graph, broken--line graph, trend
graph
Indirect reference
Not possible
Possible
Bit memory table
240
Maximum of 1000
Image data
Maximum of 30 (Size is fixed by each
code number for the image data.)
Maximum of 4095 (Any size can be
specified in multiples of 8 dots.)
Library data
Maximum of 3980
Maximum of 12288
PT status control area size
5 words (partial change of contents)
5 words
PT status notify area size
7 words (partial change of contents)
2 words
Window control area
Maximum of 20 words (Individual words None
can be set to any area or position by the
NTH Screen Data Converter.)
Trend graph control area
4 words (Can be set to any area or
position by the NTH Screen Data Converter.)
Addresses allocatable to control area DM, CH
None
DM, CH, HR, AR, LR
In addition to the above differences, the maximum number of elements that can be
registered and how they are used may also differ.
For details on elements, see Section 4 ”NTH25/NTH25C Functions.”
For differences in programming, see Appendix F ”Differences with NT31/NT31C
Screen Data” on page 303.
! Differences in software and hardware specifications have resulted in
various setting restrictions when using screen data created on the Support Tool on the NTH25/NTH25C. Before you create screen data on the
Support Tool, first check Section 4 ”NTH25/NTH25C Functions” and Appendix F ”Differences with NT31/NT31C Screen Data” and create the
screen data taking these restrictions into consideration.
! On the NTH25/NTH25C, thoroughly check the screen data created on
the Support Tool before starting actual operation using that screen data.
7
Functions of the NTH25/NTH25C
1-2-4
Section 1-2
Principal Functions of NTH25/NTH25C
The following are the principal functions of the NTH25/NTH25C.
Functions relating to data display
Character display
Characters of various sizes can be displayed. Characters can be flashed and displayed in
reverse video.
Graphic display
Polylines, rectangles, polygons, circles, arcs, and sector shapes can be displayed. They
can also be tiled with various patterns, flashed, or displayed in reverse video.
Numeral/character string display
The contents of words on the host are automatically read so that numerals and character
strings can be displayed.
Graph display
Not only bar graphs but also trend graphs can be displayed to indicate the contents of
words on the host.
Lamp display
Lamps can be turned ON and flashed under the control of the host. It is also possible to
display different graphics in their ON and OFF states.
Alarm list/history display
Warning messages are automatically displayed in a list in response to the state of a host
bit. The date and time that the warning message occurred can also be displayed.
+
-F7
POWER
F8
F1
F9
F2
F10
F3
F11
F4
F5
F6
Functions relating to communications
Communications with the host
The NTH25/NTH25C can communicate with the host by three
methods: host link, NT link (1:1) and memory link (NTH protocol).
Data can be read from the host, data input by touch switches, and
entry of numeral values sent to the host.
8
Functions of the NTH25/NTH25C
Section 1-2
Functions relating to data input
Input by touch switches
Data can be input by simply touching touch switches displayed on the screen.
The possible functions of touch switches include sending entered data to the host and switching the screen display.
Input by function switches
Pressing a function switch on the NTH25/NTH25C sends the state of that switch to the host regardless of the currently displayed screen.
Pop--up window function
A window overlaying the currently displayed screen can be alternately opened and closed by pressing a touch
switch.
In addition to fixed character and graphic displays, control keys and numeral input fields created as touch switches
can also be registered to the window. The screen can be used efficiently since the window need only be opened
when input is required.
Numeral input function
Numeral keys can be assigned to touch switches so that numerals can be input at the production site. The input
data is written to words on the host.
Functions relating to data output
Switch output
The states of the emergency stop switches and two operation switches can be
output.
Functions relating to the system
System menu
System settings and maintenance can be performed by selecting from system menus displayed on the screen.
Creation of screen data
Screen data created using the Support Tool on a personal computer can be converted for use on the
NTH25/NTH25C using the NTH Screen Data Converter and stored in the built--in screen data memory.
Clock function
The time can be measured and output according to the internal clock data.
Programming console function
When the NTH25/NTH25C is connected to a C series CPM1, CQM1, or C200HX/HG/HE--(Z)E or SRM1 PC in an
NT link (1:1) connection, operations equivalent to those of a programming console (C200H--PR027--E) are possible.
Trend graph logging function and background function
Changes in the contents on the host displayed in trend graphs can be recorded (logging function). Also, the record
can be maintained even while the trend graph is not displayed (background function).
9
Functions of the NTH25/NTH25C
1-2-5
Section 1-2
Displays
The NTH25/NTH25C can display various kinds of elements such as characters,
numerals, graphs, lamps, and touch switches. The screen data displayed by the
NTH25/NTH25C is created using the Support Tool on a personal computer.
Texts
(fixed display)
Stop
Line 1 Status
Restart
Characters
(character string display)
Machine name: NTH25C-ST141B
Production qty.:137 units
Bar graph
25%
0%
50%
Check 1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Touch switches
Numeric values
(numeral display)
100%
Check 2
Lamps
! Fixed displays
Characters and various graphics (circles, arcs, sectors, polylines, polygons and
rectangles) whose display does not have to be changed, and mark data, image
data, and library data that has already been registered, can be written directly
onto the screen.
*
Circle
Arc
Sector
Polyline
Polygon
Rectangle
A continuous straight line
with up to 256 points can
be drawn.
*
A polygon with up to
255 vertices can be
drawn.
”Marks” are graphics comprising 16 by 16 dots. On the NTH25/NTH25C, marks
cannot be used as characters but as fixed display marks.
”Image data” are graphics comprising any required area of dots. They are registered in advance and as many as required can be displayed at any position on the
screen.
Windows bit map (BMP) data can be used for images.
Image data are large in size but allow you to create more visually interesting graphics.
”Library data” are combinations of fixed display graphics registered as a single
graphic. They are registered in advance and as many as required can be displayed
at any position on the screen.
Library data are small in size since they are generated by combining graphics.
10
Functions of the NTH25/NTH25C
Section 1-2
Mark
Image data
Library data
! Lamps
These are graphics whose display status changes according to the states of bits
on the host. Rectangles and circles can be used for lamps (normal (standard)
lamps). They can be lit (displayed in reverse video) or flashed (repeated alternation between normal and reverse video display states) according to the state of
the host bit.
Lamps can also display different image/library data for the ON and OFF states of
the host bit (such lamps are called ”image/library lamps”).
-- Normal (standard) lamps
ON
ON
Host
Unlit state
Lit state
-- Image/library lamps
ON
Unlit state
Host
Lit state
! Touch switches
These switches can be set at any location on the screen. Pressing a touch switch
on the screen where a touch switch has been set can result in the following:
Notification to a host bit (input notification function)
Changing the displayed screen (screen switching function)
Input of a numeral (input key function)
Opening /closing a window
The following six types of display graphic can be used for touch switches:
Standard (double frame), no display frame, rectangle, circle, polygon, sector
When rectangle, circle, polygon, or sector is selected as the shape, the area within
which pressing of the touch switch is sensed (the ”touch switch area”) can be set
independently of the position where the display graphic is set.
Note, however, that the NTH25/NTH25C does not have a touch switch lamp function.
11
Functions of the NTH25/NTH25C
Section 1-2
When this
position is
pressed...
Touch
switch area
Display
frame
Function executed
(On the NTH25/NTH25C, the display graphics other than “Standard” and “None”
do not change when pressed.)
! Numeral display
The contents of words on the host are displayed as numerals. The displayed numerals can be changed by changing the contents of the word.
Hexadecimal values can also be displayed.
When decimal values are displayed, the number of digits for the integer part and
fraction part of displayed values can be specified in advance.
! Character string display
The contents of bits on the host are displayed as character strings. The displayed character strings can be changed by changing the contents of the word.
! Numeral input
Numerals can be input at the PT by using touch switches. The input numerals
are written to the host.
12345678
Input
789
456
123
0. 
Window
! Thumbwheel switches
Numerals can be input by incrementing or decrementing each digit with the corresponding touch switch (+, --). The input numerals are written to the host.
12
Functions of the NTH25/NTH25C
Section 1-2
! Graphs
These are graphics whose display changes according to the value of the bits
reads from the host. There are the following two types.
Bar graphs:
Bar graphs display the present contents of the bits on the host converted to a
percentage within the range 0% to +100% of a preset value.
(On the NTH25/NTH25C, the frame is not displayed.)
Trend graphs:
Trend graphs display chronological changes in the value in a numeral memory
table. The trend graph shifts position with the passage of time.
Past data is automatically recorded, and the host bits can be read (sampled)
even while the trend graph is not displayed.
The user can choose to stop sampling, restart sampling, or display past data,
by pressing touch switches.
! Alarm list/history
The alarm list/history function displays messages (character strings) in list form,
according to changes in the state of host bits. If the message is longer than the
display field, it is displayed spread over two or more lines. (Messages are displayed at double line spacing.)
For the alarm list, messages (contents of character string memory tables) set for
bit memory tables corresponding to the bits that turned ON are displayed.
For the alarm history, the date and time that the bit changed is recorded and displayed together with the message (character string) currently set to the bit
memory table corresponding to the bits that turned ON and OFF. The ”alarm” is
displayed when the bit turns ON, and the ”recovery” is displayed when the bit
turns OFF.
The alarm list function is used to determine which bits are ON at the present
time. The alarm history function is used to determine the times at which alarms
occurred in the past.
-- Alarm list
Message set for bit memory table No. 1
(Value for character string memory table No. 32)
“Value” for Character string
memory table No. 32
Character string memory table
number 50
No. 0
Character string memory table
number 32
No. 1
Character string memory table
number 54
No. 2
Bit
Host
0 A000000
1 A000001 " 1 (ON)
0 A000002
13
Functions of the NTH25/NTH25C
Section 1-2
-- Alarm history
Message set for bit memory table No. 24
(Value for character string memory table No. 13)
Record data
Alarm 12/04 11:19 “Value”
for character string memory
table No.13
Alarm 12/04 11:25 “Value”
for character string memory
table No.12
14
Character string memory table
number 11
No. 22
Character string memory table
number 12
No. 23
Character string memory table
number 13
No. 24
Bit memory table 24
97/12/04 11:19:20
ON
Bit memory table 23
97/12/04 11:25:12 ON
Communications with the Host
1-3
Section 1-3
Communications with the Host
The NTH25/NTH25C is connected to the host by one of the following three communications methods:
-- Host link
-- NT link (1:1)
-- Memory link (NTH protocol)
In all of these communications methods that can be used with NTH25/NTH25C,
data communications with the host is by ”direct connection.” (Memory link is, however, a quasi--direct connection.)
The following describes the host link and NT link that carry out the ”direct connection”. Memory link will be explained in section ”1--4 Communications by Using
Memory Link”.
1-3-1
Direct Connection Function
With the NTH25/NTH25C, the bits and words that reference data required for display, and those for storing input data, can be allocated to any part of the PC
memory area.
The NTH25/NTH25C can directly write to and read from these allocated bits and
words to change the display status of the elements on the PT screen, control the
PT operating status, and notify the host of statuses.
This function, which directly reads and writes the statuses of words and bits without using a PC program, is called the ”direct connection” function.
The words and bits that are allocated by direct connection are called the ”allocated
words” and ”allocated bits”.
With the direct connection, the contents to be displayed at the NTH25/NTH25C
are read from the memory area on the PC so that they are displayed on the
NTH25/NTH25C, and the information entered on the NTH25/NTH25C is written to
the memory area on the PC. The NTH25/NTH25C screen can be switched according to status of the PC memory area, and the NTH25/NTH25C’s status can be reflected in the PC’s memory area.
NTH25/NTH25C
PLC
DM area
I/O relay area
Holding relay area Link relay area
15
Communications with the Host
Section 1-3
Features of the Direct Connection Function
The direct connection function has the following features:
- The bits and words for referencing the operating status and work instruction information and those for storing input data can be freely allocated to any area of
PC memory.
- Since the NTH25/NTH25C can directly reference PC bit and word data without
using a PC program, it can be connected to the PC without changing the PC program which controls the currently running production line.
- The area for controlling and notifying the NTH25/NTH25C statuses, including
display screens, and display/no display status, can be freely allocated to any
part of the PC memory area. This means that the PT status can be read and
controlled just by reading this area at the PC, without preparing a special communications program.
The direct connection function allows the NTH25/NTH25C to read and write bits
and words in the PC and to automatically update the NTH25/NTH25C screen display. This function can reduce the load on the PC so that its program development
efficiency is improved.
1-3-2
Host Link
The host is connected to a PT in a 1:1 connection, and the words and bits of the
host are read and displayed by host link communications. This method can be
used for connection to the majority of PC types.
1-3-3
NT Link
NT link is a method for high--speed communications with a PC using the direct connection function. The PCs that can be connected to NTH25/NTH25C with the NT
link are as follows:
CPM1, CQM1, C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(--Z)E, CVM1/CV--series PC (--EV1
or later version), SRM1
The NTH25/NTH25C only supports NT link (1:1). With NT link (1:1), one PT is connected to one PC. The NT link (1:N) for connecting two or more PTs to one PC is
not supported.
16
Communications with the Host
Section 1-3
Features of the NT Link
- The NT link has the following features:
- High--speed communications with specific types of PCs can be executed.
- Writing in units of bits to the PC memory area is possible.
This enables the other bits of words to which a touch switch has been allocated
to be allocated for other purposes (e.g. a lamp).
However, since data is written to the DM area in word units, the other bits of
words allocated to touch switches in this area cannot be used for other purposes.
- It is possible to connect to PT without switching the PC operation mode. (When
the host link is used, the PC is switched to the monitor mode when it is in the RUN
mode.)
- When using C200HX/HG/HE--(Z)E, up to three NT link (1:1) systems can be
connected by installing a communications board in the option slot of the CPU
unit. For details on the communications board, refer to the SYSMAC # Communications Board User’s Manual (SCCC--305
).
- If the PC used supports the programming console function, the NTH25/NTH25C
can be used as a programming console.
The NT link is compatible with the host link. So, the NTH25/NTH25C screen data
and PC programs used with the host link direct connection can be used with the NT
link as they are.
1-3-4
Functions of Allocated Bits and Words
Elements displayed on the NTH25/NTH25C and the NTH25/NTH25C status can
be allocated to the bits and words of the PC when using the direct connection function. By changing the contents of these bits and words, the NTH25/NTH25C can
be controlled by the PC. It is also possible to send data to the PC by pressing touch
switches at the NTH25/NTH25C.
Controlling the NTH25/NTH25C with a PC
The following NTH25/NTH25C functions can be controlled by a PC.
- Screens:
Display of designated screens, confirmation of screen numbers, etc.
- Display details of numerals and character strings:
Updating of the contents of numerals, graphs and character strings to be displayed on the NTH25/NTH25C
- Lamps:
Display instructions, confirmation of display status, etc.
- System control:
Backlight ON/OFF, instruction of clock data output
17
Communications with the Host
Section 1-3
Notifying a PC from the NTH25/NTH25C
Data in the NTH25/NTH25C is sent to a PC when, for example, a touch switch is
pressed. The following three types of data are sent to a PC:
- NTH25/NTH25C status, screen number of currently displayed screen
- Touch switch input states
- Numeral value input with the numeral input function using touch switches
Functions of Display Elements
- Lamps (See page 137.)
Allocation destination: Bit
NTH25/NTH25C
PLC
Lamp #1 (Bit 000100)
Lit
Switch 1: ON (Bit 000100)
Unlit
Switch 2: OFF (Bit 000101)
Lamp #2 (Bit 000101)
The PC’s bit state is displayed by the ”lamp” at the NTH25/NTH25C.
Normal (standard) lamps turn on (flash) when the PC’s bit state (lamp bit) is ON
(1), and go off when it is OFF (0).
With image/library lamps, the displayed image or library data can be switched according to the ON (1)/OFF (0) state of PC bits (lamp bits).
- Touch switches (See page 145.)
Allocation destination: Bit
PLC
NTH25/NTH25C
Touch switch #12
Bit 009012
Bit 009012: ON
009012
1
When the touch switch is pressed, the bit (notification bit) allocated to the PC turns
ON (1) or goes OFF (0).
18
Communications with the Host
Section 1-3
- Numeral display (See page 159.)
Allocation destination: Word
PLC
NTH25/NTH25C
Numeral memory
table 1 (DM0003)
1612
A23C
DM0003
1
6
1
2
0005CH
A
2
3
C
Numeral memory table 150 (0005CH)
If the word contents change when the element to be displayed as a numeral by
reading the word on the host is currently displayed on the screen, the value on
the screen will also automatically change. This allows words to be monitored
more easily.
While the contents of words on the host are displayed on screens, reading is executed so that the data on the screen is always the same as the contents of allocated words.
The NTH25/NTH25C does not have numeral memory tables. So, the word on
the host is directly read from the element using only the allocation information of
the word on the host.
- Character string display (See page 166.)
Allocation destination: Word
NTH25/NTH25C
abcdef
PLC
DM0100
6
1
6
2 (“a”, “b”)
DM0101
6
3
6
4 (“c”, “d”)
DM0102
6
5
6
6 (”e”, “f”)
First word: DM0100
If the word contents change when the element to be displayed as a character
string by reading the word on the host is currently displayed on the screen, the
character string on the screen will also change automatically. This allows any
messages to be displayed more easily.
While the contents of words on the host are displayed on screens, reading is executed so that the data on the screen is always the same as the contents of allocated words.
The NTH25/NTH25C does not have character string memory tables. So, the
word on the host is directly read from the element using only the allocation information of the word on the host.
19
Communications with the Host
Section 1-3
- Alarm list (bit memory table) (See page 189.)
Allocation destination: Word
NTH25/NTH25C
PLC
Material low
010009
1
Character string memory table 120
Alarm list
Material low
Bit memory table 23
Bit 010009
Character string memory table 120
When the bit state of the PC corresponding to the bit memory table changes to
ON (1), the value of the character string memory table currently registered to the
bit memory table is displayed in the alarm list. When the bit state returns to OFF
(0), the character string memory table display is automatically cleared.
- Alarm history (bit memory table) (See page 189.)
Allocation destination: Word
NTH25/NTH25C
PLC
Water temp. high
015012
Alarm history
1
Character string memory table 134
Water temp. high
Bit memory table 52
Bit 015012
Character string memory table 134
Alarm history record data
The PC bit corresponding to the bit memory table is continually monitored. When
the bit turns ON (1), the date and time are recorded to the alarm history record
data together with the value of the character string memory table currently registered to the bit memory table.
This record data can be displayed according to alarm history.
20
Communications with the Host
Section 1-3
Functions of the PT Status Control Area (PC $ PT)
The ”PT status control area” is used to control the NTH25/NTH25C status. When
data is written to this area on the PC, the NTH25/NTH25C reads the contents of
this area and operates according to the contents.
[Example of PT status control area application]
When data is written to the PT status control area, the NTH25/NTH25C operates
as follows (page 90).
NTH25/NTH25C
PLC
PT status control area
Screen switch setting
System reserve
0003
Screen No.3
Clock data
0000
0000
0021
System reserve
PT status control bits
0000
System reserve
Output to the host
Functions of the PT Status Notify Area (PT to PC)
The ”PT status notify area” is used to notify the changes in the NTH25/NTH25C
status.
When the NTH25/NTH25C status changes, this change in status is written to the
PT status notify area on the PC. The NTH25/NTH25C status can be checked by
reading the data from this area.
[Example of PT status notify area application]
When the NTH25/NTH25C status changes, this change in status is notified to the
PT status notify area as follows (page 93):
NTH25/NTH25C
PLC
PT status notify area
12345678
789
456
123
0.
0000
System reserve
0801
PT status
Allocated word (numeral table 13)
12345678
5
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
Start
Start + 1
21
Communications by Using Memory Link
1-4
Section 1-4
Communications by Using Memory Link
This section describes a communications method other than direct connection,
called the ”memory link”.
1-4-1
Memory Link
Memory link is a means of sending and receiving data between a personal computer or an FA computer and the NTH25/NTH25C over the RS--232C interface.
In memory link, there is an area called ”PT memory”, as shown below, inside the
NTH25/NTH25C. This area is treated as a virtual area on the PC. This enables
simulation of direct connection to PT memory and display elements on the
NTH25/NTH25C. The host can make the NTH25/NTH25C execute processes via
PT memory by issuing memory link commands.
NT31/NT31C
PT
PC
PT memory
Numeral
Display
Lamp
Direct connection
RS--232C
communication
With the memory link, the only difference with the direct connection is that the
NTH25/NTH25C finds its communications target internally instead of externally.
So, the screen data for the direct connection can be used as it is. Note, however,
that the maximum number of elements that can be registered sometimes varies
between the direct connection and memory link. With the memory link on the
NTH25/NTH25C, bits and words are automatically allocated to each element, so
the PC address set to the element is invalid.
When compared to direct connection by the host link or NT link, the memory link is
subject to restricted use of some functions as described below:
- Programming console functions cannot be used.
- PT status control bit and PT status notify bit functions differ slightly.
- The allocated bit and word are already determined for each element.
Reference
- The screen data is sent to the NTH25/NTH25C after the screen data for direct
connection created on the Support Tool is converted for NTH25/NTH25C
memory link use on the dedicated NTH Screen Data Converter.
- The NTH25/NTH25C uses the ”NTH protocol” memory link. This memory link
differs with that for NT series PTs.
22
Communications by Using Memory Link
1-4-2
Section 1-4
Comparison between Direct Connection and Memory Link
The two major differences between direct connection and memory link are as follows:
a) With the memory link, communications with the host must be carried out by using commands. Compared with regular direct connection, which can be used
requiring almost no programs, memory link requires a program for executing
command transactions. This, however, allows the PT to be used in a wider
range of applications as a large variety of functions available in the direct connection can be used from numerous equipment such as personal computers
and FA computers supporting the RS--232C interface.
b) As PT memory area to be used for each element is already determined, the PC
address currently set to elements is invalid. When PT memory area is read and
written from the host, the address already determined for each element is accessed regardless of the currently set PC address.
For details on communications between the host and the PT by the memory link,
see Section 5 ”Using Memory Link (NTH Protocol)”. For details on how to use
screens and display elements, see Section 4 ”NTH25/NTH25C Functions”.
23
System Configuration
1-5
Section 1-5
System Configuration
This section shows the configuration of a system that uses an NTH25/NTH25C.
For details on product models, see Appendix G ”Model List” (page 316).
1-5-1
Compatible Peripheral Devices
The following peripheral devices can be connected to an NTH25/NTH25C:
Host
Controls the NTH25/NTH25C as required while controlling machines and
monitoring the production line.
Host link:
C series, CVM1/CV series, CS1 series, PCs, SRM1
Can be connected to CPU units, host link units, and SRM1.
However, connection is not possible to some models of CPU unit
and SRM1 (page 40).
NT link:
C Series, CVM1/CV series PCs, SRM1
Can be connected to CPU units and SRM1. Note, however, that
connection is not possible to some models (page 53).
Memory link: Can be connected to a personal computer or FA computer. (See
page 55.).
External
output
Power
supply
Wiring cable
(5 m)
Personal computer
Running Windows 95/98
NTH25/NTH25C
Displays production line monitoring
and instructions to the operation site,
and notifies the host of switch ON/OFF
states and numeral inputs.
Support Tool
Used to create screens for the NTH25/NTH25C
on the personal computer.
(On the Support Tool, screens are created for
use on the NT31/NT31C.)
NTH Screen Data Converter
Converts screen data created on the Support
Tool to screen data for use on the
NTH25/NTH25C, and sends the screen data to
the NTH25/NTH25C. Also makes settings
specific to the NTH25/NTH25C.
! Support Tool
-- NT--series Support Tool Ver. 3.0 for Windows 95/98 (Made by OMRON)
-- NT--ZJ3MX1--EV3 (FD version)
-- NT--ZJCMX1--EV3 (CD--ROM version)
! NTH Screen Data Converter (See page 38.)
-- NTH Screen Data Converter (made by OMRON)
(CD--ROM version)
The NTH Screen Data Converter is supplied as a standard accessory with the
NTH25/NTH25C.
24
System Configuration
1-5-2
Section 1-5
Connecting to the Host
A dedicated communications connector (D--SUB 9--pin) is attached to the
NTH25/NTH25C’s cable. Use this connector to connect the NTH25/NTH25C to
the host.
The NTH25/NTH25C’s cable also divides into the control/power supply connector
10 cm from its tip. Use this connector, for example, to supply power and output
switch states.
For details on connections, see 2--5 ”Connecting to the Host”.
25
Before Operating the NTH25/NTH25C
1-6
Section 1-6
Before Operating the NTH25/NTH25C
Follow the procedure below to start the NTH25/NTH25C system:
Host
Personal computer
NTH25/NTH25C
Settings on host
-- For the host link,
see page 40 and the
manuals for the host
link unit and
peripheral tools.
-- For the NT link
(1:1), see page 53.
-- For the Memory link,
see page 55.
Connect the power supply.
Install the Support Tool
at the computer.
(See page 34.)
Settings in CHECK menu
(See Section 3)
*1
(Refer to the manual for
the Support Tool.)
Install NTH Screen
Data Converter on the
personal computer.
(See page 250.)
Create the screens.
*2
(See Sections 4 and 5 and the
Support Tool manual.)
Make the settings specific
to the NTH25/NTH25C.
*3
(See Section 6.)
Convert and transmit the screen data.
Connect to the
NTH25/NTH25C.
(See page 65.)
Connect to the host.
(See page 40.)
Create the host
program.
Confirm the settings and
check communications.
(See page 73.)
Start operation.
*1 On the NTH25/NTH25C, only the setting made in the CHECK menu is valid as the
clock data.
*2 On the Support Tool, set the PT type to ”NT31” or ”NT31C” when you create screen
data for the NTH25 and NTH25C, respectively. (NTH25 and NTH25C cannot be set
directly on the Support Tool.) Do not, however, set ”NT31--V1” or ”NT31C--V1”.
Also, save the screen data created on the Support Tool only in the mmi format. Other
format data such as the onw regular save format cannot be read by the NTH Screen
Data Converter.
*3 mmi format screen data created on the Support Tool is read, and settings specific to
the NTH25/NTH25C are made. On the NTH25/NTH25C, the communications
method settings and PT type (NTH25/NTH25C) settings are both made in the NTH
Screen Data Converter.
Reference
- For the Support Tool, use NT--series Support Tool for Windows 95/98 (Ver.
3.0.).
- NTH Screen Data Converter is provided with the NTH25/NTH25C.
26
Before Operating the NTH25/NTH25C
Section 1-6
For details on the equipment and software, refer to the following manuals:
Equipment or Software
Manual Title
Manual Number
Support Tool
NT--series Support Tool for Windows 95/98 Ver 3.0
V053--E1--j
PC
SYSMAC CPM1 User’s Manual
W262--E1--j
SYSMAC CPM1A User’s Manual
W317--E1--j
SYSMAC C200H User’s Manual (for CPU01/03/11) (Programming)
W130--E1--j
SYSMAC C200H User’s Manual (for CPU21/23/31) (Programming)
W217--E1--j
SYSMAC C200HS Setup Manual
W236--E1--j
SYSMAC C200HS Programming Manual
W235--E1--j
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE Setup Manual
W302--E1--j
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE Programming Manual
W303--E1--j
SYSMAC C1000H/C2000H User’s Manual (Programming)
W140--E1--j
SYSMAC CQM1 Reference Manual
W228--E1--j
SYSMAC CVM1/CV500/CV1000/CV2000 User’s Manual (Ladder)
(Users using a CVM1--series PC should refer to the SYSMAC
CV500/CV1000/CV2000 User’s Manual.)
W202--E1--j
CS1 series CS1G/H--CPU jj--E Programmable Controllers Operation W339--E1--j
Manual
CS1 series Serial Communication Boards/Units Operation Manual
W336--E1--j
CompoBus master control SRM1 User’s Manual
unit
W318--E1--j
Peripheral
p
tools
SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: C--series PCs
W248--E1--j
SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: CVM1 PCs
W249--E1--j
SYSMAC CPT Operation Manual
W332--E1--j
W333--E1--j
CX--Programmer Operation Manual
Host link unit//
C
Communications
Board
--
SYSMAC C series Host Link Unit User’s Manual
W143--E1--j
SYSMAC CVM1/CV Series Host Link User’s Manual
W205--E1--j
SYSMAC C200HW--COM01 C200HW--COM02--V1 to C200HW-COM06--EV1 Communications Boards Operation Manual
W304--E1--j
27
SECTION 2
Connection
This section describes the possible connection methods with the NTH25/NTH25C, and the functions of parts on the
NTH25/NTH25C. This knowledge is required before connecting to the host and to peripheral devices.
This section also describes the operating environment for the NTH25/NTH25C, and how to connect to the host and the NTH
Screen Data Converter running on the personal computer.
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
Method for Connection to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1 Connection Method and Communications Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Names and Functions of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1 Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-2 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-3 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Cable Functions and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-1 Connecting the control/power supply connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-2 Connecting the 9--pin D--SUB Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-3 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the NTH Screen Data Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-1 Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-1 Host Types and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-2 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
30
32
32
33
33
34
34
37
37
38
39
40
40
56
29
Section 2-1
Method for Connection to the Host
2-1
Method for Connection to the Host
This section describes the methods for connecting to the host used with the
NTH25/NTH25C, and the relationship between the connection method and the
communications method.
2-1-1
Connection Method and Communications Method
! NTH25/NTH25C communications ports and communications methods
The NTH25/NTH25C has one communications port which is used as follows:
Communications
Port
Serial port
Available Communications
Methods
Host link
NT link (1:1)
Memory link (NTH protocol)
(NTH Screen Data Converter
connection)
Communications Type
RS--232C
! Available communications methods with the host
The following communications method can be used with hosts that are compatible with the NTH25/NTH25C:
-- RS--232C
The communications type that is actually supported varies according to the host.
For details, see 2--5 ”Connecting to the Host”.
! Converting the communications type with an RS--232C/RS--422A converter unit
The communications type can be converted as follows by using an
RS--232C/RS--422A converter unit (NT--AL001, made by OMRON).
-- (NTH25/NTH25C side) RS--232C $ Converter unit $ RS--422A (Host side)
30
Section 2-1
Method for Connection to the Host
! Combinations of communications method and connection method
The following table shows the available connection methods depending on the
communications method used and communications type between the
NTH25/NTH25C and the host.
Communications
Type at PT
Available Communications Method
Communications
Type at Host
Available Connection Method
For
Details,
See Page
Host
link
NT
link
(1:1)
Mem
ory
link
f
f
f
P 56
f
f
f
P 56
Connection via a PC connector cable
Host
PT
RS-232C
9--pin
connector
Wiring
cable (5 m)
Control/power
supply
connector
RS 232C
RS-232C
PC connector
cable
Connection via a converter unit
PT
RS-422A
Converter unit Host
(NT--AL001)
9--pin connector
Wiring
cable (5 m)
Control/power
supply
connector
RS--422A
PC connector
cable
f: Connection possible
- The PC connector cable is used for connecting the NTH25/NTH25C to the host.
- +5 V 150 mA of pin No.6 on the RS--232C interface is required for the
RS--232C/RS--422A converter unit (NT--AL001).
- +5 V is not output from the NTH25/NTH25C’s cable. When connecting an NT-AL001 to the NTH25/NTH25C, a separate power supply is required for the NT-AL001.
- The NT--AL001’s cable cannot be connected or disconnected with the power
ON. Always connect or disconnect the cable with the NT--AL001’s power OFF.
Reference
- Do not directly connect the NTH25/NTH25C connector to the host or
RS--232C/RS--422A converter unit. Be sure to connect via the PC connector
cable as shown above.
- When extending the cable for the RS--232C/RS--422A converter unit, wire the
cable referring to ”Connections” (page 56) and Appendix C ”Using an
RS--232C/RS--422A Converter Unit” (page 293).
31
Section 2-2
Names and Functions of Parts
2-2
Names and Functions of Parts
This section describes the operating environment for the NTH25/NTH25C, and
the names and functions of parts.
Caution
2-2-1
When unpacking the NTH25/NTH25C and peripheral devices, check their external appearance and confirm that they are not damaged. Also shake them lightly
and confirm that they do not emit any abnormal noises.
Installation Environment
Pay attention to the following points when installing the NTH25/NTH25C.
Caution
Do not install the NTH25/NTH25C at sites subject to the following:
----------
Severe temperature variations
Temperature or humidity outside the ranges stated in the specifications
High humidity, condensation
Splashing chemical agents
Severe oil splashing
Corrosive or flammable gases
Strong vibrations or shocks
Direct exposure to wind and rain (outdoor sites)
Strong ultra--violet irradiation
Take adequate measures to ensure shielding if the unit is used at a location subject
to the following:
-----
32
Static electricity, or electrical noise from other equipment
Strong electromagnetic fields
Nearby power cables
Potential exposure to radioactivity
Section 2-2
Names and Functions of Parts
2-2-2
Front View
Display:
The NTH25 has a black--and--white LCD screen with a backlight,
and the NTH25C has an STN color LCD screen with a backlight.
The entire area of the screen is a touch panel which works as an
input device.
Operation switches:
These two switches are a
type of function switch. The
exclusive OR of the states of
these two switches is output.
+
Hand strap:
Use this strap to prevent the
NTH25/NTH25C from falling. When
using the NTH25/NTH25C, pass your
hand through the strap.
POWER
-
F1
F7
F2
F8
F3
F9
F4
F10
F5
F11
F6
Emergency stop switch
(push--lock switch):
This switch is normally closed
condition type switch (1 circuit
output). This switch remains
pressed when pressed in. To
cancel this state, turn the dial to
the right (clockwise).
Function switches:
These 13 function switches
(including operation switches)
can be used in the same way as
touch switches.
Wiring cable:
This exclusive cable is used collectively for 24 V(DC) power supply,
serial communications, operation output and push--lock output. This
cable is connected directly to the NTH25/NTH25C. This cable is 5 m
long, and divides into a 9--pin D--SUB connector for serial
communications and control/power supply connector 10 cm from its tip.
2-2-3
Rear View
Caution
-- Confirm the safety of the system before turning the power ON/OFF.
-- Do not drop the NTH25/NTH25C or subject it to shocks.
-- Do not disconnect the PT with the system still running.
33
Section 2-3
Wiring Cable Functions and Connections
2-3
Wiring Cable Functions and Connections
This section describes the power supply and external output connections required
for connecting the host and the NTH Screen Data Converter.
For details on connecting the NTH25/NTH25C to the NTH Screen Data Converter,
see 2--4 ”Connecting to the NTH Screen Data Converter”. For details on connecting the NTH25/NTH25C to the host, see 2--5 ”Connecting to the Host”.
2-3-1
Connecting the control/power supply connector
Connect the external output and power supply via an exclusive connector to the
control/power supply connector on the wiring cable that is connected directly to the
NTH25/NTH25C .
Preparing the connector cable
Prepare the cable for connecting the external outputs or power supply to the control/power supply connector.
! Applicable connectors
Use the following parts for connecting the control/power supply connector
(10--pin flat cable connector) on the NTH25/NTH25C. For details, contact the
manufacturer.
Use the following connectors to prepare the PT wiring cable and the cable for
relaying the power supply and external outputs.
Model
Name
Remarks
IL--M--10P--S3C2--SA
Relay plug 10--pin
housing
IL--M--C2--1--10000
Crimped
pin connector
Contact pitch 2.5 mm,
applicable power lead
AWG28 to 22
Manufacturer
Relay
cable
(
(PT
side)
Japan Aviation Elec
Electronics (JAE)
(
)
! Control/power supply connector pin arrangement
The following table shows the control/power supply connector (Japan Aviation
Electronics IL--G--10S--S3C2) pin arrangements:
Connector
pin No.
34
Signal Name/
Abbreviation
Cable color
Function
1
Gray
+24 V
Power supply terminal +24 V
2
Gray/white
GND
Power supply terminal 0 V
3
Blue/white
OPR
Operation output
4
Black
(system reserve)
5
Black/white
(system reserve)
6
Brown
(system reserve)
7
Brown/white
(system reserve)
8
Green
EMR1
Emergency stop switch contact output
9
Green/white
EMR1
Emergency stop switch contact output
10
--
Unconnected
Section 2-3
Wiring Cable Functions and Connections
Connecting the control/power supply connector
Insert the control/power supply connector in as far as it will go with the notch on the
relay connector (plug housing) aligned with the NTH25/NTH25C connector (socket housing). Do not exert unnecessary force when inserting the connector.
Power supply connection
Caution
-- The entire system may stop depending on how the power is switched ON/OFF.
Follow the correct procedure when turning the power ON/OFF.
-- Do not perform a dielectric voltage test.
-- If complying with EC directives (low voltage directives), use a power supply with
reinforced insulation.
! Power supply
Connect the power supply so that 24 V(DC) is connected to pin No.1 of the control/power supply connector and 0 V is connected to the No.2 pin.
Breaker
1
2
24 V(DC) power supply
The following table shows the applicable power supply specifications. Use a power
supply that satisfies the following specifications:
Item
Caution
Value
Power supply voltage
24 V(DC)
Allowable power supply voltage
fluctuation range
20.4 V(DC) to 26.4 V(DC) (24 V(DC)
--15% to +10%)
Power supply voltage capacity
15 W
-----
Use AWG28 to 22 twisted pair cable for connecting the power supply.
Carefully check the wiring before switching ON the power.
Do not connect AC power to the power supply terminals.
Use DC power supplies with low voltage fluctuation.
35
Section 2-3
Wiring Cable Functions and Connections
Use of operation output
Pin No.3 (OPR) of the control/power supply connector is an operation switch output (Exclusive OR of two operation switches). Operation output can be used by
connecting the required equipment to this pin via the circuit board.
With operation output, the state of the two operation switches is exclusive--ORed
and output only when one is ON and the other is OFF. So it can be used for preventing erroneous operation.
The host can also be notified of the state of these operation switches.
The action (momentary/alternate) when the switch is pressed is set in ”Function
Key Settings” on the NTH Screen Data Converter. (See page 265.)
Note, however, that operation output and host notification function only when the
NTH25/NTH25C is running. These do not function when the NTH25/NTH25C is
not running, for example, while the CHECK menu is displayed or when the programming console function is being used.
Operation
output
Input
terminal
PC input unit
Internal circuit
(blue/white)
COM
GND
(gray/white)
12 to 24 V(DC)
Insulation method: Photocoupler
External supply power: 12 to 24 V(DC)
Max. load current: 50 mA
Caution
Operation output is not hard--wired; it is processed in the software. Do not use
operation output in situations where its use may affect human life or cause major
damage, or as emergency output. Implement a failsafe design on the system.
Use of emergency stop output
Pins No.8 (EMR1) and No.9 (EMR2) of the control/power supply connector are
emergency stop switch outputs. Emergency stop output can be used by connecting the required equipment to these pins via the circuit board.
Once the emergency switch is pressed, it stays pressed (its output stays ON). So,
the output can be used for an emergency stop. To cancel the switch (turn output
OFF), turn the emergency stop (push--lock) switch on the NTH25/NTH25C to the
right (clockwise).
Push--lock
output
(green)
Load
Push-lock
switch
Reference
36
Push--lock
output
(green/
white)
12 to 24 V(DC)
Type: Normally closed condition
External supply power: 5 to 24 V(DC)
Max. load current: 1 mA to 1 A
Do not connect a load that exceeds 24 V(DC) 1A.
Section 2-3
Wiring Cable Functions and Connections
2-3-2
Connecting the 9--pin D--SUB Connector
Connect the tool connector cable or PC connector cable to the 9--pin D--SUB connector (female) of the wiring cable that is directly connected to the
NTH25/NTH25C.
Connect the tool connector cable to the personal computer (on which NTH Screen
Data Converter is running), and connect the PC connector cable to the host (PC).
For details on personal computer (on which NTH Screen Data Converter is running) connections, see 2--4 ”Connecting to the NTH Screen Data Converter”. For
details on connecting to the host, see 2--5 ”Connecting to the Host”.
Pin arrangement of 9--pin D--SUB connector
The pin arrangement of the 9--pin D--SUB connector (female) is as follows:
Connector pin
No.
2-3-3
Abbreviation
Signal Name
Signal Direction
(PT$ host/computer)
2
SD
Send data
%
3
RD
Receive data
"
4
RS
Request send
%
5
CS
Clear to send
"
9
SG
Grounding for signal
--
Connector hood
FG
Functional grounding
--
Grounding
The functional grounding of the NTH25/NTH25C is connected to the connector
hood of the 9--pin D--SUB connector of the wiring cable.
Carry out wiring under the following conditions.
(1) When the distance between the NTH25/NTH25C and the host is short and it is
assumed that there is no potential difference between grounds, ground as
shown in Fig. (a) below.
(2) When there is a potential difference between the grounds of the
NTH25/NTH25C and the host, ground as shown in Fig. (b). If there is some
distance between the NTH25/NTH25C and host and grounding at a single
point is difficult, do not ground the functional ground.
(3) If the NTH25/NTH25C is installed near equipment that generates electrical
noise, such as a motor or inverter, do not ground the functional ground.
NTH25/
NTH25C
Class 3
grounding
Fig. (a)
Caution
Host
NTH25/
NTH25C
Host
Grounding at
a single point
Fig. (b)
Carry out grounding correctly in order to prevent erroneous operation due to electrical noise.
37
Connecting to the NTH Screen Data Converter
2-4
Section 2-4
Connecting to the NTH Screen Data Converter
The NTH Screen Data Converter is for making settings unique to the
NTH25/NTH25C, and converting screen data created on the Support Tool for
sending to the NTH25/NTH25C.
To send screen data to the NTH25/NTH25C, connect the NTH25/NTH25C to the
personal computer on which NTH Screen Data Converter is running via the tool
connector cable.
Do not connect the 9--pin connector of the NTH25/NTH25C directly to the
RS--232C port on the personal computer.
Reference
- Screen data cannot be sent directly from the Support Tool to the
NTH25/NTH25C.
- The screen data for the NTH25/NTH25C must be created as the screen data for
the NT31/NT31C on the Support Tool (Save it as a mmi format screen data file).
The NTH Screen Data Converter reads the saved mmi format screen data, appends the screen data with settings specific to the NTH25/NTH25C, converts
this data to screen data exclusively for use on the NTH25/NTH25C and sends
the converted data to the NTH25/NTH25C.
- The NTH Screen Data Converter does not have a function for receiving (uploading) data stored on the NTH25/NTH25C. To back up screen data, be sure to save
screen data created using the NT--series Support Tool.
38
Section 2-4
Connecting to the NTH Screen Data Converter
2-4-1
Connection Method
Connect the RS--232C connector on the NTH25/NTH25C’s wiring cable to the
connector on the tool connector cable connected to the personal computer.
The following tool connector cables can be used:
Model CV500--CN228 (cable length 2 m, made by OMRON)
(D--SUB 9--pin male $ D--SUB 25--pin male for NEC PC--9800 series excluding PC98--NX)
Model XW2Z--S001 (conversion cable, made by OMRON)
(D--SUB 25--pin female $ half--pitch 14--pin male for NEC notebook type
PC--9800 series excluding PC98--NX)
A separate connector cable CV500--CN228 is needed for using this cable.
Model XW2Z--S002 (cable length 2 m, made by OMRON)
(D--SUB 9--pin male $ D--SUB 9--pin female, for PC/AT compatible personal
computers
Computer
9--pin
connector
PT
Wiring cable (5 m)
Tool connector
cable
Support Tool
NTH Screen Data Converter
Control/power
supply connector
! Communications conditions
The communications conditions are automatically set when the NTH Screen
Data Converter is started up. (You need to specify only the communications
port.)
39
Section 2-5
Connecting to the Host
2-5
Connecting to the Host
The following describes the method for connecting between the NTH25/NTH25C
and the host.
Connect the PC connector cable to the RS--232C connector (D--SUB 9--pin connector) on the NTH25/NTH25C’s wiring cable. Then connect the PC connector
cable to the RS--232C port on the host.
The following PC connector cables can be used:
Model XW2Z--200T (9--pin and host side 9--pin connection, 2 m)
Model XW2Z--500T (9--pin and host side 9--pin connection, 5 m)
Model XW2Z--200S (9--pin and host side 25--pin connection, 2 m)
Model XW2Z--500S (9--pin and host side 25--pin connection, 5 m)
Fasten the above cable connectors and NTH25/NTH25C RS--232C connectors
with screws using the mounting fixture (XM2Z--0001, sold separately).
The tensile load of the wiring cable is 30N. Do not apply a load exceeding this limit.
2-5-1
Host Types and Settings
The following describes the types of host that can be connected to a PT and the
settings to be made at the host.
When using the host link
! Compatible host units
Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the host link function built in. In
addition, some C200HX/HG/HE (--Z) have an integral CPU that can be connected by the host link by installing a communications board.
Check the model and series of the PC against the type of installed host link unit
before making the connections.
The following table shows the host units that can be connected to the
NTH25/NTH25C by the host link.
40
Section 2-5
Connecting to the Host
Units with Built-in Host Link Function
PLC Series
CS1 series
Host Link Unit/
CPU unit
Communications Board
CS1G--CPU42/43/44/45--E
CS1G--CPU42/43/44/45--E
CS1H--CPU63/64/65/66/67--E CS1H--CPU63/64/65/66/67--E
CPUs Connectable with Host Link
Units or Expansion
Communications Board
CS1W--SCB41--E
3G2A6--LK201--EV1
C200H--CPU01/03/1 1/21/23/31--E
C1000H--CPU01--EV1
C2000H--CPU01--EV1
C200H--LK201--V1
C200H--CPU01/03/1 1/21/23/31--E
C200HS--CPU01/03/21/23/31/33--E
C200HS--CPU01/21/--EC
C200HE--CPU11/32/42--E
C200HE--CPU11/32/42--ZE
C200HG--CPU33/43/53/63--E
C200HG--CPU33/43/53/63--ZE
C200HX--CPU34/44/54/64--E
C200HX--CPU34/44/54/64/65/85--ZE
C series
C20HW--COM02/04--EV1
C200HW--COM05/06--EV1
C200HW
COM05/06 EV1
C200HS--CPU21/23/31/33--E
CPU21--EC
C200HE--CPU42--E
C200HE--CPU42--ZE
C200HG--CPU43/63--E
C200HG--CPU43/63--ZE
C200HX--CPU44/46--E
C200HX--CPU44/64/65/85--ZE
3G2A5--LK201--EV1
C500--LK203
CVM1 series
(*1)
CompoBus/S
master
control unit
CV500--LK201
CV500
LK201
CV500--LK201
CS1G
CS1H
C2000H
C1000H
C2000H
C200H
C200HS
C200HE
C200HE--ZE
C200HG
C200HG--ZE
C200HX
C200HX--ZE
C200HS
C200HE--CPU32/42--E
C200HE--CPU32/42--ZE
C200HG--CPU33/43/53/63--E
C200HG--CPU33/43/53/63--ZE
C200HX--CPU34/44/54/64--E
C200HX--CPU34/44/54/64/65/85--ZE
C1000H--CPU01--EV1
C2000H--CPU01--EV1
CPM1--10/20/30CDR-+CPM1--CIF01
CPM1A--10/20/30/40CD -+CPM1--CIF01
CQM1--CPU21--E
CQM1--CPU41/42/43/44/45-EV1
CV series(
series(*1)
1)
Connectable to
C200HE
C200HE--ZE
C200HG
C200HG--ZE
C200HX
C200HX--ZE
C1000H
C2000H
CPM1
CQM1
CV500--CPU01--EV1
CV500--CPU01--EV1
CV500
CV1000--CPU01--EV1
CV1000--CPU01--EV1
CV1000
CV2000--CPU01--EV1
CV2000--CPU01--EV1
CV2000
CVM1--CPU01--EV2
CVM1--CPU11--EV2
CVM1--CPU21--EV2
CVM1--CPU01--EV2
CVM1--CPU11--EV2
CVM1--CPU21--EV2
CVM1
SRM1--C02--V1
*1 CPUs of CVM1/CV--series PCs without the suffix ”--EV
SRM1
” caannot be connected.
41
Section 2-5
Connecting to the Host
! Settings at the host
When using the host link, the settings shown below must be made at the host.
(Some of these settings may not be necessary, or settings not shown here may
be necessary depending on the unit.)
Item
Switch Setting
I/O port
RS-232C
Communications speed
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps (*1)
Data length
ASCII, 7 data bits (*1)
Stop bit
2 stop bits (*1)
Parity
Even (*1)
1:1/1:N
1:N (*2)
Instruction level
Level 1, 2, 3
Unit #
00
*1 Set the same communications conditions on the host and the NTH25/NTH25C. Note,
however, that some communications conditions cannot be set on some units.
On the NTH25/NTH25C, set the host link communications conditions using the
“Configuration” Menu at the NTH Screen Data Converter. With the host link protocol,
the data length, stop bit and parity are fixed. So, set these communications
conditions to the values in the table above on the NTH Screen Data Converter so
that they match the conditions set on the host. For details on how to set
communications conditions, see ”[Communication] page” (page 262).
*2 The 1:N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually possible to
connect two or more NTH25/NTH25Cs in a single host link.
The following describes how to make the setting for each type of unit.
42
Section 2-5
Connecting to the Host
! Connecting to a C series host link unit
C200H/C200HS/C200HE/HG/HX (--ZE) backplate mounted type:
C200H--LK201--V1
[Setting the front switches]
These switches are rotary switches. Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver
so that the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following:
LK201
XMT
RUN
RCV
ERROR
⋅ Unit # (SW1, SW2)
Set these switches to “0”.
SW2
SW1
0
0
5
2
SW3
SW4
⋅ Instruction level, parity, and transfer code (SW4)
Set this switch to “2”.
⋅ Communications speed (SW3)
Set this switch to “4” to select 4800 bps.
Set this switch to “5” to select 9600 bps.
Set this switch to “6” to select 19200 bps.
[Setting the rear switches]
ON
CTS selector switch
External
0V (ON)
1
2
3
4
⋅ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP switch)
Set #3 to “ON”.
⋅ CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to “0V” (ON).
43
Section 2-5
Connecting to the Host
CH1000H/C2000H backplate mounted type: C500--LK201--V1
[Setting the front switches]
Local
Host
⋅ Mode control (key switch)
Set this to “host link”.
[Setting the rear switches]
⋅ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to “RS-232C”.
I/O port
⋅ Unit # (DIP SW1)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to “OFF” (“0”).
8
RS-422A
RS-232C
7
6
5
4
Synchronization
SW1
3
Internal
External
2
1
ON
Terminator
⋅ Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to “Internal”.
8
OFF
ON
7
6
5
4
CTS
3
0V
External
2
1
ON
SW2
⋅ Communications speed
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to “0010” to select
19200 bps.
Set these switches to “1010” to select
9600 bps.
Set these switches to “0110” to select
4800 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
⋅ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to “OFF” (“0”) (1-to-N).
⋅ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to “ON” (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
⋅ CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to “0V” (ON).
44
Section 2-5
Connecting to the Host
C1000H/C2000H backplate mounted type: C500--LK203
[Setting the rear switches]
⋅ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to “RS-232C”.
5V supply
ON
OFF
⋅ Unit #, parity, and transfer code
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-7)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-7 to “OFF” (“0”).
8
7
I/O port
6
RS-422A
RS-232C
5
4
SW1
3
2
Synchronization
Internal
External
1
ON
Terminator
⋅ Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to “Internal”.
8
OFF
ON
7
6
5
SW2
4
CTS
3
0V
External
2
1
ON
⋅ Communications speed
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to “0010” to select
19200 bps.
Set these switches to “1010” to select
9600 bps.
Set these switches to “0110” to select
4800 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
⋅ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to “OFF” (“0”) (1-to-N).
⋅ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to “ON” (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
⋅ CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to “0V” (ON).
45
Section 2-5
Connecting to the Host
C200H/C1000H/C2000H CPU mounting type: 3G2A6--LK201--EV1
[Setting the rear switches]
⋅ Unit #, parity, and transfer code
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-5)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to “OFF” (0).
* Parity is fixed at Even Parity. Transfer code is
fixed at ASCII 7 data bits and 2 stop bits.
SW1
SW2
⋅ Communications speed (DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to “0010” to select 19200 bps.
Set these switches to “1010” to select 9600 bps.
Set these switches to “0110” to select 4800 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
⋅ 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to “OFF” (“0”) (1-to-N).
SW3
⋅ Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to “ON” (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
⋅ CTS selection (DIP SW3-1 and SW3-2)
Set SW3-1 to “ON” (1), and SW3-2 to “OFF” (0).
(Set this always to “0V”.)
⋅ Synchronization (DIP SW3-3 to SW3-6)
Set SW3-3, SW3-5, and SW3-6 to “ON” (1), and
SW3-4 to “OFF” (0). (Set these to “Internal”.)
46
Section 2-5
Connecting to the Host
! Connecting to a CVM1/CV series host link unit
CVM1/CV series backplate mounted type: CV500--LK201
A CVM1/CV series host link unit (CV500--LK201) has two connectors (communications ports 1 and 2). Either of these ports can be used for connection to an
NTH25/NTH25C by the RS--232C interface. Note, however, that a cable matching
the connector must be prepared as the shape of the connector at these ports is
different.
-- Communications port 1
This port is a 25--pin connector for RS--232C use only.
-- Communications port 2
This port is a 9--pin connector. Use of the RS--232C or RS--422A interface can be
selected on this port. When use of the RS--232C interface is selected on this port,
the I/O port selector switch on the front of the unit must be set to ”RS--232C” (the
upper position).
[CPU bus unit settings]
When connecting to a CVM1/CV series host link unit, set the following communications conditions for the CPU bus unit settings:
Item
Setting at Host
Communications speed
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps (*1)
Data length
ASCII, 7 data bits (*1)
Stop bit
2 stop bits (*1)
Parity
Even (*1)
1:1, 1:N
1:N (*2)
Instruction level
Level 1, 2, 3
*1 Set the same communications conditions on the host and the NTH25/NTH25C. Note,
however, that some communications conditions cannot be set on some units.
On the NTH25/NTH25C, set the host link communications conditions using the NTH
Screen Data Converter. With the host link protocol, the data length, stop bit and
parity are fixed. So, set these communications conditions to the values in the table
above on the NTH Screen Data Converter so that they match the conditions set on
the host. For details on how to set communications conditions, see ”[Communication]
page” (page 262).
*2 The 1:N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually possible to
connect two or more NTH25/NTH25Cs in a single host link.
Set the CPU bus unit settings directly from a peripheral tool (e.g. SYSMAC support software).
For details on the CPU bus unit settings, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV series
Host Link Unit User’s Manual (SBC--474
).
47
Section 2-5
Connecting to the Host
[Setting the front switches]
Communications port 1
(RS-232C)
Communications port 2
(RS-232C/RS-422A)
I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
⋅ Unit # (SW3, SW4)
When using communication port 2, set these
switches to “0”.
⋅ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to “RS-232C”.
⋅ CTS selection (DIP SW2 and SW3)
Set SW2 or SW3 to “ON”. (Set this always to “0V”.)
To use communication port 1, set SW2. To use
communication port 2, set SW3.
RS-422A
⋅ Communication condition setting (DIP SW1)
Set this switch to “OFF”.
Communication is executed in accordance with the
CPU bus unit system settings made at the PC. The
initial values for the system settings are as follows.
- Communications speed: 9600 bps
- Parity: Even
- Xon/Xoff control: Not executed
- Communication method: Full duplex
- Stop bits: 2 stop bits
- Data length: 7 bits
48
Section 2-5
Connecting to the Host
! Connecting to a CPU
C--series CVM1/CV--series (--EV
) CPU unit
CV500--CPU01--EV1/CV1000--CPU01--EV1/CV2000--CPU01--EV1
CVM1--CPU01--EV2/CVM1--CPU11--EV2/CVM1--CPU21--EV2
-- PC system settings
When connecting to a CVM1/CV series CPU, set the following communications
conditions for the ”PC system settings”.
Item
Setting at Host
Communications speed
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps (*1)
Data length
ASCII 7 bits (*1)
Stop bit
2 stop bits (*1)
Parity
Even (*1)
Unit #
00
*1 Set the same communications conditions on the host and the NTH25/NTH25C. Note,
however, that some communications conditions cannot be set on some units.
On the NTH25/NTH25C, set the host link communications conditions using the NTH
Screen Data Converter. With the host link protocol, the data length, stop bit and
parity are fixed. So, set these communications conditions to the values in the table
above on the NTH Screen Data Converter so that they match the conditions set on
the host. For details on how to set communications conditions, see ”[Communication]
page” (page 262).
Either set PC system settings directly from a peripheral tool (e.g. SYSMAC support software), or transmit the PC system settings made using a peripheral tool to
the CPU.
For details on the PC system settings, refer to the SYSMAC
CVM1/CV500/1000/2000 User’s Manual (Ladder) (SBCC--472
).
[Setting the front switches]
⋅ I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to “RS-232C”.
I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
RS-422A
⋅ System setting (DIP SW4)
To effect the existing DIP switch settings,
set SW4 to “ON”.
To effect the existing PC system
settings, set SW4 to “OFF”.
Caution
For CPUs manufactured before or during
June 1995 (lot No. jj65), the existing
DIP switch settings differ from the
existing PC system settings as follows.
- DIP switch settings:
2,400 bps, 1 stop bit, even parity, 7 bit
data length
- PC system settings:
9600 bps, 2 stop bits, even parity, 7 bit
data length
For CPUs manufactured from July 1995
onward (lot No. jj75), the stipulated
values in the DIP switch settings also
are 9600 bps and 2 stop bits.
49
Section 2-5
Connecting to the Host
C--series C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE (--ZE), CPM1, CQM1 CPUs, SRM1
Connect to the RS--232C port with the built--in CPU unit, or the RS--232C port (port
A or B) of the communications board. Note that the connection to a CPM1 must be
made via an RS--232C adapter (CPM1--CIF01).
Reference
Connection to the peripheral port of the CPU unit is not possible.
-- PC system setting area settings
When connecting to a C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE (--ZE), CPM1, or CQM1 CPU, or
SRM1, set the communications conditions for the PC system setting area as follows:
Item
Setting at Host
Communications mode
Host link mode
Communications speed
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps (*1)
Data length
ASCII 7 bits (*1)
Stop bit
2 stop bits (*1)
Parity
Even (*1)
Unit #
00
*1 Set the same communications conditions on the host and the NTH25/NTH25C. Note,
however, that some communications conditions cannot be set on some units.
On the NTH25/NTH25C, set the host link communications conditions using the NTH
Screen Data Converter. With the host link protocol, the data length, stop bit and
parity are fixed. So, set these communications conditions to the values in the table
above on the NTH Screen Data Converter so that they match the conditions set on
the host. For details on how to set communications conditions, see ”[Communication]
page” (page 262).
Set the PC system setting area settings directly from a peripheral tool (e.g. SYSMAC support software).
For details on operations on the PC system setting area, refer to the manual for the
PC in use.
The following shows the PC system setting area word numbers and settings to be
made depending on the unit and port to which the connection is made.
When using the built--in RS--232C port of C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE (--ZE),
CQM1, SRM1
Word Number
Settings
DM6645
0001
Host link mode, CTS control OFF
Communications conditions are set by the
contents of DM.
DM6646
0302
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed 4800 bps
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
DM6648
50
Writing Value
Section 2-5
Connecting to the Host
When using port A of the communications board of C200HX/HG/HE (--ZE)
Word Number
Writing Value
Settings
DM6555
0001
Host link mode, CTS control OFF
Communications conditions are set by the
contents of DM.
DM6556
0302
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed 4800 bps
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
DM6558
When using port B of the communications board of C200HX/HG/HE (--ZE)
Word Number
Writing Value
Settings
DM6550
0001
Host link mode, CTS control OFF
Communications conditions are set by the
contents of DM.
DM6551
0302
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed 4800 bps
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
DM6553
When using a CPM1
Word Number
Writing Value
Settings
DM6650
0001
Host link mode
Communications conditions are set by the
contents of DM.
DM6651
0302
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed 4800 bps
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
communications speed: 19200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
DM6653
51
Section 2-5
Connecting to the Host
[Setting the DIP switches on the front of a C200HX/HG/HE (--ZE) and CQM1]
When using a C200HX/HG/HE (--ZE) or CQM1, the DIP switches on the front panel must be set as follows in order to enable the settings in the PC system setting
area (data memory).
C200HX/HG/HE -(Z)E
1
2
3
4
5
6
ON
OFF
ON
CQM1
RS-232C port communication condition setting
Set DIP SW5 to “OFF” to make the settings
made in PC system setting effective.
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
ON
OFF
[Setting the switches on a CPM1 RS--232C adapter]
CPM1CIF01
Set the mode setting switch to “HOST” (upper position).
52
CPM1
Section 2-5
Connecting to the Host
When using the NT link (1:1)
! Compatible host units
Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the NT link (1:1) function built in.
There are also some C200HX/HG/HE(--ZE) CPUs that can be connected by the
NT link (1:1) by installing a communications board.
Check the model and series of the PC against the type of the installed CPU unit
before making the connections.
The following table shows the host units that can be connected to the
NTH25/NTH25C by the NT link (1:1) using the RS--232C ports of both units.
PC Series
CPUs with Built-in
NT Link Function
CPUs Connectable with
Expansion Communication Connectable to
Board (*1)
C200HS-CPU21-E, -EC
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
C series
CV series
(*3)
CVM1 series (*3)
C200HS
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HE (-ZE)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HG (-ZE)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
X200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
C200HX (-ZE)
CPM1-10CDR-j (*2)
CPM1-20CDR-j (*2)
CPM1-30CDR-j (*2)
CPM1A-10CDj-j (*2)
CPM1A-20CDj-j (*2)
CPM1A-30CDj-j (*2)
CPM1A-40CDj-j (*2)
CPM1
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1-CPU45-EV1
CQM1
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV500
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV1000
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CVM1
CompoBus/S
SRM1-C02-V1
master control unit
*1 One of the following communications boards is required:
C200HW--COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06--EV1.
*2 A CPM1--CIF01 RS--232C adapter is required.
*3 CPU units of CVM1/CV series PCs without the suffix ”--EV
SRM1
” cannot be connected.
53
Section 2-5
Connecting to the Host
! Settings at the host
The following describes the setting methods for each unit.
! Connecting to a C--series C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(--ZE), CPM1, CQM1,
SRM1
[PC system setting area settings]
Write the settings to the ”PC system setting area” (data memory) directly from a
peripheral tool (e.g. SYSMAC support software) according to the host model and
port.
Host Model
Word Number
Writing Value
Setting
Built--in RS-232C port of C200HS,
DM6645
C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE), CQM1, SRM1
Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) (*1)
DM6555
Port B of C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) (*1)
DM6550
CPM1
DM6650
4000
Use NT link
(1:1)
*1 RS--232C port of the communications board
For details on operations on the ”PC system setting area”, refer to the manual for
the PC in use.
[Setting the DIP switches on the front of a C200HX/HG/HE(--ZE)and CQM1]
When using a C200HX/HG/HE(--ZE) or CQM1, the DIP switches on the front panel must be set as follows to enable the settings in the ”PC system setting area”
(data memory).
C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E
1
2
3
4
5
6
ON
OFF
ON
CQM1
RS-232C port communication condition setting
Set DIP SW5 to “OFF” to make the settings
made in PC system setting effective.
ON
6
5
4
3
2
1
ON
OFF
[Setting the switches on a CPM1 RS--232C adapter]
CPM1CIF01
Set the mode setting switch to “NT” (lower position).
54
Section 2-5
Connecting to the Host
! Connecting to CVM1/CV series (--EV
)
Set the DIP switches on the front panel as follows:
I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to “RS-232C”.
DIP switch setting (SW3)
6
5
4
3
2
1
Set SW3 to “use NT link”
(“ON”, right side).
ON
OFF
ON
When using the CVM1/CV series, ”CPU execution processing (execution control
2)” in the PC system settings must be set to ”Simultaneous processing”.
When using the memory link
In the memory link, the connection can be made to a personal computer or FA
computer supporting the RS--232 interface.
When connecting to the host by the memory link, it is necessary to create a program for the memory link on the host.
The following are the communications conditions that can be used in the memory
link.
The settings of the host (e.g. personal computer or FA computer) must be compatible with one of the communications conditions in the following table. Set the same
communications conditions on the NTH25/NTH25C using the memory switches.
(See page 262).
Item
Setting at Host
I/O port
RS--232C
Communications speed
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps. (*1)
Stop bit
1 bit, 2 bits (*1)
Data bit
7 bits, 8 bits (*1)
Parity
None, even, odd (*1)
Flow control
None (fixed)
*1 Set the same communications conditions on the host and the NTH25/NTH25C.
On the NTH25/NTH25C, set the memory link communications conditions using the
NTH Screen Data Converter. Set these communications conditions so that they
match the conditions set on the host. For details on how to set communications
conditions, see ”[Communication] page” (page 262).
55
Section 2-5
Connecting to the Host
2-5-2
Connections
This item describes how to connect when the RS--232C port on the host is connected to the RS--232C connector on the NTH25/NTH25C via the PC connector
cable.
Caution
When connecting the wiring cable to the PC connector cable, be sure to fasten
both connectors with screws using the mounting fixture (XM2Z--001, sold separately).
The tensile load of the wiring cable is 30N. Do not apply a load exceeding this limit.
Wiring on the host link and NT link (1:1)
Applicable units :
CV500--LK201 (communications port 2)
CPM1--10CDR-CPM1--20CDR-CPM1--30CDR-CPM1A--10CD -CPM1A--20CD -CPM1A--30CD -CPM1A--40CD -CQM1--CPU21--E
CQM1--CPU41--EV1
CQM1--CPU42--EV1
CQM1--CPU43--EV1
CQM1--CPU44--EV1
C200HS--CPU21--E, --EC
C200HS--CPU23--E
C200HS--CPU31--E
C200HS--CPU33--E
C200HE--CPU32--(Z)E
C200HE--CPU42--(Z)E
C200HG--CPU33--(Z)E
C200HG--CPU43--(Z)E
C200HG--CPU53--(Z)E
C200HG--CPU63--(Z)E
C200HX--CPU34--(Z)E
C200HX--CPU44--(Z)E
C200HX--CPU54--(Z)E
C200HX--CPU64--(Z)E
C200HX--CPU65--ZE
C200HX--CPU85--ZE
CV500--CPU01--EV1
CV1000--CPU01--EV1
CV2000--CPU01--EV1
CVM1--CPU01--EV2
CVM1--CPU11--EV2
CVM1--CPU21--EV2
SRM1--C02--V1
CPU units of CVM1/CV--series PCs without the suffix ”--EV
nected by any connection method.
*
56
” cannot be con-
When 0V is set for units having a CTS setting selector, you need not
short--circuit RS and CS.
Section 2-5
Connecting to the Host
Connect the PC connector cable to the RS--232C connector (D--SUB 9--pin connector) on the NTH25/NTH25C’s wiring cable. Then connect the PC connector
cable to the RS--232C port on the host.
The following PC connector cables can be used:
Model XW2Z--200T (9--pin and host side 9--pin connection, 2 m)
Model XW2Z--500T (9--pin and host side 9--pin connection, 5 m)
Model XW2Z--200S (9--pin and host side 25--pin connection, 2 m)
Model XW2Z--500S (9--pin and host side 25--pin connection, 5 m)
Fasten the above cable connectors and NTH25/NTH25C RS--232C connectors
with screws using the mounting fixture (XM2Z--001, sold separately).
Host
PT
9--pin
connector
Wiring
cable (5 m)
Control/power
supply
connector
PC connector
cable
Wiring for a memory link connection
Connect the RS--232C connector on the NTH25/NTH25C’s wiring cable to the
connector on the tool connector cable connected to the personal computer.
Prepare the following tool connector cables:
Model CV500--CN228 (cable length 2 m, made by OMRON)
(D--SUB 9--pin male $ D--SUB 25--pin male for NEC PC--9800 series excluding PC98--NX)
Model XW2Z--S001 (conversion cable, made by OMRON)
(D--SUB 25--pin female $ half--pitch 14--pin male for NEC notebook type
PC--9800 series excluding PC98--NX)
A separate connector cable CV500--CN228 is needed for using this cable.
Model XW2Z--S002 (cable length 2 m, made by OMRON)
(D--SUB 9--pin male $ D--SUB 9--pin female, for PC/AT compatible personal
computers
Fasten the above cable connectors and NTH25/NTH25C RS--232C connectors
with screws using the mounting fixture (XM2Z--001, sold separately).
Computer
9--pin
connector
PT
Wiring cable (5 m)
Tool connector
cable
Control/power
supply connector
57
SECTION 3
CHECK Menu Operation
This section describes the operation of the CHECK menu, focusing on the procedure to start up the NTH25/NTH25C.
This section also describes functions that are convenient when using the NTH25/NTH25C and those that are useful for system maintenance.
3-1
3-2
CHECK Menu Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the NTH25/NTH25C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-1 Operation at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 Operation Modes and the CHECK menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1 Relationships among Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-2 Operations with the CHECK menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 Transmitting the Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5 Starting Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6 Switching the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7 Adjusting LCD Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8 Setting the Clock Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8-1 Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9 Checking Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10 Programming Console Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10-1 Usable Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10-2 Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10-3 Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60
61
61
62
62
63
65
67
69
70
71
72
73
74
74
75
76
59
CHECK Menu Operation Flow
3-1
Section 3-1
CHECK Menu Operation Flow
Follow the procedure below when using the NTH25/NTH25C for the first time.
[Create the Screen Data]
Create the data to be displayed on the NTH25/NTH25C by using the Support Tool.
For details on how to create screen data, refer to the NT--series Support Tool Ver.
3.0 for Windows95/98 Operation Manual (V053--E1-- ).
[Start Up the NTH25/NTH25C (Display the CHECK Menu)] (page 61, 67)
Turn ON the power to the NTH25/NTH25C.
The initial screen containing the ”SET UP” touch switch is displayed.
To display the CHECK menu to transmit screen data, set clock data, monitor
screens or perform other operations, press the ”SET UP” or “
” touch
switch.
After about three seconds, the screen changes as follows:
- If the NTH25/NTH25C does not have screen data, ”Please Transmit” or
”
” is displayed. This indicates that the NTH25/NTH25C is waiting to receive screen data.
- If the NTH25/NTH25C has screen data, it enters the RUN mode, and the initial
screen that was set using the Support Tool is displayed.
[Convert and Transmit the Screen Data] (page 65)
On NTH Screen Data Converter for the NTH25/NTH25C, read the screen data
created using the Support Tool, and make the required settings.
When you have finished making the settings, connect the NTH25/NTH25C to the
personal computer, and convert the data for the NTH25/NTH25C on the NTH
Screen Data Converter to transmit the screen data to the NTH25/NTH25C.
For details on how to connect to the NTH Screen Data Converter, see ”2--4 Connecting to the NTH Screen Data Converter”. For details on how to use the NTH
Screen Data Converter, see Section 6 ”NTH Screen Data Converter”.
[Start Operation] (page 67)
Connect the NTH25/NTH25C to the host and start operation.
60
Section 3-2
Starting the NTH25/NTH25C
3-2
Starting the NTH25/NTH25C
After checking that the hardware has been connected correctly, switch ON the
power to the NTH25/NTH25C to start it up.
This section describes the operation of the NTH25/NTH25C when it is started up.
3-2-1
Operation at Startup
The NTH25/NTH25C operates as follows when the power is switched ON.
[Initial Processing]
Self diagnosis -- including a check on the internal memory of the NTH25/NTH25C
and a system program check -- and the internal processing required for startup,
are performed.
[Display of Initial Screen]
The initial screen is the first screen displayed when the NTH25/NTH25C starts up
normally. This screen contains the ”SET UP” or “
” touch switch.
If you press the ”SET UP” or “
” touch switch, the CHECK menu is displayed.
If you do not press the ”SET UP” touch switch or do not perform anything for about
three seconds, the NTH25/NTH25C automatically enters the RUN mode.
[Start of Communications with the Host]
Communications with the host starts when the RUN mode is entered. During the
interval until communications is established, the initial screen that is set when you
create screen data is displayed. For details, see ”3--5 Starting Operation” (page
67).
If the NTH25/NTH25C cannot communicate properly with the host, the initial
screen remains displayed for about ten seconds and then the message ”No Reply
from Host” is displayed. If this happens, check the connection with the host, and
then turn the power to the NTH25/NTH25C OFF then back ON again to restart.
[Operation Start]
Operation starts according to the contents of the screen data on the
NTH25/NTH25C and the contents of the bits and words allocated on the host.
Reference
After operation has started, the CHECK menu cannot be displayed on
NTH25/NTH25C. To display the CHECK menu, turn the power to the
NTH25/NTH25C OFF, and then press the ”Setup” touch switch on the initial
screen again after the NTH25/NTH25C has restarted.
61
Section 3-3
Operation Modes and the CHECK menu
3-3
Operation Modes and the CHECK menu
The NTH25/NTH25C operates in five modes: the ”RUN”, ”Clock Setting”, ”Screen
Monitor”, ”Screen Transmit” and ”Programming Console” modes. These modes
except RUN mode can be selected on the CHECK menu.
3-3-1
Relationships among Modes
The figure below shows relationships among the CHECK menu and each of the
operation modes.
For details on CHECK menu operation, see ”Operations with the CHECK Menu”
(page 63).
[Clock Setting Mode]
[Screen Monitor Mode]
In this mode, you set or
change the
NTH25/NTH25C’s internal
clock data.
In this mode, you can
confirm the screen data
on the NTH25/NTH25C.
To change system
settings or screen
data contents
Power ON
Initial screen
To operate the PT
[RUN Mode]
This is the mode in which
the NTH25/NTH25C
operates.
In this mode, the
NTH25/NTH25C can be
controlled from the host, and
various display and I/O
operations are possible.
62
[Screen Transmit Mode]
In this mode, screen data
is transmitted from the
NTH Screen Data
Converter to the
NTH25/NTH25C.
[Programming Console
Mode]
In this mode, the
programming console
function is used.
Section 3-3
Operation Modes and the CHECK menu
Items in the CHECK Menu
The items displayed in the CHECK menu and their functions are as follows.
Menu Item
Function
Refer to
Cancel
Clears the CHECK menu screen and return to the RUN P 64, 67
mode screen.
Set up time
Displays the CLOCK SETTING MENU screen for setting the NTH25/NTH25C’s internal clock.
P 71
Display monitor
Displays the Screen Monitor screen for confirming the
screen stored on the NTH25/NTH25C.
P 73
Data Transmit Displays the Transmit Mode screen for transmitting
screen data to the NTH25/NTH25C from the NTH
Screen Data Converter.
3-3-2
P 65
Programming
Console
Displays the Programming Console Function screen for P 74
operating the NTH25/NTH25C as a programming console for the C--series CQM1, C200HX/HG/HE(--ZE) or
SRM1.
Japanese
(
)
Switches the display language for the CHECK menu
and various modes to Japanese.
(If the CHECK menu is already displayed in Japanese,
then this touch switch becomes ”English”.)
P 69
Low, Middle,
High
Adjusts the contrast of the NTH25/NTH25C screen.
P 70
Operations with the CHECK menu
This section describes how to use the menus, including how to call the System
Menu and how to select menu items.
Calling the CHECK menu
The following screen is displayed for about three seconds after the
NTH25/NTH25C is started up.
If you press the ”SET UP” or “
played, the CHECK menu is displayed.
Reference
” touch switch while this screen is dis-
When the CHECK menu is displayed, the operation of the NTH25/NTH25C stops.
63
Section 3-3
Operation Modes and the CHECK menu
Selecting Menu Items
The menu items in the CHECK menu are displayed on the NTH25/NTH25C
screen as touch switches. You can select menu items by simply touching the touch
switches.
Example:
Displaying the CLOCK SETTING MENU screen by pressing ”SET
UP TIME” in the CHECK menu
Press ”SET UP TIME”.
Switching from the CHECK menu to the RUN Mode
Return to the RUN mode by selecting ”CANCEL” in the CHECK menu.
Reference
- The NTH25/NTH25C does not automatically return to the RUN mode if no operations are performed.
- Once the NTH25/NTH25C has entered the RUN mode, the CHECK menu cannot be displayed on NTH25/NTH25C. To display the CHECK menu, restart the
NTH25/NTH25C.
64
Section 3-4
Transmitting the Screen Data
3-4
Transmitting the Screen Data
The screen data is created with the Support Tool and then transmitted to the
NTH25/NTH25C. This section explains how to transmit the screen data.
For details on how to create the screen data, and operations on the operation at
NTH Screen Data Converter and the Support Tool, see Section 4 to 6 of this manual and the NT--series Support Tool Ver. 3.0 for Windows95/98 Operation Manual
(V053--E1-- ).
Reference
- Screen data registered on the NTH25/NTH25C cannot be read from the
NTH25/NTH25C.
- When screen is transmitted from the NTH Screen Data Converter, screen data
that was previously registered on the NTH25/NTH25C is lost.
- If screen data is registered normally on the NTH25/NTH25C, the display language of the CHECK menu or messages is determined to the language used in
the screen data.
Note, however, that you can switch the display language by the ”English” or
”Japanese
” touch switches in the CHECK menu. (page 69)
Example: Transmitting Japanese language screen data at the default settings
CHECK menu%
Japanese$English
(switchable)
Message during%
transmission
English
(not switchable)
Message at completion of
transmission
Japanese
(not switchable)
Transmitting Screen Data from the NTH Screen Data Converter
Follow the procedure below to transmit screen data from the NTH Screen Data
Converter to the NTH25/NTH25C.
(1) Connect the NTH25/NTH25C to a personal computer in which the NTH
Screen Data Converter has been installed and turn the power to the
NTH25/NTH25C ON.
(2) Press the ”SET UP” touch switch in the NTH25/NTH25C’s initial screen to display the CHECK menu.
(3) Enter the Screen Transmit mode by following the menu operation on the
CHECK Menu shown below at the NTH25/NTH25C.
Select ”DATA TRANSMIT”.
65
Section 3-4
Transmitting the Screen Data
Please Transmit
(4) Turn ON the power to the personal computer and start up the NTH Screen
Data Converter.
(5) On the NTH Screen Data Converter, open the screen data to be transmitted,
then set the communications method between the NTH25/NTH25C and the
host, and make other necessary settings.
(6) Select ”Transmit” on the NTH Screen Data Converter, specify the RS--232C
port to be used for data transfer, and select ”OK”.
This starts transmission of screen data from the NTH Screen Data Converter
to the NTH25/NTH25C.
During transmission, the following is displayed on the screens:
NTH Screen Data Converter: Transmission progress is displayed.
NTH25/NTH25C: ”Receiving in progress ...” is displayed.
(7) When transmission of the screen data ends, the screen changes as follows:
On the NTH Screen Data Converter:
The NTH Screen Data Converter returns to the main menu.
On the NTH25/NTH25C:
”COMPLETED” is displayed. Press anywhere on the screen. This automatically restarts NTH25/NTH25C, and the initial screen is displayed.
If the screen data cannot be successfully transmitted from the Support Tool, check
the state of the cable connection or the communications port used by the NTH
Screen Data Converter (personal computer) for data transmission.
Precautions to Be Observed When Transmitting Screen Data
If any of the following, or a system error, occurs during transmission of screen
data, the transmitted screen data will not be registered correctly in the
NTH25/NTH25C. If this happens, the NTH25/NTH25C may not enter the RUN
mode when started up, or there may be unpredictable malfunctions such as failure
to display screens during operation. In this case, re--transmit the screen data to
register it correctly.
- The power to the NTH25/NTH25C is interrupted.
- The power to the personal computer on which the NTH Screen Data Converter is
running is interrupted or the computer is reset.
- The cable connecting the NTH25/NTH25C to the personal computer on which
the NTH Screen Data Converter is running is disconnected or has a broken wire.
66
Section 3-5
Starting Operation
3-5
Starting Operation
After you have finished transmitting screen data, connect the NTH25/NTH25C to
the host and start operation.
Caution
Check the operation of all screen data and host programs carefully before using
them. If their operation is incorrect, the system may operate unpredictably.
Switching to the RUN Mode and Starting Operation
Press the ”Cancel” touch switch on the CHECK menu screen. The
NTH25/NTH25C switches to the RUN mode and starts operation.
The operation at the start is as follows.
[Display of the Initial Screen]
First of all, the initial screen that was set to the screen data by the Support Tool is
displayed.
Nothing will be displayed if the screen contents are incorrect, or data has not been
registered to the currently set screen number.
At this stage, communications with the host is not yet established. So, if display
elements that require communications with the host for referencing words allocated on the host are in the initial screen, numerical values are expressed as ”0”
(zero) and character string are expressed as blank spaces.
[Checking Communications with the Host]
The NTH25/NTH25C waits for communications with the host to be established.
If communications is not established within about ten seconds, the
NTH25/NTH25C displays the message ”No Reply from Host”.
[Display of the Specified Screen]
The specified screen is displayed when the contents (screen number of the screen
to be displayed) of the first word of the PT status control area are read.
The screen will not be switched if the contents of the first word of the PT status
control area are incorrect as a screen number. Also, nothing will be displayed if no
data is registered to the currently set screen number.
67
Section 3-5
Starting Operation
Confirming Communications between the NTH25/NTH25C and the Host
Execute the host program and confirm that the following operations are performed
normally.
- Confirm that the NTH25/NTH25C screens switch in accordance with the host
program.
If the screens do not switch correctly, check the connection between the host
and the NTH25/NTH25C, and also check that the hardware settings are correct.
For details, see Section 2 ”Connection”.
- Confirm that the operation results of touch switch and numeral input at the
NTH25/NTH25C are sent to the host correctly by displaying the contents of the
host words and bits using a peripheral tool (e.g. SYSMAC support software).
If the results of operations at the NTH25/NTH25C are not sent to the host correctly, check the setting of the display elements. For details on setting display
elements, see Section 4 ”NTH25/NTH25C Functions”.
68
Switching the Display Language
3-6
Section 3-6
Switching the Display Language
On the NTH25/NTH25C, you can select either English or Japanese as the display
language of the CHECK menu.
Reference
- The display language setting returns to its default when the power to the
NTH25/NTH25C is turned OFF.
Defaults follow the language of the screen data currently stored on the
NTH25/NTH25C. (If the Support Tool used to create the screen data was the
Japanese language version, the language of the screen data will be Japanese.
If the Support Tool was the English language version, the language of the
screen data will be English.)
The display language will be English if no screen data is stored on the
NTH25/NTH25C or the screen data is in error.
- Messages displayed during transmission of screen data or at completion of
transmission follow the language of the screen data stored on the
NTH25/NTH25C regardless of the display language set in the CHECK menu. (If
no screen data is stored on the NTH25/NTH25C, then the display language will
be English.)
Set the CHECK menu display language by following the operation below on the
CHECK menu.
Select ”
”.
The CHECK menu display language will be
Japanese.
69
Section 3-7
Adjusting LCD Contrast
3-7
Adjusting LCD Contrast
On the NTH25/NTH25C, you can adjust the LCD contrast in three stages.
Reference
The LCD contrast setting is backed up in NTH25/NTH25C memory. So, it will not
be lost when the power to the NTH25/NTH25C is turned OFF. Note, however, that
the setting will be lost if the power is kept OFF for several days as internal settings
are backed up not by a battery but by a capacitor.
Default is ”Middle”.
Set the LCD contrast by following the operation below on the CHECK menu.
Choose one of ”Low,” ”Middle” or ”High”.
LCD contrast changes according to the touch
switch you chose.
70
Section 3-8
Setting the Clock Data
3-8
Setting the Clock Data
The NTH25/NTH25C has a ”clock function” for setting and displaying the date and
time.
This section describes how to display and set the clock data by operation on the
CHECK menu.
Reference
- When setting the clock data, be sure to set the correct date, time and day of the
week. If you make a mistake, for example, when entering a value in the range 13
to 19 for the month setting, the setting is invalid and the entry field is cleared.
- Make sure that the data is correct when the month changes.
- For details on the clock function, see ”Clock Function” (page 216).
- The clock data is backed up in NTH25/NTH25C memory. So, it will not be lost
when the power to the NTH25/NTH25C is turned OFF. Note, however, that the
data will be lost if the power is kept OFF for several days as internal settings are
backed up not by a battery but by a capacitor.
Default is ”00 years:00 month:00 hours:00 minutes:00 seconds”.
- Clock data is used by the alarm history function. You can also write the
NTH25/NTH25C’s clock data to words allocated on the host by instructing transmission of clock data on the host.
Set clock data by following the menu operation on the CHECK menu shown below.
Select ”SET UP TIME”.
Set the date and time. (See the
following page.)
Return to the CHECK menu by selecting ”CANCEL” in the “SET UP TIME” screen
menu.
71
Section 3-8
Setting the Clock Data
3-8-1
Setting the Date and Time
! Setting the date
(1) Press ”Date”.
You can now enter the date under the ”Date” field.
(2) Enter the date in order ”Year, Month, Day” using the number keys displayed
on the right. (”B” stands for Backspace, and ”S” stands for Set.)
Year:
4 digits (1980 to 2155*)
Month: 2 digits (00 to 12)
Day:
2 digits (00 to 31)
* The years 2156 to 2158 can be entered. The NTH25/NTH25C, however,
may malfunction.
(3) Press the ”S” key. This sets the date and displays it at the top of the screen.
Example: December 24, 1998
Input: [1998122] % [S] % Display: [1998--12--24]
! Setting the time
(1) Press ”Time”.
You can now enter the time under the ”Time” field.
(2) Enter the time in order ”Hour, Minute, Second” using the number keys displayed on the right. (”B” stands for Backspace, and ”S” stands for Set.)
Hour:
2 digits (00 to 24) (In the 24--hour clock system, ”24” becomes ”00”)
Minute: 2 digits (00 to 60) (”60” becomes ”00”)
Second: 2 digits (00 to 60) (”60” becomes ”00”)
(3) Press the ”S” key. This sets the time and displays it at the top of the screen.
Example: To enter 16 hours:08 minutes;45 seconds
Input: [160845] % [S] % Display: [16:08:45]
Reference
72
Though the NTH25/NTH25C checks whether the date and time that you entered is
correct or not, be sure to enter the correct clock data.
Section 3-9
Checking Screen Data
3-9
Checking Screen Data
The NTH25/NTH25C allows the registered screens (Nos. 1 to 1000) to be displayed and checked by operation on the CHECK menu.
Reference
- Window screens cannot be displayed by operation on the CHECK menu. In the
Screen Monitor screen, communications with the host is not performed. So, numerical values are expressed as ”0” (zero) and character strings are expressed
as blank spaces in the case of display elements that require communications
with the host for referencing words allocated on the host. Also, other display elements will not function.
- Only the user screens (Nos. 1 to 1000) can be displayed. Screens for system
use cannot be displayed.
Display the Screen Monitor screen by following the menu operation on the CHECK
menu shown below.
Select ”DISPLAY MONITOR”.
Specify the screen number to be checked using
the number keys displayed on the right. (”B”
stands for Backspace, and ”S” stands for Set.)
Press the ”S” key. This displays the screen you
specified.
If you specified an invalid screen number, ”Error”
is displayed. Or, if you specified a screen number
for which there is no screen data, a screen without
any display elements is displayed.
BOILER OPERATION
T 015003
RUN
T 015301
STOP
L 020000
L 020005
Start
Confirmation
Stop
Confirmation
T 016312
ERROR
When you have finished checking the screen,
press anywhere on the screen to return to the
Screen Monitor screen.
You can now continue to confirm other screens.
L 020013
Error
Occurrence
Return to the CHECK menu by selecting ”Cancel” in the “DISPLAY MONITOR”
screen.
73
Section 3-10
Programming Console Function
3-10
Programming Console Function
The NTH25/NTH25C features the ”programming console function.” This function
allows the NTH25/NTH25C to be used instead of a programming console (type
C200H--PRO27--E) for a C--series CPM1, CQM1, C200HX/HG/HE (--Z)E.
Except for recording (saving) ladder programs on cassette tape and playing (reading) them back, almost all the functions of a programming console can be executed.
Caution
3-10-1
When the programming console functions are used, carefully check that the system is safe before carrying out the following operations:
-- Changing monitor data
-- Switching the operation mode
-- Forced set or reset
-- Changing a present value or set value
Usable Systems
The programming console function can be used with an NTH25/NTH25C connected to a PC when using the communications method indicated below.
Communications
Method
NT Link (1:1)
Applicable PCs
Connected
Port
C200HE--CPU42--(Z)E(*1)
C200HG--CPU43--(Z)E(*1)
C200HG--CPU63--(Z)E(*1)
C200HX--CPU44--(Z)E(*1)
C200HX--CPU64--(Z)E(*1)
C200HX--CPU65--ZE(*1)
C200HX--CPU85--ZE(*1)
CQM1--CPU4 --EV1(*1)
SRM1--C02--V1
CPU built--in
RS--232C port
CPM1--10CDR-CPM1--20CDR-CPM1--30CDR-CPM1A--10CD
CPM1A--20CD
CPM1A--30CD
CPM1A--40CD
Peripheral port
(*2)
-----
*1 The peripheral port programming console always has priority. If a programming
console is connected later, the programming console function of the
NTH25/NTH25C is invalidated and operation from the NTH25/NTH25C becomes impossible.
The programming console cannot be connected to the RS--232C port of the
communications board.
*2 An RS--232C cable cannot be connected to the peripheral port directly. An
RS--232C conversion adapter (CPM1--CIF01) is required.
74
Programming Console Function
Reference
Section 3-10
Note that the programming console function cannot be used with CPM1, CQM1,
and C200HX/HG/HE PCs of the following lot numbers.
CPM1:
5,
*6
where * is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y.
CQM1:
3,
4,
5,
*6
where * is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y.
C200HX/HG/HE:
5
*6
where * is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X.
3-10-2
Connection Method
For CQM1, C200HX/HG/HE(--ZE), SRM1
The connection method is exactly the same as for the NT link (1:1). Make the connection to the PC by referring to Section 2 ”Connection”.
For CPM1
The connection method is the same as for the NT link (1:1). Connect the RS--232C
cable to the peripheral port via an RS--232C conversion adapter (CPM1--CIF01).
Make the connection to the PC by referring to Section 2 ”Connection”.
75
Section 3-10
Programming Console Function
3-10-3
Method of Use
The ”programming console” screen is displayed by operating the CHECK menu as
described below.
Select ”PROG. CONSOLE”.
Specify the host’s operation mode.
SELECT THE OPERATION MODE
RUN
MONITOR
PROGRAM
PROGRAMMING CONSOLE
Reference
76
The programming console screen is displayed.
Press the programming console sheet keyboard
(touch switches) on the screen for the operation.
Press the ”Quit” touch switch at the bottom left of
the screen to exit the screen.
An error is displayed if a wrong communications
protocol is selected or a programming console is
connected to a peripheral port.
When an error screen is displayed, press anywhere on the screen to return to the
CHECK menu.
Section 3-10
Programming Console Function
Key Operations
The following describes only the differences with an actual programming console.
For details on using the NTH25/NTH25C as a programming console, refer to the
instruction manual for the programming console (C200H--PRO27--E).
! Mode selection keys, mode lock key
The display element on the programming console screen shown below comprises
the mode selection keys and the mode lock key. The mode selection keys change
the operation mode of the PC, and the mode lock key prevents unintended mode
changes.
Mode selection keys
Mode lock key
The RUN, MONITOR, and PROGRAM mode selection key elements are touch
switches. Pressing these key elements changes the PC operation mode. (Unlike
an actual programming console, it is possible to switch directly between the RUN
mode and the PROGRAM mode.)
The mode lock key element is also a touch switch. Each press of this key element
toggles between the ”lock ON” (with no key displayed) and ”lock OFF” (with key
displayed) states. In the lock ON state, mode selection key operations are disabled. The mode displays change as indicated in the figures below in the lock ON
status and in the lock OFF state.
When the programming console function starts, the lock ON status is established.
If the RUN, MONITOR, or PROGRAM mode selection key is pressed in the lock
OFF status, the mode changes and the lock ON status is established.
! In lock OFF state
RUN mode
MONITOR mode
PROGRAM mode
! In lock ON state
RUN mode
MONITOR mode
PROGRAM mode
77
Section 3-10
Programming Console Function
Reference
After the NTH25/NTH25C has entered the Programming Console Function
screen, specify the operation mode of the PC immediately by the mode selection
keys.
! Programming console sheet keyboard
The programming console keyboard used on the screen when the programming
console function is used is comprised entirely of touch switches (shown by the
dashed line frames in the figure below). A key operation is executed by pressing a
touch switch. However, since there is a discrepancy between the size of the displayed keys and the size of the touch switches, be sure to press as close to the
center of the key as possible by referring to the figure below.
PROGRAMMING CONSOLE
Differences with Respect to Programming Consoles
- Programs cannot be stored (recorded) or read (played back). If it is necessary to
store or read a program, use a peripheral tool.
- When the programming console function is used on the NTH25/NTH25C, the
buzzer tone do not sound.
Reference
78
When the programming console function is used on the NTH25/NTH25C, the operation sequence ([CLEAR] % [MONITOR] % [SHIFT] % [1]) for muting the key
input tone does not function.
SECTION 4
NTH25/NTH25C Functions
This section describes the functions of the NTH25/NTH25C.
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
PT Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1 Support Tool ”PT Configuration” Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-2 NTH Screen Data Converter ”Configuration” Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NTH25/NTH25C Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-1 Screen Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-2 Screen Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-3 Screen Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-4 Color Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-5 Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Areas for Control/Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-1 PT Status Control Area (Host $ NTH25/NTH25C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-2 PT Status Notify Area (NTH25/NTH25C to Host) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-3 Window Control Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-4 Trend Graph Control Area (host to NTH25/NTH25C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-1 Numeral Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-2 Character String Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-3 Bit Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixed Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-1 Circles, Arcs, Sectors, Polylines, Polygons, Rectangles
(fixed displays) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-2 Text (Fixed Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-3 Tiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-4 Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image and Library Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6-1 Image Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6-2 Library Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numeral Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character String Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11-1 Bar Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11-2 Trend Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm List, Alarm History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inputting Numerals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13-1 Numeral key type (”Numeral Input”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13-2 Thumbwheel Type (Thumbwheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14-1 Window Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14-2 Function Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14-3 Backlight OFF Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14-4 Clock Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14-5 Programming Console Function (Expansion Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
80
80
82
83
83
83
83
85
87
89
90
93
95
96
98
98
101
103
109
109
119
123
126
130
130
134
137
145
159
166
172
172
176
189
196
196
203
211
211
214
215
216
217
79
Section 4-1
PT Configuration Settings
4-1
PT Configuration Settings
The basic operation of the NTH25/NTH25C is determined by the ”PT Configuration” settings made on the Support Tool and ”Configuration” on the NTH Screen
Data Converter.
This section describes the settings made under ”PT Configuration” and ”Configuration”. However, note that the operations on the Support Tool are not described.
For details on these operations, see the NT--series Support Tool Ver. 3.0 for Windows95/98 Operation Manual (V053--E1-- ) or Section 6 ”NTH Screen Data Converter”.
4-1-1
Support Tool ”PT Configuration” Settings
The Support Tool has the following PT Configuration settings:
Only sections enclosed by
are valid.
[PT Model]
Set the model of PT to be connected and type of screen data to be created. Set as
follows for whichever of NTH25/NTH25C is being used:
NTH25 in use: NT31 (Do not select NT31--V1.)
NTH25C in use: NT31C (Do not select NT31C--V1.)
[Comments]
Set a comment relating to the screen data here. This comment is valid only within
the Support Tool, and cannot be displayed on the NTH25/NTH25C.
[PT Control/Notify Area]
Set the allocated words for the PT status control area and PT status notify area
here. See ”4--3 Areas for Control/Notification” (page 89).
80
Section 4-1
PT Configuration Settings
[Initial Screen]
Set the screen number of the screen that is displayed when NTH25/NTH25C operation starts. Note, however, that the screen number switches to the screen number written to the ”screen switch setting” word in the PT status control area when
communications with the host is begun. For details, see ”Functions of the PT Status Control Area” (page 91).
[History Setting]
This setting is invalid when the NTH25/NTH25C is used.
[Number of Table Entries]
This setting is invalid when the NTH25/NTH25C is used.
[Numeral Storage Type]
Set whether the contents of words allocated on the host are handled collectively as
BCD data or binary data. However, the numeral storage type set here is valid only
when ”System” is set for ”Storage Type” for each numeral memory table concerned.
Storage Type and Recognizable Numerals
When the contents of words allocated on the host are displayed in numeral display
elements, for example, numerals are interpreted according to the ”Numeral Strage
Type”. The numeral storage type setting changes how the NTH25/NTH25C recognizes numerals even if the contents of the word are the same.
BCD data format:
The contents of words on the host are interpreted as BCD (Binary Coded
Decimal) values. Note, however, that the ”--” sign cannot be input to words
on the host. So, the contents of words whose uppermost digit is ”F” are
treated as a negative value.
If ”A” to ”E” are stored to the uppermost digit of a word on the host, or if ”A” to
”F” are stored to digits other than the uppermost digit, conversion or display
will be in error. For example, those digits only will be calculated as being
hexadecimal values.
Binary data format:
The contents of words on the host are interpreted as signed binary data.
In this format, the uppermost bit is a sign bit. (When the bit is 1, this indicates
that the contents of words are a negative value.) When the allocated word is
one word, bit 15 is the sign bit, and when two words, bit 31 is the sign bit.
81
Section 4-1
PT Configuration Settings
4-1-2
NTH Screen Data Converter ”Configuration” Settings
The NTH Screen Data Converter has the following Configuration settings. For details on settings and operations, see ”Configuration”, page 260.
Reference
When ”NT Link” is set to ”Comm. Method” on the [Initialize] page, communication
cannot be set. If set to ”Memory Link”, the PLC Setting cannot be set.
! [Initialize] Page
-- Model (PT type)
NTH25, NTH25C
-- Auto CFL off (backlight auto OFF--ON/OFF and auto OFF time)
0:
1 to 99:
Auto OFF is OFF (PT status control bit ”backlight mode” is enabled)
1 to 99 minutes (PT status control bit ”backlight mode” is disabled)
-- Comm. Method (communications method used for communications between
NTH25/NTH25C and host)
Host link, memory link, NT link (1:1)
! [Communication] page
-- Baud rate (communications speed)
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
-- Stop bit (stop bit length)
1, 2
-- Data length
7, 8
-- Parity (ON/OFF, type)
Even, odd, none
! [PLC Setting] page
-- PLC Model (type of PC connected to NTH25/NTH25C)
SYSMAC--C (C series PC, SRM1), SYSMAC--CV/CS1 (CVM1/CV/CS1 series
PC)
82
Section 4-2
NTH25/NTH25C Screen
4-2
NTH25/NTH25C Screen
This section gives an outline of the screen, which is the basis of NTH25/NTH25C
functions.
4-2-1
Screen Composition
The NTH25/NTH25C screen is 320 dots wide by 240 dots high. Each dot is set by a
combination of an X coordinate (horizontal direction) and a Y coordinate (vertical
direction). The coordinate origin (0, 0) is at the top left of the screen.
0
X coordinate (horizontal direction)
319
0
Coordinates (X, Y)
239
4-2-2
Y coordinate (vertical direction)
319,239
Screen Numbers
The screens of the NTH25/NTH25C are classified and managed by ”screen numbers”.
Screen numbers are used to designate the first screen displayed when the
NTH25/NTH25C is started up, and to designate the target screen when switching
the screen display or other operations.
The NTH25/NTH25C allows up to 1000 screens to be registered in addition to
screens reserved for specific functions. For these screens, screen numbers can
be designated without restriction within the range 1 to 1000. There are also no restrictions on the order of screen numbers; they can also be discontinuous.
When creating a screen at the NTH25/NTH25C using the Support Tool, designate
a screen number and then register the display elements.
Note, however, that image/library lamps can be used only in screen numbers 1 to
200.
4-2-3
Screen Types
The screens that can be displayed by the NTH25/NTH25C are classified as follows according to their function.
-- Normal (standard) screens
-- Window screens
-- System screens (Programming Console screen)
Normal (standard) Screens
Normal (standard) screens are the basic screens of the NTH25/NTH25C. They
have no specific functions themselves and their purpose is to display elements
that have already been registered.
Normal (standard) screens can be registered under any screen numbers in the
range 1 to 1000.
83
Section 4-2
NTH25/NTH25C Screen
Window Screens
By the normal (standard) screen display method, a screen is displayed over the
entire panel area. In addition to this display method, the NTH25/NTH25C also allows screens to be displayed in only one part of the screen area. This partial
screen is called a ”window”, and a screen to which a window is registered is called
a ”window screen”.
Up to 20 window screens can be registered under any screen number in the range
1 to 1000. However, screens that are registered as window screens cannot be displayed independently like normal (standard) screens.
Base screen
Keypad
Keypad
Touch switch for opening
the window
7 8 9 
4 5 6 .
1 2 3 0
Window displayed on the screen at
the registered size and position
Window screen
7 8 9 
4 5 6 .
1 2 3 0
Window area
Windows can be called anytime by operating a touch switch, regardless of which
screen is currently displayed. It is also possible to open and close windows by the
control from the host.
For details, see ”Window Functions” (page 211).
System Screens
Screens with predetermined functions are called ”system screens”.
The table below shows the type of system screen:
Screen number
9020
Name
Programming
console function screen
Function
As an extended function, the NTH25/NTH25C features the ”programming console” function, which
enables equivalent functions to those of a programming console. When the NTH25/NTH25C is
connected to a host which supports the programming console function, it can be used in place of
the programming console by designating screen
number 9020 as the display screen.
For details on the programming console function, see 3--10 ”Programming Console Function” (page 74).
84
Section 4-2
NTH25/NTH25C Screen
Screen Attributes
The NTH25/NTH25C allows attributes to be set to each screen, so that the specific
function defined by the attribute is executed when the screen is displayed.
Set the screen attributes as the properties of each screen using the Support Tool.
The screen attribute that can be set is as follows.
! Comment
A comment indicating the contents of the screen can be set as any required character string up to 24 characters long.
4-2-4
Color Display
The NTH25C can display the entire screen, and elements such as text and graphics, in eight different colors. Specify a color as an attribute for each display element
when creating a screen using the Support Tool.
Available Colors
The NTH25C can display the following eight colors:
Black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow, white
When the display mode for elements is set to inverse and inverse flash, colors are
displayed in their corresponding inverse color.
Display color and their respective inverse colors are as follows:
Black $ White, Blue $ Yellow, Red $ Cyan, Magenta $ Green
Reference
”Inverse color” is a color combination that is opposite in terms of the three primary
color: red, green and blue.
Example: Blue (red 0, blue 1, green 0) $ Yellow (red 1, blue 0, green 1)
! Color correspondence between NTH25C and NTH25
The only colors that the NTH25 can display are black and white.
The screen data for the NTH25C can be displayed on an NTH25 and in this case
the color correspondences are as follows.
Colors on NTH25C
Reference
Colors on NTH25
Black, blue, red, magenta
White
Green, cyan, yellow, white
Black
When screen data is created for the NTH25, black and white are displayed as
white and black respectively on the Support Tool. On the display of a black--and-white personal computer, the display at the NTH25 matches the colors displayed
at the Support Tool. But when a personal computer with a color display is used, the
colors are reversed.
85
Section 4-2
NTH25/NTH25C Screen
Transparent Display
When elements are displayed on top of others, normally the background color of
the element on top conceals the element below so that it cannot be seen.
In addition to the above eight colors, the color ”transparent” is available for the
background of some display elements.
When ”transparent” is set, nothing appears behind the element, and the display
element or screen background color underneath it is visible.
<Normal display>
<Transparent display>
Graphic under character
A
Character
Background color
Graphic under character
A
Character
Background color (transparent)
! Possible applications of the color designation ”transparent”
Background of labels for lamps and touch switches (fixed as ”transparent”)
(Though ”transparent” can be set as the background color for characters (fixed
display) and tiling patterns and marks, this color designation is displayed as black
on the NTH25 and white on the NTH25C.)
! Impossible applications of the color designation ”transparent”
Background of character string display elements
Background of numeral display elements
Background of numerals in numeral input fields
Background of characters indicating percentages (%) on graphs
Display color of lamps and touch switches
Background color of temporary input fields
Display color of alarm list/history
Text Display Color
The color of characters (character color) and that of their rectangular enclosing
frames (background color) can be specified.
A
86
Background color
Character color
Section 4-2
NTH25/NTH25C Screen
Graphic Display Color
The colors of lines and tiling patterns can be specified for graphics.
The colors that can be designated for tiling patterns are the color of the pattern
itself and the background color of the pattern.
On the NTH25/NTH25C, the border line color specified on the Support Tool is invalid as the tiling pattern display color is used as the color of the tile border.
Border color
(Same as the pattern
display color)
Pattern display color
(Foreground)
Tiling
Pattern background color
(Background)
Line color
Reference
4-2-5
When a lamp, a touch switch, and a graphic are displayed in color, part of the
frames of the display elements may be invisible because of the combination of the
background, and tiling colors. This is a phenomenon peculiar to a color LCD, and is
not a failure of the system. In such a case, change the color combination.
Display Elements
The NTH25/NTH25C can display the following elements on a screen:
Mark
Text
Image data
99/01/11 14:10
LINE B PRODUCTION
STATUS
EMERGENCY
STOP
OK
NG
Touch switch
Lamp
Graphic
PR
Character string
display
Numeral display
PR
OUTPUT TARGET
2662
5000
1204
3000
CLR
HOME
53%
40%
7
4
1
0
8
5
2
.
9
6
3
Numeric keys
Numeral Graph
input
87
Section 4-2
NTH25/NTH25C Screen
Element
Fixed display
Lamps
Description
See
Arcs
Possible display modes: standard/flash/inverse/inverse flash. Other display Page 109
modes are not available.
Circles
Possible display modes: standard/flash/inverse/inverse flash. Other display Page 109
modes are not available.
Rectangles
Possible display modes: standard/flash/inverse/inverse flash. Other display Page 109
modes are not available.
Polygons
Possible display modes: standard/flash/inverse/inverse flash. Other display Page 109
modes are not available.
Polylines
Possible display modes: standard/flash. Other display modes are not avail- Page 109
able.
Sectors
Possible display modes: standard/flash/inverse/inverse flash. Other display Page 109
modes are not available.
Texts
Possible display modes: standard/flash/inverse flash. Other display modes Page 119
are not available.
Tiling
The inside of an enclosed area is filled with a tiling pattern.
Page 123
Image data
Graphics of any required size, composed of dots. The display mode cannot be changed.
Page 130
Library data
These are a grouped set of elements used as a single element. Fixed display graphics can be registered as library data.
Page 134
Marks
These are graphics composed of 16 by 16 dots which can be treated as
characters.
Page 126
Normal
(standard)
lamps
These are graphics that light (flash) and go out according to the state of
bits at the host. The following shapes can be selected for normal (standard) lamps: rectangles or circles.
Page 137
Image/library
lamps
These are elements that display different image/library data according to
the state of bits at the host.
Page 137
Touch switches
These are elements that can be used as switches: they allow the execuPage 145
tion of various functions, such as notification to the host, to be executed by
pressing the touch panel of the NTH25/NTH25C. Double line frame can be
set to touch switches. Touch switches can also overlap circles, polygons,
sectors and other fixed display graphics.
Numeral display
The contents of the currently allocated host (PC) are displayed as a numeral. The display changes in accordance with changes in the data contents.
Character string display
The contents of the currently allocated host (PC) are treated as a character Page 166
code and are displayed as a character string. The display changes in accordance with changes in the data contents.
Graphs
Bar graphs
The data contents of the currently allocated host (PC) are displayed in the
form of a bar graph.
Page 172
Trend graphs
The data contents of the currently allocated host (PC) are displayed in the
form of a broken--line graph.
Page 176
Alarm list
This element monitors the state of host bits designated in advance, and
displays the message corresponding to the bit that turns ON.
Page 189
Alarm history
This element monitors the state of host bits designated in advance, and
displays the contents of the alarm history record (occurrence order) which
records the time when the bits turn ON, together with the message corresponding to each bit.
The frequency order cannot be displayed on the NTH25/NTH25C.
Page 189
Alarms
Input Settings
88
Page 159
Numeral input This is an element for inputting numerals to the currently allocated host
(PC) by using touch switches as numeral keys.
Page 196
Thumbwheel
switch
Page 203
This is an element for inputting numerals to the currently allocated host
(PC) by using ”+” and ”--” touch switches for each digit.
Areas for Control/Notification
4-3
Section 4-3
Areas for Control/Notification
The following areas are provided for the controlling and exchanging information
relating to a PT (such as changes in status) between the NTH25/NTH25C and the
host.
! PT status control area
This area is used to designate the screen to be displayed on the NTH25/NTH25C,
to notify the host of the currently displayed screen number, to copy data contents
between memory tables in the NTH25/NTH25C, and to control the status of the
backlight and other statuses.
Allocate the PT status control area to the host on the Support Tool.
! PT status notify area
This area is used to notify the host of the memory table number when there is a
change in the data contents of a memory table in the NTH25/NTH25C, and to
notify the host of information such as changes in the PT status.
Allocate the PT status notify area to the host on the Support Tool.
! Window control area
This is work area used by the host for controlling windows. When windows are
used, more than the required number of window control areas (maximum 20
areas) must be allocated to the host.
Allocate the window area to the host on the NTH Screen Data Converter.
! Trend graph control area
This area is for stopping and continuing sampling (reading the contents of words
on the host) of trend graphs and clearing past trend graph records.
Allocate the trend graph control area to the host on the NTH Screen Data Converter.
Reference
- The PT status control area and PT status notify area must be allocated to the
host.
- The PT status control area, PT status notify area, window control area and trend
control area must be allocated so that they do not overlap each other.
- The window control area and trend graph control area must be allocated to the
host when windows and trend graphs are used.
89
Section 4-3
Areas for Control/Notification
4-3-1
PT Status Control Area (Host $ NTH25/NTH25C)
When data is written to this area from the host, the NTH25/NTH25C reads the data
and operates accordingly. However, note that the number of the currently displayed screen is written to the ”screen switch setting” word from the
NTH25/NTH25C too.
The PT status control area is configured as five consecutive words as shown below. The first word (word n) is set in the ”Control/Notify Area” settings in the PT
configuration settings made using the Support Tool.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 Bit
Word
n
Screen No. (4-digit BCD or hexadecimal)
n+1
System reserve
n+2
System reserve
n+3
PT status control bits
n+4
Reserved for system use
Screen switch setting
PT status control
Allocated Words of the PT Status Control Area
The PT status control area (host $ NTH25/NTH25C) can be allocated to the following host (PC) areas.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocation
CVM1/CV Series PCs
DM
Data memory
Data memory
CH
I/O relay
I/O relay
TIM
Timer present value
Timer present value
CNT
Counter present value
Counter present value
HR
Holding relay
AR
Auxiliary relay
LR
Link relay
Allocation
Special auxiliary relay
: OK
: NG
Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1/CV series PCs are all allocated to
system functions, they cannot be used for purposes other than system use.
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. see Appendix H
”PC Memory Map”, page 321.
90
Section 4-3
Areas for Control/Notification
Functions of the PT Status Control Area
! Screen switch setting
Data is written to the ”screen switch setting” word from both the NTH25/NTH25C
and the host. The meaning of the data differs according to whether it is written from
the NTH25/NTH25C or the host. However, if the NTH25/NTH25C is currently operating, the number of the screen currently displayed on the NTH25/NTH25C is
always reflected in the ”screen switch setting” word.
! When data is written from the host
To switch the screen displayed at the NTH25/NTH25C by an instruction from the
host, write the screen number, as a 4--digit BCD value, to the ”screen switch setting” word. (On the NTH25/NTH25C, screen numbers cannot be specified in hexadecimal.)
NTH25/NTH25
C
PLC
PT status control area
Screen switch setting
" Screen number
System reserve
Designated screen
System reserve
PT status control setting
System reserve
[”Screen switch setting” in the PT status control area]
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Word
n
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Screen number (4--digit BCD)
0 Bit
Screen switch setting
The screen numbers that can be set are as follows.
BCD
Reference
Screen
0000
No--display (screen cleared)
0001 to 1000
Screen numbers 1 to 1000
9020
Programming console screen
- The screen can also be switched by touch switch operation (page 145).
- If no elements are registered to the designated screen number, the screen enters a no--display state. If a screen of screen number 1001 or onwards is designated, the screen is not switched.
- When operation of NTH25/NTH25C is started, the screen display follows the
”Initial Screen” setting made in ”PT Configuration” on the Support Tool. After
this, screen display follows the ”screen switch setting” when communications is
established with the host.
- If the ”screen switch setting” is also invalid (for example, the screen number is
not specified in BCD), the screen is not switched. Also, the screen enters a no-display state if a screen number to which screen data is not registered is specified.
91
Section 4-3
Areas for Control/Notification
! When data is written from the NTH25/NTH25C
When the screen display has been switched by operation at the NTH25/NTH25C,
the new screen number is written as a 4--digit BCD into the ”screen switch setting”
word by the NTH25/NTH25C. (On the NTH25/NTH25C, screen numbers cannot
be specified in hexadecimal.)
NTH25/NTH25C
PLC
PT status control area
Screen switch setting
" Screen number
System reserve
Currently displayed
screen
System reserve
PT status control setting
System reserve
[”Screen switch setting” in the PT status control area]
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Word
n
8
7
6
5
4
3
Screen number (4--digit BCD)
2
1
0 Bit
Screen switch setting
The following screen numbers are notified:
BCD
Reference
Screen
0000
No--display (screen cleared)
0001 to 1000
Screen numbers 1 to 1000
9020
Programming console screen
The screen number is notified only when the screen is switched by operation on
the NTH25/NTH25C.
! PT status control bits
The functions of the PT status control bits are as follows:
n+3ch
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
5
0
Reference
Control content
Clock data output
Backlight mode
1 (ON)
0 (OFF)
Yes
ON
OFF
No
The PT status control bits are checked in individual bits by the NTH25/NTH25C.
The only functions that are actually executed are those whose corresponding bit
state has changed.
! Clock data output (bit 5)
This bit is used to notify the PT status notify bit of the NTH25/NTH25C’s internal
clock data (year, month, day, hours, minutes). (See page 93.)
The state of bit 5 controls output of clock data as follows:
1 (ON): Notifies PT status notify area.
0 (OFF): Does not notify PT status notify area.
Caution
92
For system safety, leave clock data output in the PT status control area set to 1
(ON) at all times, and run a program that periodically reads clock data output in the
PT status control area to confirm whether or not the PT is operating normally.
Section 4-3
Areas for Control/Notification
! Backlight mode (bit 0)
The backlight mode is used for controlling the backlight of the NTH25/NTH25C.
The state of bit 8 controls backlight operation as follows:
-- 1 (ON): Lights the backlight.
-- 0 (OFF): Does not light the backlight.
Reference
- NTH series PTs differ from NT series PTs in that the ”Configuration” -- ”Auto CFL
off” setting on the NTH Screen Data Converter determines enable/disable of the
PT status control bit ”backlight mode” (bit 0).
To enable the ”backlight mode”, set the ”Auto CFL off” setting to 0 (OFF). (If the
”Auto CFL off” setting is set to 1 to 99, the ”backlight mode” is disabled.)
- The default PC setting for each area is 0. So, PT status control bit ”backlight
mode” (bit 0) also is 0 (OFF). When you connect the NTH25/NTH25C with the
”backlight mode” set to 0, the backlight remains out. In this case, set the PT status control bit ”backlight mode” (bit 0) to 1 (ON).
4-3-2
PT Status Notify Area (NTH25/NTH25C to Host)
The PT status notify area is provided to notify the host of changes in the status of
the NTH25/NTH25C. The host can determine the status of the NTH25/NTH25C
by reading this area.
The PT status notify area is configured as six consecutive words as shown below.
The first word (word m) is set in the ”Control/Notify Area” settings in the PT configuration settings made using the Support Tool.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 Bit
Word
m
PT status notify bits
m+1
System reserve
m+2
System reserve
m+3
Month (BCD 2--digit)
Day (BCD 2--digit)
m+4
Hour (BCD 2--digit)
Minute (BCD 2--digit)
m+5
PT status
Clock data
Year (BCD 4--digit)
93
Section 4-3
Areas for Control/Notification
Allocated Words of the PT Status Notify Area
The PT status notify area (NTH25/NTH25C to host) can be allocated to the following host (PC) areas.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocation
CVM1/CV Series PCs
DM
Data memory
Data memory
CH
I/O relay
I/O relay
TIM
Timer present value
Timer present value
CNT
Counter present value
Counter present value
HR
Holding relay
AR
Auxiliary relay
LR
Link relay
Allocation
Special auxiliary relay
: OK
: NG
Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1/CV series PCs are all allocated to
system functions, they cannot be used for purposes other than system use.
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. See Appendix H
”PC Memory Map”, page 321.
Caution
Allocate the PT status control area and PT status notify area so that they do not
overlap each other.
Functions of the PT Status Notify Area
! PT status notify bits
The functions of the PT status notify bits are as follows:
n+3ch
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
11
0
Numeral input strobe flag
Notify content
Backlight status
1 (ON)
0 (OFF)
ON
OFF
! Numeral input strobe flag (bit 11)
This bit is set to ”1” (ON) when a numeral is input using the numeral input function
of the NTH25/NTH25C. After the host is notified, this bit is automatically returned
to ”0” (OFF).
Note, however, that when the NTH25/NTH25C is connected to a CVM1/CV series
CPU unit, startup may not be detected when the PC is set to asynchronous operation.
! Backlight status (bit 0)
The backlight status of the NTH25/NTH25C is notified as follows:
1 (ON):
0 (OFF):
Backlight lit
Backlight off
Note, however, this bit is returned to ”0” (OFF) when the NTH25/NTH25C displays
the System Menu or an error screen.
94
Section 4-3
Areas for Control/Notification
! Clock data
The NTH25/NTH25C’s internal clock data is written at 1--minute intervals for the
duration that ”clock data output” of the PT status control in PT status control area
bit is 1 (ON).
The date and time can be displayed on the NTH25/NTH25C by sending the value
written here to a word to which a numeral display element is allocated.
4-3-3
Window Control Area
This is work area used by the NTH25/NTH25C for controlling windows.
The 1--word area shown below must be allocated to the host for more than the required number of window screens to be used. (The maximum number of window
screens used is 20, so the maximum number of words that can be allocated is also
20.) Each of the words in the window control area need not be continuous as they
can be allocated individually to the host. These words are set at ”window control
area setting” in ”Configuration” on the NTH Screen Data Converter. Allocate areas
for more than the required number of window screens in order from ”window control area” No.1 on the NTH Screen Data Converter.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 Bit
Work area
Word
More than the required number of window screens (maximum
20 areas) must be allocated individually to the host.
Reference
- When using windows, window control areas for more than the required number
of window screens must be allocated to the host. (Allocate areas for more than
the required number of window screens in order from ”window control area”
No.1 on the NTH Screen Data Converter.)
- After allocating window control areas, do not change their contents.
Allocated Words of the Window Control Area
The window control area can be allocated to the following host (PC) areas.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocation
CVM1/CV Series PCs
DM
Data memory
Data memory
CH
I/O relay
I/O relay
TIM
Timer present value
Timer present value
CNT
Counter present value
Counter present value
HR
Holding relay
AR
Auxiliary relay
LR
Link relay
Allocation
Special auxiliary relay
: OK
: NG
Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1/CV series PCs are all allocated to
system functions, they cannot be used for purposes other than system use.
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. See Appendix H
”PC Memory Map”, page 321.
95
Section 4-3
Areas for Control/Notification
4-3-4
Trend Graph Control Area (host to NTH25/NTH25C)
By manipulating the trend graph control area, you can start and continue sampling
(reading the contents of words on the host), and clear trend graph data recorded in
the past from each trend graph. For details on trend graphs, see ”Trend Graphs”,
page 176.
The trend graph control area is configured as four consecutive words as shown
below. The first word (j word) in each area is set in the ”Trend Graph Control Area
Setting” in the configuration settings on the NTH Screen Data Converter.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 Bit
Word
Reference
j word
Clear bit
j + 1 word
Clear bit
j + 2 word
Sampling stop/continue bit
j + 3 word
Sampling stop/continue bit
Clear trend graph
records
Trend graph
sampling
stop/continue
When using trend graphs, the trend graph control area must be allocated to the
host.
Allocated Words of the Trend Graph Control Area
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocation
CVM1/CV Series PCs
DM
Data memory
Data memory
CH
I/O relay
I/O relay
TIM
Timer present value
Timer present value
CNT
Counter present value
Counter present value
HR
Holding relay
AR
Auxiliary relay
LR
Link relay
Allocation
Special auxiliary relay
: OK
: NG
The trend graph control area can be allocated to the following host (PC) areas.
Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1/CV series PCs are all allocated to
system functions, they cannot be used for purpose other than system use.
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. See Appendix H
”PC Memory Map”, page 321.
Up to one trend graph frame can be registered to a single screen, and up to 20
frames can be registered to the entire screen data file. Trend graph numbers 1to
20 are allocated automatically from the smallest screen number upwards.
The clear bit and sampling stop/continue bit correspond to trend graph numbers as
follows:
Clear bit
j word
j + 1 word
Sampling bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
j + 2 word 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
j + 3 word
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit
20 19 18 17
(Figures in frames are trend graph numbers. ”--” indicates that the number is unused (always 0).)
96
Section 4-3
Areas for Control/Notification
Functions of the Trend Graph Control Area
Sampling can be stopped and continued, and past data records can be cleared by
writing to each bit corresponding to a trend graph number as follows:
-- Clear bit
0 (OFF):
1 (ON):
Not cleared
Cleared
-- Sampling stop/continue bit
0 (OFF):
1 (ON):
Reference
Continue (not stopped)
Stop
Sampling stop/continue and clearing of past records can also be performed by operating touch switches. (See page 145.) Note, however, that when a touch switch
is operated, the operation is applied collectively to trend graphs 1 to 16 and 17 to
20.
97
Section 4-4
Memory Tables
4-4
Memory Tables
The OMRON PTs have the following three memory areas that can be written to
freely from the host.
-- ”Numeral memory tables” for numeric value data
-- ”Character string memory tables” for text data
-- ”Bit memory tables” for bit data
Page 98
Page 101
Page 103
The contents of numeral memory tables and character string memory tables can
be set when the respective memory table is displayed on the screen on the Support Tool, or set by a table editor.
Reference
4-4-1
The above description is for most OMRON PTs.
The NTH25/NTH25C does not hold these memory tables internally; display elements directly reference words and bits on the host.
Note, however, that when screen data is created on the Support Tool, you cannot
set to directly reference the host from a display element. So, be sure to allocate a
memory table to a display element so that the host is referenced from the memory
table. Though the display element does not actually have a memory table, the host
is referenced using the PC address currently set to the memory table.
Numeral Memory Tables
[Function Outline]
”Numeral memory tables” are internal memories for storing numeral data. Note,
however, that the NTH25/NTH25C does not actually have numeral memory
tables, so, only the host word (PC address) and referencing method (storage
method) currently set to the numeral memory table are used when a display element references a host word. (When screens are created on the Support Tool, set
a numeral memory table to the display element so that the host is artificially referenced via the numeral memory table.)
Numeral memory tables are allocated numeral memory table numbers so that
they can be managed and specified individually.
NTH25/NTH25C
1 2 3 4
9 9 9 9
98
Display
Display
PLC
Numeral memory table No. 1
Allocated word
Numeral memory table No. 5
Allocated word
Section 4-4
Memory Tables
[Setting Restrictions]
The items that can be set on the Support Tool vary from the valid settings on the
NTH25/NTH25C. Pay attention to these restrictions when creating screen data.
Item
Number of numeral
memory tables
NTH25/NTH25C
Support Tool
Not supported
Changeable
Number of words in numer- Settable
al memory tables
Not supported (Automatically determined by the
type of display element and
number of display digits)
Value
Settable
Not supported
Initial
Settable
Not supported
[Common Attributes]
Numeral memory tables have the following properties.
Only sections enclosed by
are valid.
Possible Settings
Property
Meaning
Storage Type
System/Binary/BCD
Sets whether to recognize the contents of host words as ”binary”
(hexadecimal) or BCD (Binary Codes Decimal).
If a setting is made for ”System”, it complies with the ”Numeral
Storage Type” setting in the PT configuration.
For details, see ”Word contents and displayed numeral” (page
163) and ”Input numeral and stored data” (page 208).
PLC Address
Any word address on the host
Word on the host to which the numeral memory table is allocated
When the numeral memory table is allocated to two words, specify the first (lower) word.
For details, see ”Allocated words” (page 100).
I/O Comment
Up to 16 characters of text
Comment that describes the contents of a numeral memory table
99
Section 4-4
Memory Tables
! Allocated words
Numeral memory tables can be allocated to the following host (PC) areas.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocation
CVM1/CV Series PCs
DM
Data memory
Data memory
CH
I/O relay
I/O relay
TIM
Timer present value
Timer present value
CNT
Counter present value
Counter present value
HR
Holding relay
AR
Auxiliary relay
LR
Link relay
Allocation
Special auxiliary relay
: OK
: NG
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. See Appendix H
”PC Memory Map”, page 321.
[Display Functions]
Numeral memory tables themselves have no display function.
To display the contents of numeral memory tables (words on host), use ”Numeral
Display” (page 159) or 4--11 ”Graphs” (page 172).
[Input Functions]
The numeral memory table setting is used to read and display the contents of
words on the host from the display element.
Note, however, that reading is only executed for those elements that are being
used for the currently displayed screen.
[Output Functions]
The numeral memory table setting is used to write the numeral that was input by
the numeral input function to the word on the host.
Note, however, that writing is only executed in the following cases.
- When the contents of the numeral memory table have changed as a result of
operations at the NTH25/NTH25C, such as use of the input setting function.
[Processing Functions]
The contents of the allocated word(s) on the host are interpreted and stored in accordance with the set properties (see ”Common Attributes”).
[Relationship with Other Elements]
- When ”numeral display” is used, the contents of the word on the host can be interpreted and displayed in real time according to the PC address and storage
type currently set to the numeral memory table (page 159).
- When ”bar graph” is used, the contents of the word on the host can be interpreted and displayed in real time in the form of a bar graph according to the PC
address and storage type currently set to the numeral memory table (page 172).
- When a ”trend graph” is used, changes over time in the contents of a numeral
memory table can be displayed in the form of a broken line graph (page 176).
100
Section 4-4
Memory Tables
- When a ”numeral input” is used, numerals can be input to the word on the host
from an NTH25/NTH25C screen (page 196).
- If the contents of numeral memory tables are changed by operation on the
NTH25/NTH25C, the change is notified to the ”numeral input strobe” of the ”PT
status notify area” (page 93).
4-4-2
Character String Memory Tables
[Function Outline]
”Character string memory tables” are internal memories for recording character
string data. Note, however, that the NTH25/NTH25C does not actually have character string memory tables, so, only the host word (PC address) currently set to
the character string memory table is used when a character string display element
references a host word. (When screens are created on the Support Tool, set a
character string memory table to the character string display element so that the
host is artificially referenced via the character string memory table.)
Character string memory tables are allocated character string memory table numbers so that they can be managed and specified individually.
NTH25/NTH25C
PLC
Allocated word
abcde
Display
Character string memory table No. 8 Read
ABCDE
Allocated word
Display
Character string memory table No. 12
Read
[Setting Restrictions]
The items that can be set on the Support Tool vary from the valid settings on the
NTH25/NTH25C. Pay attention to these restrictions when creating screen data.
Item
Support Tool
NTH25/NTH25C
Number of character string
memory tables
Settable
Not supported
Number of words in character string memory table
Settable
Not settable (fixed to 21
CH)
Value
Used as the initial value of
the character string
memory table
Not used as the initial value. It is used only as the
alarm message for the
alarm list/history function.
Initial
Settable
Not supported
Usable characters
Alphanumerics and symbols, marks
Alphanumerics and symbols
101
Section 4-4
Memory Tables
[Common Attributes]
Character string memory tables have the following properties.
Only sections enclosed by
are valid.
Possible Settings
Property
Meaning
Alphanumeric and symbols
Value
Default character string after the contents of the character string
memory table have been initialized. (The default is actually used
as the alarm message for the alarm list/history function.)
Any word address on the host
PLC Address
Host word(s) to which the character string memory table is allocated
Specify the first (lower) word.
For details, see ”Allocated words” below.
Up to 16 characters of text
I/O Comment
Comment that describes the contents of a character string
memory table
! Allocated words
Character string memory tables can be allocated to the following host (PC) areas.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocation
CVM1/CV Series PCs
DM
Data memory
Data memory
CH
I/O relay
I/O relay
TIM
Timer present value
Timer present value
CNT
Counter present value
Counter present value
HR
Holding relay
AR
Auxiliary relay
LR
Link relay
Allocation
Special auxiliary relay
: OK
: NG
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. See Appendix H
”PC Memory Map”, page 321.
102
Section 4-4
Memory Tables
[Display Functions]
Character string memory tables themselves have no display function.
To display the contents of character string memory tables, use 4--10 ”Character
String Display” (page 166).
The character string that is set as the “Value” is displayed as the message in the
”alarm list” (page 189) and ”alarm history” (page 189) functions.
[Input Functions]
The character string memory table setting is used to read and display the contents
of words on the host from the display element.
Note, however, that reading is only executed for those elements that are being
used for the currently displayed screen.
[Output Functions]
Character string memory tables have no output function.
[Processing Functions]
Character string memory tables have no data processing function.
[Relationship with Other Elements]
- When ”character string display” is used, the contents of the word on the host can
be interpreted and displayed in real time according to the PC address currently
set to the character string memory table (page 166).
- When ”alarm list” or ”alarm history” is used, the contents of the “Value” set to the
character string memory table can be displayed as a message (page 189).
4-4-3
Bit Memory Tables
[Function Outline]
Bit memory tables are internal memories for storing bit data.
They are allocated to a bit on the host to monitor a bit, and can execute a specific
function in accordance with the status of that bit.
Bit memory tables are allocated bit memory table numbers so that they can be
managed and specified individually.
Bit memory tables have the following functions.
! Alarm list/history function
When the state of the host bit to which a bit memory table is allocated changes to 1
(ON), the “Value” (message) of the character string memory table currently set to
the bit memory table is displayed (this is the ”alarm list function”). To use the alarm
list function, it must be registered to the screen in advance. If more than one bit
memory table is set to the alarm list function, the bit memory table with the smallest
bit memory table number is given display priority. So, it is possible to allocate an
order of priority to displayed messages.
103
Section 4-4
Memory Tables
The date and time when the state of the host bit to which the bit memory table is
allocated changes to ”1” (ON) is recorded in the alarm history (this is the ”alarm
history function”).
For details, see 4--12 ”Alarm List, Alarm History” (page 189).
Character string
memory table No. 32
Character string memory table No. 50
No. 13
Character string memory table No. 32
I
No. 14
Character string memory table No. 54
Bit
0
0
0
PLC
" 1 (ON)
No. 15
Message set for bit memory table No.14
(”Value” set for character string memory
table No.32)
! Operation when using the alarm list/history function
The operation when using the alarm list/history function is as follows.
Reference
- For the alarm list function, display is in ascending order of bit memory table
numbers. For the alarm history function, display is in occurrence order (from
newest record).
- With the alarm list function, the message is automatically cleared when the host
bit to which the bit memory table is allocated returns to ”0” (OFF) during display.
When the state of a bit memory table changes to ”1” (ON), the contents of the currently set character string memory table are displayed as a message.
”Value” contents of character string memory
table currently set to the bit memory table
whose state has changed to ”1” (ON).
PROCESS 3 STOPPED
WATER TANK OVERHEATING
104
If an alarm message display
field (alarm list) with multiple
lines is created, alarms are
displayed in ascending order
of bit memory table numbers.
Section 4-4
Memory Tables
[Setting Restrictions]
The items that can be set on the Support Tool vary from the valid settings on the
NTH25/NTH25C. Pay attention to these restrictions when creating screen data.
Item
Number of bit memory
tables
Support Tool
Settable
NTH25/NTH25C
Not settable (fixed to 240)
(bit memory tables 0 to
239)
Allocated bits in bit memory Settable in single bits inde- Only the word number curtable
rently set to bit memory
pendently to each bit
table number 0 is supmemory table
ported. (Bit memory table
number 0 is automatically
allocated in order to bit 0 of
the specified word, bit
memory table number 1 to
bit 1 of the specified word,
and so forth until bit
memory table number 16 is
allocated to bit 0 of the next
specified word, after which
bit memory table number 0
is allocated to bit 0.)
Character string used as
message
Contents of any character
string memory table (Character string memory tables
can be set independently
to each bit memory table.)
Multiple lines cannot be
displayed.
Default character string
(Value) of character string
memory tables numbers 0
to 239. (Character string
memory tables can be set
independently to each bit
memory table.)
Multiple lines cannot be
displayed.
Functions of bit memory
table
None, Switch screen,
Alarm
Not settable (fixed to
Alarm)
Screen switching, screen
number
Settable
Not settable (screen
switching function not supported)
Image/library code
Settable
Not settable (image/library
data can not be displayed)
Recording to alarm history
Settable
Not Settable (always recorded)
Message display color
Settable individually to
each bit memory table
Only setting of bit memory
table number 0 is supported. (Other bit memory
tables are set to the same
setting.)
105
Section 4-4
Memory Tables
[Common Attributes]
Bit memory tables have the following common properties.
! Common properties
Only sections enclosed by
are valid.
Possible Settings
Property
Meaning
Description
Indicates the settings unique to each function.
PLC Address
Bit number on the bit on host
Bit on host to which a bit memory table is allocated.
On NTH25/NTH25C, only the setting of the word number of bit
memory table number 0 is supported. The settings of other PC
addresses in the bit memory table are not supported. In this
case, bit memory table numbers are automatically allocated in
number order as follows: bit memory table number 0 to bit 0 of
the specified word, bit memory table number 1 to bit 1 of the specified word and so forth until bit memory table number 16 is allocated to bit 0 of the next specified word, after which bit memory
table number 0 is allocated to bit 0 of the specified word.
I/O Comment
Up to 16 characters of text
Comment that describes the contents of a bit memory table
! Alarm list/history function properties
Only sections enclosed by
106
are valid.
Section 4-4
Memory Tables
Possible Settings
Property
Meaning
String table entry
0 to 239
Number of the character string memory table whose contents are
displayed as a message in the alarm list/history when the state of
the allocated bit of the bit memory table changes to ”1” (ON).
(”Value” set for the character string)
Foreground color
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
Color of message text (only black and white on NTH25)
Only the setting of bit memory number 0 is supported.
! Allocated bit
Bit memory table number 0 can be allocated to the following host (PC) areas. (Only
the word number is valid. The setting of other allocated bits in the bit memory table
are invalid.)
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocation
CVM1/CV Series PCs
DM
Data memory
Data memory
CH
I/O relay
I/O relay
TIM
Timer present value
Timer present value
CNT
Counter present value
Counter present value
HR
Holding relay
AR
Auxiliary relay
LR
Link relay
Allocation
Special auxiliary relay
: OK
: NG
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. See Appendix H
”PC Memory Map”, page 321.
To specify the data memory (DM), a bit number (00 to 15) must be specified after
the word number. Note, however, that the bit number is always handled as 00 actually.
[Display Functions]
Messages are displayed according to the state of the bit memory table if the ”alarm
list” and ”alarm history” functions are registered to the screen.
[Input Functions]
The contents of bits to which the bit memory table is currently allocated are always
read and processed according to the state of the bit memory table. Note, however,
that no processing is carried out when a bit is not allocated to bit memory table
number 0.
[Output Functions]
Bit memory tables have no output function.
[Processing Functions]
Bit memory tables have no data processing function.
107
Section 4-4
Memory Tables
[Relationship with Other Elements]
- When the alarm list function is used, messages can be displayed in real time in
accordance with the state of bits on the host (page 189).
- When the alarm history function is used, the date and time when the state of the
host bit changes to ”1” (ON), and the number of times it comes ON, can be displayed (page 189).
Reference
108
When the number of alarm history records exceeds 200, the records are deleted
from the oldest record onwards so that new alarm history data can be stored.
Section 4-5
Fixed Displays
4-5
Fixed Displays
”Fixed displays” are graphics and text that are always displayed on the screen and
do not change. This section gives details of fixed displays.
The following types of fixed display are available:
---------Reference
4-5-1
Text
Circle
Arc
Sector
Polyline
Polygon
Rectangle
Tiling
Mark
Page 119
Page 109
Page 109
Page 109
Page 109
Page 109
Page 109
Page 123
Page 126
The Support Tool also includes image data and library data as fixed display elements, but since these are functionally different, they are described separately in
this manual. For details on image and library data, see 4--6 ”Image and Library
Data” (page 130).
Circles, Arcs, Sectors, Polylines, Polygons, Rectangles
(fixed displays)
[Function Outline]
These are graphics that are always displayed. Standard, inverse, flash, and inverse flash displays are possible depending on the type of graphic.
Since fixed display graphics are always displayed in the order in which they were
created on the Support Tool (graphics created later overlay those created earlier),
their order must be taken into consideration when creating them. Note, however,
that the display order within a fixed display graphic can be changed using the Support Tool.
*
Circle
Arc
Sector
Polyline
Polygon
Rectangle
A continuous straight line
*
with up to 256 intermediate
points can be drawn.
A polygon with up to
255 vertices can be
drawn.
109
Section 4-5
Fixed Displays
[Restrictions]
- Up to 65535 of the following graphics can be registered on one screen. (The
same applies to window screens.)
Fixed display text, circles, arcs, sectors, polylines, polygons, rectangles,
tiling, marks
There is no restriction on the number of graphics that can be registered to one
screen data file; any number can be registered as long as the maximum data
file size is not exceeded.
- One polyline can comprise up to 256 linked points including the start and end
points.
- One polygon can be given up to 255 vertices.
- It is not possible to create elements which project out of the screen area (except for those parts of elements which are not actually drawn, such as the center point of an arc).
- Graphics such as circles, sectors, polylines, polygons and rectangles, whose
inside area is tiled when they are displayed in reverse, are sometimes not tiled
correctly if other graphics are drawn behind them. If this happens, either
change the display order on the Support Tool, or change their color. (If such a
graphic is a polygon, you can also change its tiling attribute point.)
[Common Attributes]
The common attributes are described separately for each element.
[Display Functions]
! Arcs
The following shows the relationship between the properties of an arc and the displayed graphic.
! Properties
General
Position
Center point Coordinates of the center of the circle that includes the arc
Start point
Coordinates of the start point of an arc
End point
Coordinates of the end point of an arc
Size
Radius
Attribute
Radius of the circle that includes the arc (dot units)
Display mode for the arc (“Display attribute and drawing result”,
page 111.
Standard/Inverse/Flash/Inverse Flash
Color
Foreground
Display color of the arc (colors other than black and white featured
with NTH25C only)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
The line style is fixed as ”solid” and thickness is fixed as one dot.
110
Section 4-5
Fixed Displays
On the Support Tool, specify the center point, start point and end point as follows.
When the start point is set, the radius is automatically set accordingly.
Center point
End point
Radius
Start point
! Display attribute and drawing result
Attribute
Drawing Result
Standard
Only the line of the arc is drawn in the foreground color.
Inverse*1
The arc drawn between its start and end points is
displayed in the foreground inverse color.
Inverse color display
Flash
Repeated alternation between ”standard” display and no
display.
& No display
Inverse Flash*1
Repeated alternation between ”inverse” and no display.
& No display
Inverse color display
*1 If the arc’s background color is set to the same color as the inverse color of ”line
color”, the arc will become invisible. Change either ”line color” or the background color.
! Circle
The following shows the relationship between the properties of a circle and the displayed graphic.
111
Section 4-5
Fixed Displays
! Properties
General
Position
Center point Coordinates of the center of the circle
Size
Radius
Attribute
Radius of the circle (dot units)
Display mode for the circle (“Display attribute and drawing result”,
below).
Standard/Inverse/Flash/Inverse Flash
Color
Foreground
Display color of the circle (colors other than black and white
featured with NTH25C only)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
The line style is fixed as ”solid” and thickness is fixed as one dot.
On the Support Tool, specify the center point and radius as follows.
Radius
Center point
! Display attribute and drawing result
Attribute
Drawing Result
Standard
Only the line of the circle periphery is drawn in the
foreground color.
Inverse*1
The entire circle is displayed in the foreground inverse
color.
Flash
Repeated alternation between ”standard” display and no
display.
&
Inverse Flash*1
No display
Repeated alternation between ”inverse” and no display.
&
No display
*1 If the circle’s background color is set to the same color as the inverse color of
”foreground color”, the circle will become invisible. Change either ”foreground
color” or the background color.
112
Section 4-5
Fixed Displays
! Rectangle
The following shows the relationship between the properties of a rectangle and the
displayed graphic.
! Properties
General
Position
Coordinates of the top left vertex of the rectangle
Size
Width and height of the rectangle (dot units)
Attribute
Display mode for the rectangle (“Display attribute and drawing
result”, below).
Standard/Inverse/Flash/Inverse Flash
Color
Foreground
Display color of the rectangle (colors other than black and white
featured with NTH25C only)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
The line style is fixed as ”solid” and thickness is fixed as one dot.
On the Support Tool, specify the start point and end point as follows. (It is not necessary to draw the rectangle from top left to bottom right). The position and size are
automatically set by specifying the start point and end point.
Start point
Position (top left corner of the rectangle)
Size (Y direction)
Size (X direction)
End point
! Display attribute and drawing result
Attribute
Drawing Result
Standard
Only the boundary line of the rectangle is drawn in the
foreground color.
Inverse*1
The entire rectangle is displayed in the foreground
inverse color.
Flash
Repeated alternation between ”standard” display and
no display.
&
Inverse Flash*1
No display
Repeated alternation between ”inverse” and no display.
&
No display
*1 If the rectangle’s background color is set to the same color as the inverse color
of ”foreground color”, the rectangle will become invisible. Change either ”foreground color” or the background color.
113
Section 4-5
Fixed Displays
! Polygon
The following shows the relationship between the properties of a polygon and the
displayed graphic.
! Properties
General
Attribute
Display mode for the polygon. (See ”Display attribute and drawing
result”, page 115.)
Standard/Inverse/Flash/Inverse Flash
Foreground color
Line color
Attribute Point
Display color of the polygon (Colors other than black and white are
features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
Coordinates of the point that will be the start position for tiling in
inverse display or inverse flashing display.
The line style is fixed as ”solid” and thickness is fixed as one dot.
On the Support Tool, create the polygon by changing the number and position of
the vertices using a triangle as the base graphic element. The attribute point is automatically set inside the polygon (its position can be changed).
Attribute point
Right click here
to select “Add
Node”.
114
Section 4-5
Fixed Displays
! Display attribute and drawing result
Attribute
Drawing Result
Standard
Only the contour of the polygon is drawn in the foreground
color.
Inverse*1
The inside of the polygon is displayed in the foreground
inverse color (see below).
Flash
Repeated alternation between ”standard” display and no
display.
&
Inverse Flash*1
No display
Repeated alternation between ”inverse” and no display
(see below).
&
No display
*1 If the polygon’s background color is set to the same color as the inverse color of
”foreground color”, the polygon will become invisible. Change either ”foreground color” or the background color.
If inverse or inverse flash display is set for a polygon with multiple closed areas,
like the one shown below, only the closed area that contains the attribute point is
tiled.
Attribute point
115
Section 4-5
Fixed Displays
! Polyline
The following shows the relationship between the properties of a polyline and the
displayed graphic.
! Properties
General
Line Style
Line type used for the polyline
Solid
Dash
Dot--dash
Dot--dot--dash
Attribute
Display mode for the polyline. (See ”Display attribute and drawing
result”, below.)
Standard/flash
Color
Foreground
Display color of the polygon (Colors other than black and white are
features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
The line thickness is fixed as one dot.
On the Support Tool, create the polyline by changing the number and position of
the vertices using a straight line as the base graphic element.
Right click here to select
“Add Node”
! Display attribute and drawing result
Attribute
Drawing Result
Standard
The polyline is displayed in the foreground color all the
time.
Flash
Repeated alternation between ”standard” display and
no display.
&
116
No display
Section 4-5
Fixed Displays
! Sector
The following shows the relationship between the properties of a sector and the
displayed graphic.
! Properties
General
Position
Center point Center coordinates of the circle that includes the sector
Start point
Coordinates of the start point of the sector
End point
Coordinates of the end point of the sector
Size
Radius
Attribute
Radius of the circle including the sector (unit: dot)
Display mode for the sector. (See ”Display attribute and drawing
result”, page 118.)
Standard/Inverse/Flash/Inverse Flash
Foreground color
Line color
Display color of the sector (Colors other than black and white are
features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
The line style is fixed as ”solid” and thickness is fixed as one dot.
On the Support Tool, specify the center point, start point, and end point as follows.
The radius is automatically set according to the specified start point.
Center point
End point
Radius
Start point
117
Section 4-5
Fixed Displays
! Display attribute and drawing result
Attribute
Drawing Result
Standard
Only the boundary line of the sector is drawn in the
foreground color.
Inverse*1
The entire sector is displayed in the foreground inverse
color.
Flash
Repeated alternation between ”standard” display and
no display.
&
Inverse Flash*1
No display
Repeated alternation between ”inverse” and no display.
&
No display
*1 If the sector’s background color is set to the same color as the inverse color of
”foreground color”, the sector will become invisible. Change either ”foreground
color” or the background color.
[Input Functions]
There are no input functions for circles, arcs, sectors, polylines, polygons, or rectangles.
[Output Functions]
There are no output functions for circles, arcs, sectors, polylines, polygons, or rectangles.
[Processing Functions]
There are no data processing functions for circles, arcs, sectors, polylines, polygons, or rectangles.
118
Section 4-5
Fixed Displays
[Relationship with Other Elements]
- When tiling is used, the inside of an area enclosed by a continuous solid line of
the same color can be tiled with a specified pattern (page 123). Note, however,
that if the line is broken at any point, or if it flashes or is deleted, the tiling pattern will project and cover the area outside the line as well. Tiling will also
spread outside the intended boundary line, in accordance with the display order, if it is displayed before the boundary line.
- It is possible to group multiple fixed display elements as a single library data by
combining multiple fixed display elements. If the display attribute for any of the
elements when you are registering the element is ”Flash” or ”Inverse Flash”,
the display flashes in accordance with this setting. The timing of the flashing is
the same for all elements.
- Both text (page 119) and mark (page 126) fixed displays will overlap each other in accordance with the order in which they were created. Note, however,
that you can change the way in which they overlap using the Support Tool.
4-5-2
Text (Fixed Display)
[Function Outline]
These are character strings that are continually displayed as a fixed display. Standard, flash, and inverse flash displays are possible. (Inverse display can be specified by swapping the foreground color and background color of the character
string.)
Since the display order will always follow the order in which the elements are
created on the Support Tool (character strings created later overlay others created
earlier), the order in which text is created must be taken into consideration when
character strings are going to overlap.
On the NTH25/NTH25C, character strings are not allowed to contain marks (character code FF20 to FFFF Hex). (Marks are treated as invalid codes and are displayed as two standard characters.)
NTH25C
[Restrictions]
- Up to 65535 of the following graphics can be registered on one screen. (The
same applies to window screens.)
Fixed display text, circles, arcs, sectors, polylines, polygons, rectangles,
tiling, marks
There is no restriction on the number of graphics that can be registered to
one screen data file; any number can be registered as long as the maximum data file size is not exceeded.
119
Section 4-5
Fixed Displays
- The following numbers of characters can be displayed in one text display element, depending on the scale:
1 x 1 (equal): Up to 40 characters
1 x 2 (high):
Up to 40 characters
2 x 1 (wide):
Up to 20 characters
2 x 2:
Up to 20 characters
4 x 4:
Up to 10 characters
8 x 8:
Up to 5 characters
(3 x 3 characters set on the Support Tool are displayed as 2 x 2 characters
on the NTH25/NTH25C.)
- Note, however, that if the text size exceeds the screen size, the Support Tool
changes its display position automatically so that the text is displayed to fit inside the screen. If the text can not be displayed within the screen even if the
Support Tool has changed its position, an error message will be displayed. In
this case, change the number of characters or scale of the text so that the text
fits inside the screen.
[Setting Restrictions]
The items that can be set on the Support Tool vary from the valid settings on the
NTH25/NTH25C. Pay attention to these restrictions when creating screen data.
Item
Support Tool
NTH25/NTH25C
Half height font
Settable
Not supported (displayed
as standard font)
Character size 3 x 3
Settable
Not supported (displayed
as 2 x 2 character)
Smoothing
Settable
Not supported (displayed
without smoothing)
Foreground color ”transpar- Settable
ent”
Not supported (displayed
as black on the NTH25,
and white on the NTH25C)
[Display Functions]
The following shows the relationship between the properties of a text display element and the displayed text.
Only sections enclosed by
120
are valid.
Section 4-5
Fixed Displays
! Properties
General
Description
Displayed text
Alphanumerics and symbols, Marks
Position
Coordinates of the top left corner of the rectangle that encloses
the text to be displayed.
Scale
Scale at which the text is displayed (”Enlarged display”, below).
1 x 1 (equal), 1 x 2 (high), 2 x 1 (wide), 2 x 2, 4 x 4, 8 x 8
(3 x 3 characters set on the Support Tool are displayed as 2 x 2
characters on the NTH25/NTH25C.)
Attribute
Display mode for the text (See ”Display attribute and drawing
result”, page 122).
Standard/Flash/Inverse Flash
Color
Foreground
Display color of the text (Colors other than black and white are
features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White/
(Even if ”transparent” is set, it is displayed as black on the NTH25
and white on the NTH25C.)
Background Background color of the text (Colors other than black and white
are features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White/
Transparent
Position
(Top left corner of the rectangle
enclosing the text)
NTH25C
Foreground color
(display color)
Background color
! Enlarged display
Character strings (text and marks) can be displayed at the following scales:
1×1 (Equal)
2×1 (Wide)
1×2 (High)
4×4
8×8
2×2
3 x 3 characters set on the Support Tool are displayed as 2 x 2 characters on the
NTH25/NTH25C.
121
Section 4-5
Fixed Displays
! Display attribute and drawing result
Attribute
Standard
Drawing Result
The text element is displayed at the specified foreground
color and background color.
ABCDEFG
Flash
Repeated alternation of the ”standard” display and no
display.
ABCDEFG &
Inverse Flash*1
No display
Repeated inverted display of each of the foreground and
background colors and no display.
ABCDEFG &
No display
*1 If the text’s background color is set to the same color as the inverse color of
”foreground color” and the background color is set to ”transparent”, the text will
become invisible. Either change the foreground color or the background color,
or set the background color to a color other than ”transparent.”
[Input Functions]
Text displays have no input function.
[Output Functions]
Text displays have no output function.
[Processing Functions]
Text displays have no data processing function.
[Relationship with Other Elements]
- It is possible to group multiple fixed display elements as a single library data by
combining multiple fixed display elements. If the display attribute for any of the
elements when you are registering the element is ”Flash” or ”Inverse Flash”,
the display flashes in accordance with this setting. The timing of the flashing is
the same for all elements.
- Circles, arcs, sectors, polylines, polygons, rectangles (page 109) and marks
(page 126) overlap each other in accordance with the order in which they were
created. Note, however, that you can change the way in which they overlap
using the Support Tool.
122
Section 4-5
Fixed Displays
4-5-3
Tiling
[Function Outline]
An area enclosed by a solid line of a specified color is tiled with the specified tiling
pattern.
[Restrictions]
- Up to 65535 of the following graphics can be registered on one screen. (The
same applies to window screens.)
Fixed display text, circles, arcs, sectors, polylines, polygons, rectangles,
tiling, marks
There is no restriction on the number of graphics that can be registered to one
screen data file; any number can be registered as long as the maximum data
file size is not exceeded.
- The area to be tiled must be enclosed by a solid line of the same color. If the line
is broken at any point, or if it flashes or is deleted, the tiling pattern will project
and cover the area outside the line as well. Tiling will also spread outside the
intended boundary line, in accordance with the display order, if it is displayed
before the border line.
- Depending on the combination of the foreground color (wheb tiled) and the
background color of a graphic, part of the frame of the graphic may be invisible.
This is a phenomenon peculiar to a color LCD, not a failure of the PT. If this
causes a problem, change the color combination.
The line thickness of images on the Support Tool differs from that on the
NTH25/NTH25C. Be sure to check the display on the NTH25/NTH25C.
[Setting Restrictions]
The items that can be set on the Support Tool vary from the valid settings on the
NTH25/NTH25C. Pay attention to these restrictions when creating screen data.
Item
Support Tool
NTH25/NTH25C
Border
Settable
Not settable (”Foreground
color” is used as border
color.)
Tiling pattern ”Box,” ”Grid”
and ”border”
Settable
Not supported (Displays
”Uniform”.)
Tiling pattern ”Slant right”
and ”Slant left”
Background color ”transparent”
The foreground color becomes the background color, and vice versa.
Settable
Not settable (displayed as
black on NTH25 and white
on the NTH25C)
123
Section 4-5
Fixed Displays
[Display Functions]
The following shows the relationship between the tiling properties and tiling method.
Only sections enclosed by
are valid.
! Properties
General
Position
Coordinates where tiling starts
Pattern
Tiling pattern (See ”Pattern and color”, page.125)
Uniform
Slant right
Box
Crosshatch
Not supported
Slant left
Grid
Not supported
Stripe
Border
Not supported
Diamond
Halftone
(On the NTH25/NTH25C, ”Box”, ”Grid” and ”Border” are
displayed as ”Uniform” and slant right and slant left are
displayed with their foreground color swapped with the
background color, and vice versa.)
Color
Foreground
Display color of the tiling pattern (Colors other than black and
white are features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
Background Background color of the tiling pattern (colors other than black,
white, and transparent featured with NTH25C only)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White/
Transparent
(Even if ”transparent” is set, it is displayed as black on the NTH25
and white on the NTH25C.)
124
Section 4-5
Fixed Displays
! Pattern and color
The following shows the relationship between pattern and color, taking the ”Stripe”
pattern as an example.
Screen background color
Border color of tiling pattern
Foreground color of tiling pattern
Background color of tiling pattern
[Input Functions]
Tiling has no input function.
[Output Functions]
Tiling has no output function.
[Processing Functions]
Tiling has no data processing function.
[Relationship with Other Elements]
- Tiling can also be included in library data displays with other graphics.
- Circles, arcs, sectors, polylines, polygons, rectangles (page 109) and marks
(page 126) overlap each other in accordance with the order in which they were
created. Note, however, that you can change the way in which they overlap
using the Support Tool.
- ”Color Palette Symbol” is supplied with NT--series Support Tool for Windows
95/98 (Ver. 3.0). For color palette symbols, combinations of foreground and
background colors are registered by each tiling pattern.
By copying the symbol, you can register the required tiling object on a screen
easily while checking the display status of color palette symbols. For details,
see the Operation Manual for the Support Tool (V053--E1-- ). Note, however,
that some tiling pattern (box, grid) palette symbols are not supported on
NTH25/NTH25C.
125
Section 4-5
Fixed Displays
4-5-4
Marks
[Function Outline]
Marks are pictograms comprising 16 by 16 dots. They are allocated to character
codes for use.
Marks are created with the mark editor on the Support Tool, independently of
screens, and as many as required can be displayed at any position on any screen.
! Procedure for creating and using marks
The following briefly describes the procedure for creating marks and registering
them on a screen. For details, see the Operation Manual for the Support Tool.
Call the mark editor.
'
Specify the mark code.
'
Create the mark.
'
Exit the mark editor and register the mark.
'
Perform screen editing.
'
Register the created mark for display.
[Restrictions]
- Up to 83 marks can be created for one screen data file. Each of the marks is
allocated any required character code within the range FF20 to FF72 Hex so
that it can be managed and specified. Though any code up to FFFF Hex can be
registered on the Support Tool, do not use FF73 Hex onwards as these codes
are reserved for the system.
- Up to 65535 of the following graphics can be registered on one screen. (The
same applies to window screens.)
Fixed display text, circles, arcs, sectors, polylines, polygons, rectangles,
tiling, marks
There is no restriction on the number of graphics that can be registered to one
screen data file; any number can be registered as long as the maximum data
file size is not exceeded.
126
Section 4-5
Fixed Displays
[Setting Restrictions]
The items that can be set on the Support Tool vary from the valid settings on the
NTH25/NTH25C. Pay attention to these restrictions when creating screen data.
Item
Support Tool
Mark size 3 x 3
NTH25/NTH25C
Not supported (Displays in
4 x 4)
Settable
Foreground color ”transpar- Settable
ent”
Not supported (displayed
as black on the NTH25 and
white on the NTH25C)
Insertion of marks in character strings
Not possible (displayed as
a two standard character
space)
Possible
[Display Functions]
The following shows the properties of mark displays and their relationship with
character strings to be displayed. (Though mark properties are subject to several
restrictions, all of the items are supported.)
! Properties
General
Position
Coordinates of the top left corner of the mark
Code
Character code of the mark
FF20 to FF83 Hex
Attribute
Display mode for the mark. (See ”Display attribute and drawing
result”, page xx.)
Standard/Flash/Inverse Flash
Size
Scale at which the mark is displayed. (See ”Enlarged display”,
page 128)
1 x 1 (equal), 1 x 2 (high), 2 x 1 (wide), 2 x 2, 4 x 4, 8 x 8
(3 x 3 characters set on the Support Tool are displayed as 2 x 2
characters on the NTH25/NTH25C.)
Color
Foreground
Display color of the mark (Colors other than black and white are
features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White/
(Even if ”transparent” is set, it is displayed as black on the NTH25
and white on the NTH25C.)
Background Background color of the mark (Colors other than black and white
are features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White/
Transparent
Position (top left corner of mark) Foreground color
16 dots
Background color
16 dots
127
Section 4-5
Fixed Displays
! Enlarged display
Marks can be displayed at the following scales:
1×1 (Equal)
4×4
2×1 (Wide)
1×2 (High)
2×2
8×8
3 x 3 characters set on the Support Tool are displayed as 2 x 2 characters on the
NTH25/NTH25C.
! Display attribute and drawing result
Attribute
Drawing Result
Standard
The mark is displayed at the specified foreground color
and background color.
Flash
Repeated alternation of the ”standard” display and no
display.
&
Inverse Flash *1
No display
Repeated inverted display of each of the foreground and
background colors and no display.
&
No display
*1 If the mark’s background color is set to the same color as the inverse color of
”foreground color” and the background color is set to ”transparent”, the marks
will become invisible. Either change the foreground color or the background
color, or set the background color to a color other than ”transparent.”
[Input Functions]
Marks have no input function.
[Output Functions]
Marks have no output function.
[Processing Functions]
Marks have no data processing function.
128
Section 4-5
Fixed Displays
[Relationship with Other Elements]
- It is possible to group multiple fixed display elements as a single library data by
combining multiple fixed display elements. If the display attribute for any of the
elements when you are registering the element is ”Flash” or ”Inverse Flash”,
the display flashes in accordance with this setting. The timing of the flashing is
the same for all elements.
- Marks overlap with other fixed display elements in accordance with the order
in which they were registered. Note, however, that you can change the way in
which they overlap using the Support Tool.
129
Section 4-6
Image and Library Data
4-6
4-6-1
Image and Library Data
Image Data Display
[Function Outline]
”Image data” are images composed of dots.
Image data are created using the image editor on the Support Tool, independently
of screens, and as many image data as required can be displayed at any position
on any screen. It is also possible to import files in the Windows BMP format and
register them as image data.
Registering frequently used and complex images as image data allows them to be
displayed easily whenever required.
Each dot of the image data can be given eight colors.
! Procedure for creating and using image data
The following briefly describes the procedure for creating image data and registering them to a screen. For details, see the Operation Manual for the Support Tool.
Call the image editor.
'
Specify the image code.
'
Specify color/black--and--white, and size
'
Create the image data
'
Exit the image editor and register the image data.
'
Edit the screen.
'
Register the created image data for display.
130
Section 4-6
Image and Library Data
[Restrictions]
- Up to 30 image data can be created in one screen data file. Each of the image
data is allocated any code within the range 0001 to 001E Hex (image/library
code range) so that it can be managed and specified. The data registered from
code 001F Hex onwards is invalid.
- Up to 64 image data can be registered to one screen. Note, however, that more
than a total of 257 image data and library data cannot be displayed in one
screen.
- The size of image data is determined as follows for each image code.
Image code
Width (dots)
Height (dots)
0001, 0002 Hex
128
64
0003 to 0006 Hex
64
64
0007 to 000E Hex
32
64
000F to 001E Hex
32
32
Though image data can be specified at any size in multiples of eight on the Support
Tool, note that the actual image size is already determined to each code on the
NTH25/NTH25C.
If the image size set on the Support Tool does not match the above sizes, the
image data is placed so that its upper left corner is matching, surplus parts are
displayed in black and area projecting off screen are ignored.
- The codes used for image data are dedicated for image/library data use only.
- Image data that projects out of the screen area cannot be specified.
- Compressed image data is not displayed correctly on the NTH25/NTH25C. Be
sure to uncheck ”Compression” before you create and register image data.
[Setting Restrictions]
The items that can be set on the Support Tool vary from the valid settings on the
NTH25/NTH25C. Pay attention to these restrictions when creating screen data.
Item
Support Tool
NTH25/NTH25C
Image size
Any size can be set at mul- Size is fixed by image
tiples of eight in the horicode. (See ”Restrictions”
zontal and vertical direcabove.)
tions.
Data compression
Settable
Not settable (fixed to ”Compression OFF”)
Foreground color, background color
Settable
Not settable (displayed as
black and white)
131
Section 4-6
Image and Library Data
[Display Functions]
The following shows the relationship between properties of image data and their
method of display.
Only sections enclosed by
are valid.
! Properties
General
Position
Coordinates of the top left corner of the image data
Size
Size of the image data
Code
Image/library code of the image data
0001 to 001E Hex
Mode
Color mode of the image data (specified by the image editor)
2 Colors/8 Colors
(Even in the 2 Colors mode, the foreground color and background
color are not supported on the NTH25C, and are displayed as
white and black at all times.)
Comment
Comment allocated to the image data (specified by the image
data)
Position
(top left corner
of image data)
Size (Y direction)
Size (X direction)
! When an unregistered code is specified
Processing is as follows when a code to which no image data is registered is specified:
- Image code 0001 to 001E Hex
The symbol (
) indicating an unregistered code is displayed on the Support
Tool. On the NTH25/NTH25C, however, the image size corresponding to the
specified code is displayed tiled at the matching position from the top left corner.
132
Section 4-6
Image and Library Data
- Image code 001F to 0FFF Hex
The symbol (
) indicating an unregistered code is displayed on the Support
Tool, but on the NTH25/NTH25C nothing is displayed.
[Input Functions]
Image data have no input function.
[Output Functions]
Image data have no output function.
[Processing Functions]
Image data have no data processing function.
[Relationship with Other Elements]
- Difference between image data and library data
Image data can take any form as it is composed of dots, but library data can
only be formed by combining fixed display--text or graphics.
Since only drawing information for text and graphics is registered as the library
data, library data is lighter than image data, which requires all the dots to be
displayed on the screen to be registered as data.
Another difference is that ”flash” and ”inverse flash” display are not possible for
image data, whereas library data can be displayed in these display modes in
accordance with the display attributes of the registered elements. All elements
flash at the same time.
- it is possible to specify different image/library data for the graphic displayed
when a lamp (image/library lamp) is ON and OFF (page 137).
- Image data elements overlap with other fixed display elements in accordance
with the order in which they were registered. Note, however, that you can
change the way in which they overlap using the Support Tool.
133
Section 4-6
Image and Library Data
4-6-2
Library Data Display
[Function Outline]
”Library data” are grouped multiple fixed display--text and graphic elements registered as a single element. Library data can be registered in any required size.
Library data are created using the library editor on the Support Tool, independently
of screens, and as many library data as required can be displayed at any position
on any screen.
Registering frequently used and complex images as library data allows them to be
displayed easily whenever required.
Since the individual elements within a library data are displayed in the order they
were created using the Support Tool (graphics created later overlay those created
earlier), the order must be taken into consideration when creating them.
Library data
Complex data can
be displayed as
many times as
required.
! Procedure for creating and using library data
The following briefly describes the procedure for creating library data and registering them to a screen. For details, see the Operation Manual for the Support Tool.
Call the library editor.
'
Specify the library code.
'
Create the library data.
'
Specify a range.
'
Exit the library editor and register the library data.
'
Edit the screen.
'
Register the created library data for display.
134
Section 4-6
Image and Library Data
Reference
When creating lamps on the NTH25C (color type) screen using the NT--series
Support Tool (Ver 3.0), pay attention to the following.
- When the ”background color” screen property is set to a color other than black,
the light ON and OFF colors of the lamp are not displayed correctly.
To correctly light the lamp, either tile a fixed graphic of the same size as the lamp
and place it so that it overlaps the lamp, or use regular tiling without using the
”background color” screen property.
[Restrictions]
- Up to 3980 library data can be created in one screen data file. Each of the library data is allocated any code within the range 1000 to 1F8B Hex (image/library code range) so that it can be managed and specified.
- A total of up to 256 of library data can be registered to one screen. Note, however, that more than a total of 257 image data and library data cannot be displayed in one screen.
- The maximum number of elements that can be registered to one library data is
64.
- The following fixed display elements can be registered in library data. Other
elements cannot be registered.
Text, circles, arcs, sectors, polylines, polygons, rectangles, tiling, marks
- The codes used for library data are dedicated for image/library data use only.
- It is not possible to create library data which project out of the screen area.
[Setting Restrictions]
The items that can be set on the Support Tool vary from the valid settings on the
NTH25/NTH25C. Pay attention to these restrictions when creating screen data.
Item
Support Tool
NTH25/NTH25C
Maximum number of library 12288
data
3980
Library code
1000 to 1F8B Hex
1000 to 3FFF Hex
[Display Functions]
The following shows the relationship between properties of library data and their method of
display. (Though library data properties are subject to several restrictions, all of the items are
supported.)
! Properties
General
Position
Coordinates of the top left corner of the library data
Size
Size of the library data
Code
Image/library code of the library data
1000 to 1F8B Hex
Comment
Comment allocated to the library data
(specified by the library editor)
135
Section 4-6
Image and Library Data
Position (top left corner of library data)
Size (Y direction)
Size (X direction)
! When an unregistered code is specified
When a code to which no library data is registered is specified, the symbol ( )
indicating an unregistered code is displayed on the Support Tool, but on the
NTH25/NTH25C nothing is displayed.
[Input Functions]
Library data have no input function.
[Output Functions]
Library data have no output function.
[Processing Functions]
Library data have no data processing function.
[Relationship with Other Elements]
- Difference between image data and library data
Image data can take any form as it is composed of dots, but library data can
only be formed by combining fixed display--text and graphics.
Since only drawing information for text and graphics is registered as the library
data, library data is lighter than image data, which requires all the dots to be
displayed on the screen to be registered as data.
Another difference is that ”flash” and ”inverse flash” display are not possible for
image data, whereas library data can be displayed in these display modes in
accordance with the display attributes of the registered elements. All elements
flash at the same time.
- It is possible to specify different image/library data for the graphic displayed
when a lamp (image/library lamp) is ON and OFF (page 137).
- Library data elements overlap with other fixed display elements in accordance
with the order in which they were displayed. Note, however, that you can
change the way in which they overlap using the Support Tool.
136
Section 4-7
Lamps
4-7
Lamps
[Function Outline]
”Lamps” are graphics that change according to the change in state of a currently
set bit. Lamps are classified into the following two major categories:
! Normal (standard) lamps
Normal (standard) lamps change the display state (OFF/ON/flashing) of fixed display graphics.
ON
ON
Host
OFF status
ON status
! Image/library lamps
Image/library lamps display independent graphics (image/library data) in the ON
and OFF states.
ON
OFF status
Host
ON status
Lamps are arranged and set on the screen when creating screen data using the
Support Tool.
[Restrictions]
- Up to 64 standard lamps and image/library lamps can be registered to one
screen respectively.
Though more than 65 standard lamps and image/library lamps each can be
registered to a screen on the Support Tool, note that on the NTH25/NTH25C,
however, each of the lamps exceeding 64 lamps are discarded. The order in
which this number is exceeded is from the display order with the smallest number. (Normally, the order in which lamps were created becomes the display order. This display order can be changed using the Support Tool.)
- Up to 64000 standard lamps and up to 12800 image/library lamps can be registered to one screen data file.
On the Support Tool, any number of standard lamps and image/library lamps
can be registered to one screen data file. On the NTH25/NTH25C, however,
note that excess lamps are discharged if the number of registered lamps exceeds the maximum permissible number as they are displayed in screen number order. On the same screen, the order in which this number is exceeded is
from the display order with the smallest number. (Normally, the order in which
lamps were created becomes the display order. This display order can be
changed using the Support Tool.)
137
Section 4-7
Lamps
- Image/library lamps are subject to the maximum simultaneous display restriction imposed on image and library data. This means that only up to a total of 64
image/library lamps, image data and library data can be displayed on one
screen.
- On the Support Tool, you can select four types of graphics, rectangles, polygons, circles and sectors as the display graphics for standard lamps. On the
NTH25/NTH25C, however, polygons are displayed as a rectangle of the same
”size” and sectors are displayed as a circle inscribing the maximum size of the
sector of the same area. (Rectangles and circles are displayed in the same
way that they were created.) Do not use polygons and sectors as their display
on the NTH25/NTH25C differs with that on the Support Tool.
Support Tool
NTH25/NTH25C
Size of original
display graphic
If the aspect ratio of the original sector is not 1:1, the circle is shifted towards the top left
of the sector area.
- When a circular standard lamp turns ON on the NTH25/NTH25C, all OFF colors inside the rectangular area circumscribing the circle are changed to the ON
color. For this reason, when the periphery color of a circular standard lamp is
the same as the OFF color, the entire rectangular area changes color to the
ON color as shown below.
OFF
ON
ON color
OFF color
OFF color
ON color
If this happens, change the background color or OFF color.
- When the memory link is in use, lamp numbers 1 to 64 are appended to standard lamps, and image/library lamps in their respective display order. (Standard lamps are counted separately from image/library lamps.)
Bits corresponding to a lamp number must be set as shown in the following
table to lamp bits (bits for controlling lamp states) when the memory link is
used. (Standard lamps operate independently of image/library lamps even if
the same bit number is set.)
138
Lamp number
Corresponding bits
1 to 16
00000 to 00015
17 to 32
00100 to 00115
33 to 48
00200 to 00215
49 to 64
00300 to 00315
Section 4-7
Lamps
- If library data projects out of the screen when it is displayed on image/library
lamp, nothing is displayed. Normally, the library data is set so that it does not
project out of the screen by the Support Tool.
- Processing is as follows when nothing is registered to a specified code on an
image/library lamp:
Code 0001 to 001E Hex:
The lamp is tiled black at the image size corresponding to the code. (See
page 131.)
Code 001F Hex onwards:
Nothing is displayed.
- Restrictions on lamp labels are the same as for fixed display--text. (See page
119.)
- The lamp display order is the order in which different lamp types were created.
Note, however, that the display order of lamps of the same type can be
changed using the Support Tool.
[Setting Restrictions]
The items that can be set on the Support Tool vary from the valid settings on the
NTH25/NTH25C. Pay attention to these restrictions when creating screen data.
Item
Support Tool
NTH25/NTH25C
Maximum number of lamps Total of 256 including stan- 64 each for standard
in one screen
dard lamps, and image/lilamps, and image/library
brary lamps
lamps (See ”Restrictions”.)
Maximum number of lamps No limit
in one screen data file
Standard lamp:
64000
Image/library lamp:
12800
(See ”Restrictions”.)
Screens in which image/library lamps can be registered
No limit
Screen numbers 1 to 200
only
Shapes of Standard lamp
Rectangle, polygon, circle
and sector
Rectangle and circle (See
”Restrictions”.)
”Transparent” OFF color for Settable
standard lamps
Not settable (displayed as
black on the NTH25, and
white on the NTH25C)
Color of standard lamp
frames
Settable
Not settable (displayed as
ON color when OFF, and
as OFF color when ON)
Image/library lamp foreground and background
colors
Settable
Not settable (displayed at
the color used when it was
created)
Lamp bit when memory link Any bit settable
is used
Bits already determined for
each lamp must be set.
(See ”Restrictions”.)
[Common Attributes]
The common attributes are described separately as they vary widely according to
the type of lamp.
139
Section 4-7
Lamps
[Display Functions]
! Normal (standard) Lamps
The following shows the relationship between the properties of a normal (standard) lamp and the displayed graphic.
Only sections enclosed by
are valid.
! Properties
General
Position
Coordinates of the top left corner of the lamp display area
Size
Width and height of the lamp display area (unit: dot)
Label
Presence or absence of a character string (label) appended to
the lamp
Checked (character string)/Unchecked (no character string)
Description
Character string appended to the lamp
Alphanumeric and symbols
For details on the properties of labels, see ”Text (Fixed
Display)” (page 119).
Frame
Presence/absence of a frame for the lamp display graphic
Checked (frame)/Unchecked (no frame)
Shape
Shape of the lamp (display graphic)
Rectangle/Circle
(Polygons and sectors set on the Support Tool are displayed
as rectangles and circles, respectively on the
NTH25/NTH25C.)
Color
ON
Color of the lamp in the ON state (Colors other than black and
white are features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
OFF
Color of the lamp in the OFF state (Colors other than black
and white are featured on only the NTH25C.
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White/
(Even if ”transparent” is set, it is displayed as black on the
NTH25 and white on the NTH25C.)
Light Function
Address
PC Address Allocated bit of the lamp (See ”Allocated bit”, page xx.)
(Bits already determined for each lamp are set when the
memory link is in use.)
I/O
Comment
Comment that describes the contents of the allocated bit
Character string of up to 16 characters
Lamp Attribute
ON Type
140
Display mode when the lamp is ON
Light/Flash
Section 4-7
Lamps
Reference
OFF and ON colors can be set independently for lamp labels. Note, however, that
the background color is fixed to ”transparent”.
! Lamp shapes
Rectangle
Circle
Position “Label”
Position “Label”
Frame color
Frame color
Size
(Y direction)
LAMP
“ON”/“OFF”
colors
Size
(Y direction)
LAMP
“ON”/“OFF”
colors
Size (X direction)
Size (X direction)
! Allocated bit
[Host link , NT link (1:1)]
Lamp bits can be allocated to the following host (PC) areas.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocation
CVM1/CV Series PCs
DM
Data memory
Data memory
CH
I/O relay
I/O relay
TIM
Timer present value
Timer present value
CNT
Counter present value
Counter present value
HR
Holding relay
AR
Auxiliary relay
LR
Link relay
Allocation
Special auxiliary relay
: OK
: NG
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. See Appendix H
”PC Memory Map”, page 321.
[Memory link]
The bits in the following table corresponding to the lamp number (number 1 to 64 to
be allocated in display order) must be set.
Lamp number
Corresponding bits
1 to 16
00000 to 00015
17 to 32
00100 to 00115
33 to 48
00200 to 00215
49 to 64
00300 to 00315
141
Section 4-7
Lamps
! Display of lamps
Lamps are displayed as follows according to the state of the allocated bit.
0 (OFF): OFF
1 (ON): ON, or flashing
Whether a lamp is lit continuously or flashes when the lamp bit is set to ”1” (ON) is
determined by the ”ON Type” attribute.
Also, note that the display when the lamp is ON or flashing also changes according
to the presence or absence of a frame.
Frame:
The frame is always displayed.
No frame:
The lamp may be invisible when the frame is OFF or flashing depending on the OFF color.
[Frame]
[No frame]
(OFF)
(OFF)
Light
Light
Flash
Flash
Only the area inside
the frame flashes.
Lamp alternates
between displayed and
not-displayed states.
! To change labels
The labels of normal (standard) lamps are fixed display text. To make the label
change in accordance with the conditions, create an image/library lamp and register different image/library data for its OFF and ON states.
! Image/library lamps
The following shows the relationship between the properties of an image/library
lamp and the displayed graphic.
Only sections enclosed by
142
are valid.
Section 4-7
Lamps
! Properties
General
OFF state
X, Y
Coordinates of the top left corner of the image/library data
displayed in the OFF state
Width, Height
Width and height of image/library data displayed in the
OFF state
Code
Image/library data code displayed in the OFF state
ON State
X, Y
Coordinates of the top left corner of the image/library data
displayed in the ON state
Width, Height
Width and height of image/library data displayed in the
ON state
Code
Image/library data code displayed in the ON state
Light Function
Address
PC Bit Address
Allocated bit of the lamp (See ”Allocated bit”, below.)
I/O Comments
Comment that describes the contents of the allocated bit
Up to 16 characters
Position
Position
OFF state
ON state
Allocated bit
[Host link, NT link (1:1)]
Lamp bits can be allocated to the following host (PC) areas.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocation
CVM1/CV Series PCs
DM
Data memory
Data memory
CH
I/O relay
I/O relay
TIM
Timer present value
Timer present value
CNT
Counter present value
Counter present value
HR
Holding relay
AR
Auxiliary relay
LR
Link relay
Allocation
Special auxiliary relay
: OK
: NG
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. See Appendix H
”PC Memory Map”, page 321.
143
Section 4-7
Lamps
[Memory link]
The bits in the following table corresponding to the lamp number (number 1 to 64 to
be allocated in display order) must be set.
Lamp number
Corresponding bits
1 to 16
00000 to 00015
17 to 32
00100 to 00115
33 to 48
00200 to 00215
49 to 64
00300 to 00315
[Input Functions]
Lamps read the contents of a bit on the host and execute processing in accordance with the bit state.
Note, however, that the bit is read only in the following case:
- When a lamp is used on the currently displayed screen
[Output Functions]
Lamps have no output function.
[Processing Functions]
Lamps have no data processing function.
[Relationship with Other Elements]
- Lamps overlap with other elements in accordance with the order in which they
were registered on the screen with the Support Tool. Note, however, that you
can change the way in which they overlap using the Support Tool.
144
Section 4-8
Touch Switches
4-8
Touch Switches
[Function Outline]
The NTH25/NTH25C allows input from the touch panel on the screen. Bit information can be sent to the host or the NTH25/NTH25C screen can be switched by
pressing (touching) the touch switches on the screen.
16 wide x 12 high
20 dots
(6 mm)
20 dots
(6 mm)
STOP
One touch switch can comprise
multiple touch switch elements.
Function Execution
When the touch switch is pressed,
the set function is executed.
In the same way as lamps, graphics which change in accordance with the state of a
currently set bit are set for touch switches. In addition, an area where the touching
of the touch switch can be detected (the ”touch switch area”) is also set for them.
(Some touch switch display graphics do not change on the NTH25/NTH25C.)
Touch switches are arranged and set on screens when creating screen data using
the Support Tool. When a touch switch is pressed, the function set to it in advance
is executed.
The way a touch switch is displayed and the processing when it is pressed can
each be set independently.
Touch
switch area
When this
position is
pressed....
Display
frame
Touch switch function executed
(Touch switch display graphics other
than “none” or “standard” do not
change on the NTH25/NTH25C
even when they are pressed.)
Caution
! Do not use the touch switch input function for applications where there is a danger to human life or the possibility of serious property damage, or for emergency
stop switches.
! Do not press touch switches with a force of greater than 30 N.
! Do not press touch switches inadvertently while the backlight is OFF.
Only press touch switches after confirming system safety.
! If touch switches are pressed in rapid succession, their inputs may not be successfully received.
Confirm that the input of a touch switch has been successfully received before
moving on to the next operation.
145
Section 4-8
Touch Switches
Reference
Caution When Pressing Three Touch Switches
When multiple touch switches are arranged as shown in the example below and
the three are pressed at the same time, a malfunction will occur due to a peculiarity
of the touch switch mechanism.
Be careful how you arrange touch switches.
Example:
When touch switches are created at positions A and B and at one of
the points of intersection C or D
A
C
D
B
Smallest touch switch frame
⋅ If switches A, B, and C come ON at the same time,
touch switch D will also come ON due to the touch
switch mechanism.
⋅ If switches A, B, and D come ON at the same time,
touch switch C will also come ON due to the touch
switch mechanism.
! Functions that can be set to touch switches
Any of the following functions can be set to touch switches. For details, see ”Processing Functions” (page 153).
! Host notification function
When a touch switch is pressed, the state of a bit for notification on the host (the
”notify bit”) changes.
It may change in any of the two following ways.
Momentary: The notify bit is set to ”1” (ON) only while the touch switch is pressed,
and returns to ”0” (OFF) when the touch switch is released.
Alternate:
Each time the touch switch is pressed, the notify bit is switched to ”1”
(ON) if currently set to ”0” (OFF), and to ”0” (OFF) if currently set to
”1” (ON).
Though ”Set” and ”Reset” can be set on the Support Tool, they act as momentary
switches on the NTH25/NTH25C. When using the memory link on the
NTH25/NTH25C, the touch switch for the host notification function will always act
as a ”Momentary” switch.
PLC
NTH25/NTH25C
Touch switch 1
Bit allocated for notification
(touch switch 1)
1(ON)
1
! Screen switching function
When a touch switch is pressed, the display switches to the set screen.
To next screen
When touch switch 1
is pressed
Screen number 5
“Screen number 5” is set for touch switch 1.
146
Section 4-8
Touch Switches
! Control key function
When used in combination with the numeral input function, pressing a touch switch
allows numerals to be input to input fields. It is also possible to execute special
functions such as applying and clearing input numerals.
NTH25/NTH25C
1234
Numeral setting input field
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
Input
! Window key function
This function makes it possible to open and close windows by pressing a touch
switch.
Control
Conveyor
HELP
CLOSE
HELP
OPEN
Press here
HELP
OPEN
HELP
CLOSE
Touch switch opens
[Restrictions]
- Up to 192 touch switches can be registered for one screen.
There is no restriction on the number of touch switches that can be registered
to one screen data file; any number can be registered as long as the maximum
data file size is not exceeded.
- When free--shape display graphics (rectangles, polygons, circles and sectors)
are set as the shape of touch switches on the Support Tool, they are displayed
as fixed displays (OFF color) on the NTH25/NTH25C. For this reason, the display of the touch switch will not change even if it is pressed. (Touch switches
can be set to invert when their shape is set to ”None” or ”Standard”.)
- The following table shows the functions that can be set on the Support Tool.
These functions cannot be set on the NTH25/NTH25C.
Function
Character string
input function
Description
On the NTH25/NTH25C, touch switches having these functions are not displayed.
Copy key function
Screen print function
Cursor move function
Touch switches having the cursor move function are also
displayed on the NTH25/NTH25C, and react when they are
pressed. However, they will not function. The same function
can be set to numeral input elements.
- On the NTH25/NTH25C, the screen switching return key (screen switching
key that acts to return to the previously displayed screen) cannot be used on
touch switches.
- Only one ”Open” key for the pop--up keyboard function can be used in one
screen.
147
Touch Switches
Section 4-8
- The ”Toggle” key for the pop--up keyboard function acts as the ”Open” key. For
this reason, when a screen has an ”Open” key and an ”Toggle” key, only one
key, the one with the earlier display order, is enabled.
- When polygons are used as the display graphics for touch switches, one polygon can be given up to 255 vertices.
- Restrictions on touch switch labels are the same as for fixed display--text. (See
page 119.)
- The touch switch display order is the order in which different touch switch
types were created. Note, however, that the display order of touch switches of
the same type can be changed using the Support Tool.
- Touch switches are not allowed to overlap each other on the NTH25/NTH25C.
Prevent touch switches including those for numeral input, alarm lists and trend
graphs from overlapping.
148
Section 4-8
Touch Switches
[Setting Restrictions]
The items that can be set on the Support Tool vary from the valid settings on the
NTH25/NTH25C. Pay attention to these restrictions when creating screen data.
Item
Support Tool
NTH25/NTH25C
Overlapping of touch
switches
Possible
Not possible (The touch
switch whose display order
is the latter is deleted.)
Shape ”Shadow”, ”3--Dimension”
Settable
Not supported (displayed
as ”Standard” (double
frame))
Shape ”Standard”
Rectangle at same position Double frame at same
as touch switch area
position as touch switch
area
”ON” color
Settable
Not supported (Display
graphics are displayed in
OFF color, and the inverse
color when ON.)
Lamp bit (bit for controlling
ON/OFF from the host)
Settable
Not supported (Note, however, that the lamp is displayed at the inverse color
when the shape is set to
”None” or ”Standard” and
”Show ON State” is
checked.)
Function
---------
Only the following functions
are enabled:
-- Notify Bit
-- Switch Screen
-- Control Code Input
-- Pop--up Keyboard
(Other functions are invalid.)
(See ”Restrictions”.)
Notify Bit
Screen Switching
Control Code Input
Pop--up Keyboard
Character String Input
Copy Setting
Cursor Move
Print Screen
Action type ”Set” or ”Reset” Settable
when the notify bit function
is used
Not supported (Functions
as ”Momentary” switch.)
Action type when notify bit
function is used on the
memory link
Any type settable
Not supported (All function
as ”Momentary” switch.)
Control key when the control code input function is
used
--
Some keys are not supported. (See ”Control Code
Input Function” on page
156.)
Action type ”Open” when
pop--up keyboard function
is used
Two or more can be set in
one screen.
Only one enabled in one
screen.
(See ”Restrictions”.)
Action type ”Toggle” when
pop--up keyboard function
is used
Settable
Not supported (Functions
as ”Open” key.)
(See ”Restrictions”.)
149
Section 4-8
Touch Switches
[Common Attributes]
The following shows the settings common to touch switches. Further settings may
be necessary depending on the function.
Only sections enclosed by
are valid.
Lamp Settings cannot be used on the NTH25/NTH25C.
! Properties
General
Position
Size
Label
Description
Frame
Shape
Show ON
State
Color
Frame
ON
OFF
150
Coordinates of the top left corner of the touch switch display area
Width and height of the touch switch display area (unit: dot)
Presence or absence of a character string (label) on the touch
switch
Checked (character string)/Unchecked (no character string)
Character string appended to the touch switch
Alphanumeric and symbols
Up to 40 characters can be set for the label.
For details on the properties of labels, see ”Text (Fixed Display)”
(page 119).
Presence/absence of a frame for the touch switch display graphic.
Checked (frame used)/Unchecked (no frame)
Shape of the touch switch (display graphic)
-- Fixed--shape display frame
No frame/Standard (double frame)
(If Shadow and 3--Dimension are set, they are displayed as a
double frame.)
-- Free--shape display frame
Rectangle/Polygon/Circle/Sector
(Displayed as fixed display on the NTH25/NTH25C.)
Inversion of display graph when touch switch is pressed
Checked (inversion)/ Unchecked (no inversion)
(On the NTH25/NTH25C, inversion is enabled only on display
frames of fixed graphics.)
Color of the frame (valid only when ”Frame” above is checked).
(Colors other than white and black are featured with NTH25C
only.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
Display color when the touch switch is ON (colors other than white
and black are featured with NTH25C only)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
Display color when the touch switch is OFF (Colors other than
black and white are featured on only the NTH25C.
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White/Transparent
(When “transparent” is set, it is displayed in inverse color of the
touch switch background when showing inverse attribute.)
Section 4-8
Touch Switches
Settings
Function
Processing functions executed when touch switches are
pressed
Notify Bit
Switch Screen
Control code input
Pop--up keyboard
The following functions cannot be used on the
NTH25/NTH25C.
Input Key -- String
Copy Setting
Cursor Move (Numeral input elements have the same
function.)
Print Screen
! Lamp shape
<With fixed--shape display frame>
When a fixed--shape display frame is used, the lamp is displayed in the exact
shape of the area that responds as a touch switch (touch switch area).
When ”No frame” is selected, only the label is displayed unless the touch switch is
pressed. (If no label is set, nothing will be displayed unless the touch switch is
pressed.)
No frame
Standard
Position “Label”
Size
(Y direction)
LABEL
Size (X direction)
Touch switch
area
OFF color
Position “Label”
Frame = touch
switch area
Size
(Y direction)
LABEL
OFF color
Size (X direction)
If Shadow and 3--Dimension are set, they are displayed as ”Standard” on the
NTH25/NTH25C.
<With free--shape display frame>
When a free--shape display frame is used, the display graphic can be set anywhere, independently of the area that responds as a touch switch (touch switch
area). Note, however, that touch switches do not turn ON even if pressed on the
NTH25/NTH25C as they are displayed as fixed display graphics.
151
Section 4-8
Touch Switches
Rectangle
Polygon
Position “Label”
Position “Label”
Frame color
(=OFF color)
Frame color
(=OFF color)
Size
(Y direction)
LABEL
OFF color
LABEL
Size
(Y direction)
Size (X direction)
Touch
switch area
OFF color
Size (X direction)
Display
graphic
Touch
switch area
Circle
Display
graphic
Sector
Position
Position “Label”
“Label”
Frame color
(=OFF color)
Size
(Y direction)
Size
(Y direction)
LABEL
Frame color
(=OFF color)
LABEL
OFF color
OFF color
Size (X direction)
Touch
Display
switch area
graphic
Size (X direction)
Touch
Display
switch area
graphic
[Display Functions]
On the NTH25/NTH25C, touch switches can be made to invert when they are
touched when a fixed--shape display frame is used. If you select ”No frame” or
”Standard” as the display frame and check ”Show ON State”, the touch area will
turn ON when the touch switch is pressed. (The area will be displayed at the inverse color of the OFF color.)
[Input Functions]
The touch switch elements of the NTH25/NTH25C are arranged in a grid 16 elements wide by 12 elements high on the screen. It is possible to create a single
large rectangular touch switch area using multiple touch switch elements.
16 wide x 12 high
20 dots
(6 mm)
20 dots
(6 mm)
STOP
One touch switch can comprise
multiple touch switch elements.
Function Execution
When the touch switch is pressed,
the set function is executed.
If any one of the touch switch elements within the set touch switch area is pressed,
this is interpreted as the touch switch as a whole being pressed, and the set function is executed.
When ”Show ON State” is checked, the display graphic (touch switch area) is displayed in reverse video for the duration that the touch switch is pressed.
152
Section 4-8
Touch Switches
[Output Functions]
Touch switches can make the following outputs depending on their set processing
function.
- Host notification function
The notify bit on the host is overwritten in accordance with the set notification
method.
For details, see ”Processing Functions” below.
- The NTH25/NTH25C does not have a function for controlling the sound when
a touch switch is pressed. (Touch switches will always sound when they are
pressed.)
[Processing Functions]
When a touch switch is pressed, the set function is executed.
The following four functions can be set:
-----
Host notification function
Screen switching function
Control code input function
Pop--up keyboard function
! Host notification function
This function notifies the host that a touch switch has been pressed.
To use this function, a bit for notification (the notify bit) must be set to the touch
switch. The input states of the touch switches displayed at the NTH25/NTH25C
are always reflected in the notify bits. If the notify bit is not set, the touch switch will
not function. (It will not function when pressed.)
The properties for the input notification function are as follows.
Only sections enclosed by
are valid.
Settings
Address
PC Address Allocated bit for touch switch notification
(See ”Allocation of the notify bit”, page 154.).
I/O
Comments
Comment that describes the contents of the allocated bit
Character string of up to 16 characters
Action Type
Notification operation when the touch switch is pressed
Momentary, Alternate
(Even if ”Set” and ”Reset” are set, they act as momentary
switches. When the memory link is used, the switch acts as a
momentary switch if either of ”Set” and ”Reset” is set.)
153
Section 4-8
Touch Switches
! Types of notification operation
The following two methods for notification to the host can be specified:
Momentary: The notify bit turns ON while a touch switch is pressed. It turns OFF
when the switch is released.
Pressed
'
1 (ON)
Released
'
Pressed
'
Released
'
Notify bit
0 (OFF)
Alternate:
Each time the touch switch is pressed, it turns OFF if it is ON, or ON if
it is OFF. The state of the notify bit does not change when the touch
switch is released.
Pressed
'
1 (ON)
Released
'
Pressed
'
Released
'
Notify bit
0 (OFF)
When the host link or NT link (1:1) is used on the NTH25/NTH25C, ”Set” and ”Reset” will act as momentary switches even if they are set.
When the memory link is used, touch switches having the host notification function
will always act as momentary switches.
Reference
If there are multiple momentary touch switches on one screen that are allocated to
the same bit, and these multiple switches are pressed and released at the same
time, the OFF state will be notified each time that one of the switches is released.
! Notes on notification action
Note the following points when using touch switch input notification.
- If the screen is switched while a momentary touch switch is pressed, the touch
switch itself will disappear and the host is notified of the ”OFF” state.
- Alternate touch switches notify the host of a 0 (OFF) when a screen having a
touch switch is displayed. Each subsequent press of an alternate touch switch
toggles notification between 1 (ON) and 0 (OFF). Writing of the notify bit midway by the host is invalid.
! Allocation of the notify bit
The notify bit can be allocated to the following host (PC) areas.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocation
CVM1/CV Series PCs
DM
Data memory
Data memory
CH
I/O relay
I/O relay
TIM
Timer present value
Timer present value
CNT
Counter present value
Counter present value
HR
Holding relay
AR
Auxiliary relay
LR
Link relay
Allocation
Special auxiliary relay
: OK
: NG
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. See Appendix H
”PC Memory Map”, page 321.
154
Section 4-8
Touch Switches
! Screen switching function
This function allows the screen to be switched by touch switch operation on the
NTH25/NTH25C, without instructions from the host.
To use this function, the screen number to be displayed must be set to the touch
switch. When the touch switch is pressed during NTH25/NTH25C operation, the
display switches to the set screen. (At this time, the new screen number is notified
via the PT status notify area.)
Reference
- When a screen with a number other than a settable is allocated to a touch
switch, the screen does not switch and the currently displayed screen remains
displayed.
- The screen can also be switched by PT status control area operation (page 90).
- On the NTH25/NTH25C, touch switches having the screen switching function
only act to write new screen numbers to the ”Screen switch setting” in the PT
status control area. Actual screen switching action is executed by
NTH25/NTH25C reading ”Screen switch setting”. So, note that pressing a touch
switch will not switch a screen if communications trouble, for example, is preventing communications with the host.
The attributes for screen switching are as follows.
Only sections enclosed by
are valid.
Settings
Screen number
Screen number of screen to be newly displayed
1 to 1000, 9020
! Specified screen number and display operation
The display operation on the NTH25/NTH25C depends on the specified screen
number, as follows.
Screen numbers 1 to 1000:
The display switches to the screen with the currently set screen number. The host is notified of the screen number of the newly displayed
screen.
155
Section 4-8
Touch Switches
Screen number 9020:
The programming console screen is displayed. The host is notified of
screen number 9020.
This makes it possible to use the programming console function even
in the RUN mode.
(Note, however, that the programming console function can be used
only when the PT is connected to a PC which can use the programming console function.)
The PT’s RUN mode is canceled while the programming function is
being used. Monitoring of PT status control area, the data logging
function for trend graphs and monitoring of the alarm history also are
not performed.
To return from the programming console function, exit this function,
by PT operation. (It is not possible to exit this function from the host.)
On the NTH25/NTH25C, the screen switching return key (screen switching key
that acts to return to the previously displayed screen) cannot be used on touch
switches.
! Control code input function
Control keys are used as numeral keys (0 to 9, A to F) when the numeral input
function is used, and as special keys with fixed functions. By allocating a specific
control key to a touch switch, it can be used to execute a specific function.
The attributes for control keys are as follows.
Only sections enclosed by
are valid.
Settings
Control key
156
Control key to be set
Section 4-8
Touch Switches
The following functions can be set to touch switch control keys.
Key
Function
0 to 9, A to F
Used to input numerals (1 digit)
CLR
Clears numeric values in input fields
.
Used to input a decimal point
*1
ENT*1
Applies input without shifting to another input field (same as ENT)
Applies input without shifting to another input field (same as
)
*1 Only one of the and ENT keys can be registered to a screen. Though two or more of
these keys can be registered on the Support Tool, only the first one in the display order is
valid; the others will be deleted.
Keys other than the above can be set on the Support Tool. However, these keys
will not actually function even if they can be displayed on the NTH25/NTH25C.
! Pop--up window/keyboard function
This function is used to control the opening and closing of windows when using the
window function. (See ”Window Function”, page 211.)
The attributes for the window key are as follows.
Only sections enclosed by
Settings
Screen No.
Local 1
(keyboard)
Action Type
are valid.
Check this attribute when the window is to be controlled.
(fixed as checked)
-- Specify the screen number of the window to be controlled.
1 to 1000
Controlling method of the window
Open/Close
(Setting toggle action will result in an open action.)
157
Section 4-8
Touch Switches
! Behavior according to ”Action Type”
Open :
Opens the specified window.
Whether or not the window is actually opened depends on the window display state.
The window is displayed at the position that was specified when it
was created.
If another window of the same type is already opened, nothing will be
executed even if the touch switch is pressed.
If the specified window does not exist, no operation is performed.
Only one ”Open” key can be registered to one screen.
Close :
Closes the specified window.
When the ”close” window key is pressed, the window currently
displayed is closed.
Though ”Toggle” can be set as the action type on the Support Tool, this type acts as
an open key on the NTH25/NTH25C.
Only one of the ”Open” and ”Toggle” keys can be registered to a screen. Though
two or more of these keys can be registered on the Support Tool, only the first one
in the display order is valid; the others will be deleted.
[Relationship with Other Elements]
- Numerals can be input by using control keys in combination with ”Numeral Input” (page 196).
Registering an input control key to a window in advance allows you to use the
entire of the base screen.
- Special touch switches (control keys) with specific functions are automatically
created for the following elements.
Trend graphs (page 176), alarm list (page 189), alarm history (page 189), numeral input (page 196), thumbwheel switches (page 203)
158
Section 4-9
Numeral Display
4-9
Numeral Display
[Function Outline]
The contents of numeral memory tables (words on host) are displayed as numerals.
The values can be displayed either in decimal or hexadecimal notation.
PLC
NTH25/NTH25C
Numeral memory
table No. 18
0062
0062
Allocated word
(numeral memory table No. 18)
DM0100
0 0 6 2
Direct
reference
The NTH25/NTH25C does not actually have numeral memory tables, so the PC
address set to the numeral memory table and numerical storage type are used to
directly reference words on the host from a numeral display element.
[Restrictions]
- The maximum number of numeral display elements that can be registered to
one screen varies as follows according to the communications method:
[Host link, NT link (1:1)]
Max. 120
The number of numeral display elements is counted according to their display
order, and elements exceeding this maximum are discarded. Normally, the
display order is the order in which elements were created. This order can be
changed using the Support Tool.
[Memory link]
Max. 120
Only the numeral display elements to which numeral memory table numbers 0
to 119 are set are valid. Other numeral display elements are discarded.
- Numeral display elements in the same screen cannot reference the same numeral memory table. If a screen contains two or more numeral display elements to which the same numeral memory table has been set, only the element having the earliest display order is valid. Normally, the display order is the
order in which elements were created. This order can be changed using the
Support Tool.
The same numeral memory table does not affect if it is referenced by an element such as a graph or numeral input that is not a numeral display element.
- There is no restriction on the number of numeral displays that can be registered to one screen data file; any number can be registered as long as the
maximum data file size is not exceeded.
- Numeral display elements cannot be specified indirectly. If indirect specification is set, display will not be as intended.
- The range of numerals that can be displayed depends on the ”Storage Type”
(”BCD” or ”Binary”) setting for the numeral memory table, ”Display Type”
(”Decimal” or ”Hexadecimal”), and ”Display Sign” settings for the numeral
memory table. (See ”Word contents and displayed numeral” page 163.)
159
Section 4-9
Numeral Display
- The number of words on the host that are referenced by numeral display is as
follows depending on the number of display digits:
When the number of digits in the integer part + number of digits past the decimal point is =< 4 digits: 1 word
When the number of digits in the integer part + number of digits past the decimal point is > 5 digits: 2 words
[Setting Restrictions]
The items that can be set on the Support Tool vary from the valid settings on the
NTH25/NTH25C. Pay attention to these restrictions when creating screen data.
Item
Support Tool
NTH25/NTH25C
Maximum number of numeral displays in one
screen
256
120
(See ”Restrictions”.)
Indirect specification
Settable
Not supported (fixed to direct specification)
Font type (”Half Height”)
Settable
Not supported (displayed
as ”Standard”)
Font type (”Double Width”)
Displayed as set
Not supported (displayed
as ”Standard” with width
doubled)
(displayed as standard in 8
x 8 display)
Size 3 x 3
Settable
Not supported (displayed
as 2 x 2)
Smoothing
Settable
Not supported (displays
without smoothing)
Maximum number of display digits
10 digits
8 digits (Sign digit and decimal point are counted as
one digit each.)
(See ”Number of display
digits” page 162.)
Display sign
Settable
Not supported (displayed
with a sign)
[Common Attributes]
The following shows the relationship between the properties of a numeral display
and the displayed numeral.
Only sections enclosed by
160
are valid.
Section 4-9
Numeral Display
! Properties
General
Position
Coordinates of the top left corner of the field in which the numeral
is displayed
Font Type
Display font for numerals
Double width font and standard font
(Half height fonts are displayed as standard fonts on the
NTH25/NTH25C.)
(Double width fonts are displayed as standard fonts on the
NTH25/NTH25C with their width doubled. Note, however, that 8 x
8 is displayed as standard font.)
Scale
Scale at which the numeral is displayed (See ”Enlarged display”,
page 162.)
1 x 1 (equal), 1 x 2 (high), 2 x 1 (wide), 2 x 2, 4 x 4, 8 x 8
(3 x 3 characters set on the Support Tool are displayed as 2 x 2
characters on the NTH25/NTH25C.)
Attribute
Display mode for the numerals (See ”Display attributes and
drawing result”, page 162.)
Standard/Flash/Inverse Flash
Color
Foreground
Display color of the numerals (Colors other than black and white are
features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
Background Background color of the numerals (Colors other than black and
white are features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
Settings
Reference
Table Entry
Display Type
Numeral memory table number containing the numeral that is
referenced for display
4--digit BCD value
Display format for the numeral (See ”Word contents and displayed
numeral”, page 163.)
Decimal/Hexadecimal
Format (”Number of display digits”, page 162)
Integer
Number of digits in the integer part of the numeral 1 to 8
Within 8 digits including sign digit and decimal point digit
Decimal
Number of digits in the decimal fraction of the numeral 0 to 6
Within 8 digits including sign digit and decimal point digit
Zero
Suppression
Whether or not zero suppression is used (See ”Zero suppression”,
page 163.)
Checked (zero suppression used)/Unchecked (zero suppression
not used)
Position
Foreground color
123456
Background color
161
Section 4-9
Numeral Display
! Enlarged display
Numerals can be displayed at the following scales.
1×1 (Equal)
2×1 (Wide)
1×2 (High)
4×4
2×2
8×8
! Display attribute and drawing results
Attribute
Standard
Drawing Result
The numeral display is displayed at the specified
foreground color and background color.
12345678
Flash
Repeated alternation of the ”standard” display and no
display.
12345678
Inverse Flash
& No display
Repeated inverted display of each of the foreground and
background colors and no display.
12345678
& No display
! Number of display digits
All contents of numeral memory tables are stored as integers. To display a numeral that has a decimal fraction, set the ”decimal” setting to ”1” or higher to specify the
number of digits past the decimal point. A decimal point is automatically inserted.
Note that if the number of digits of the numeral is greater than the total of the settings for ”Integer” and ”Decimal”, the upper digit(s) is discarded and the number of
displayable lower digits in the integer part and past the decimal point are displayed.
The maximum number of digits in the integer part is eight, and the maximum number of digits past the decimal point is six. Up to a total of eight digits including one
digit each for the sign and the decimal point can be specified.
Reference
162
The number of words on the host that are referenced is as follows depending on
the number of display digits:
When the number of digits in the integer part + number of digits past the decimal
point is =< 4 digits: 1 word
When the number of digits in the integer part + number of digits past the decimal
point is > 5 digits: 2 words
Section 4-9
Numeral Display
In the following example, let us assume that ”Zero Suppression” is set to ”None”.
Example:
Displaying ”123456”
-- Setting for ”Integer” = 8 and ”Decimal” = 0:
Resulting display: 00123456
-- Setting for ”Integer” = 4 and ”Decimal” = 4:
Resulting display: 012.3456
-- Setting for ”Integer” = 2 and ”Decimal” = 4:
Resulting display: 12.3456
-- Setting for ”Integer” = 1 and ”Decimal” = 4:
Resulting display: 2.3456
! Zero suppression
The numeral is displayed right--justified within the sum of the number
of digits specified for ”Integer” and the number of digits specified for ”Decimal”.
Normally, when the number of digits of the numeral is small, the excess digits to the
left are filled with zeros. When ”Zero Suppression” is checked, no zeros are set in
the excess digits and they are left blank.
Without zero suppression
(when the number of digits displayed is 8)
With zero suppression
! Word contents and displayed numeral
The range of numerals that can be displayed depends on the following settings:
Numeral storage type (BCD/binary)
Display Type (”Decimal”/”Hexadecimal”)
<Function of Numeral Storage Type>
The numeral storage type determines whether the contents of words on the host
are recognized as BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) or binary (hexadecimal).
When BCD is set, a word on the host is judged to be a minus number if its uppermost digit is ”F”. (The number of valid digits of a minus number is one digit less.)
”Uppermost digit” here refers to bits 12 to 15 when one word is referenced, and bits
12 to 15 of the second word when two words are referenced.
When binary is set, words on the host are handled as signed binary data, so a word
is judged to be a minus number when its uppermost digit is ”1” (ON). (The numeral
is handled as 2’s complement.) ”Uppermost digit” here refers to bit 15 when one
word is referenced, and bit 15 of the second word when two words are referenced.
<Function of Display Type>
The display type determines whether display is decimal or hexadecimal.
163
Section 4-9
Numeral Display
<Permissible Display Range>
The permissible display range depends on the settings made for ”Numeral Storage Type” and number of referenced words and ”Display Type”, as follows.
Storage
types
Number of
words
BCD
1
2
Binaryy
1
2
*
Display Type
Permissible Display Range
Decimal
--999 to 9999
Hexadecimal
0 to 270F Hex
*
Decimal
--9999999 to 99999999
Hexadecimal
0 to 5F5E0FF Hex
Decimal
--32768 to 32767
Hexadecimal
0 to FFFF Hex
(8000 to FFFF Hex, 0 to 7FFF Hex)
Decimal
--9999999 to 99999999
Hexadecimal
0 to FFFFFFFF Hex
(80000000 to FFFFFFFF Hex, 0 to
7FFFFFFF Hex)
*
During hexadecimal display, minus numbers are displayed using absolute values.
<Relationship between contents of host words and displayed numeral>
The contents of words on the host are interpreted according to the ”Numeral Display Type” setting and displayed after conversion according to the ”Display Type”
setting.
So the result also differs according to the settings made for ”Words”, ”Numeral
Storage type (BCD/binary)” and ”Display Type” made for numeral display elements.
The following shows an example of this.
Contents of
Word on Host
1234
”Storage Type”
”Words”
”Display Type”
BCD
1
Decimal
F123
2
1234
1
--1234
Hexadecimal
F123
2
Binaryy
1
FFFFFB2E
Decimal
F123
164
4660
3805
F0001234
2
1234
1
F123
Reference
4D2
FF85
F0001234
F0001234
1234
--123
F0001234
1234
Displayed
numeral
********
Hexadecimal
1234
F123
2
F0001234
When ”Storage Type” is set to BCD, the word is treated as a minus number when
the uppermost digit of the word contents is ”F”. If the word contents are incorrect
BCD data, display will not be as intended. For example, some of the digits will be
recognized as hexadecimal values.
*
*
Section 4-9
Numeral Display
[Display Functions]
In numeral display, numerals are displayed in accordance with the ”General” settings.
For details on the display mode according to the ”General” settings, see ”Common
Attributes”.
[Input Functions]
Numeral displays do not have a direct input function as they display the contents of
words on the host via numeral memory tables. Note, however, that the
NTH25/NTH25C does not actually have numeral memory tables, so actually the
numeral display reads the contents of words on the host.
[Output Functions]
Numeral displays have no output function.
[Processing Functions]
With numeral displays, the contents of words on the host are converted to display
numerals in accordance with the ”Numeral Storage Type” of the specified numeral
memory table and the ”Properties” setting for the numeral display element. For
details, see ”Common Attributes”.
[Relationship with Other Elements]
- The same conversion method and display mode used with numeral displays is
used when displaying numerals by ”numeral input” (page 196).
Numeral displays overlap other elements in accordance with the order in which
they were registered to the screen using the Support Tool. Note, however, that you
can change the way in which they overlap using the Support Tool.
165
Section 4-10
Character String Display
4-10
Character String Display
[Function Outline]
The contents of character string memory tables (words on host) are displayed as
character strings.
Alphanumeric and symbols in character string memory tables can be displayed.
On the NTH25/NTH25C, character strings are not allowed to contain a mark (character code FF20 to FFFF Hex). (These are treated as invalid codes, and are displayed as two standard spaces.)
PLC
NTH25/NTH25C
Character string
memory table
number 51
abcd
abcd
Allocated word
(character string memory table number 51)
DM0100
1
6
6
0
1
1
3
0
0
6
6
0
1
2
4
0
The NTH25/NTH25C does not actually have character string memory tables, so
the PC address set to the character string memory table is used to directly reference words on the host from a character string display element.
[Restrictions]
- The maximum number of character string display elements that can be registered to one screen varies as follows according to the communications method:
[Host link, NT link (1:1)]
Max. 50
The number of character string display elements is counted according to their
display order, and elements exceeding this maximum are discarded. Normally, the display order is the order in which elements were created. This order can
be changed using the Support Tool.
[Memory link]
Max. 50
Only the character string display elements to which character string memory
table numbers 0 to 49 are set are valid. Other character string display elements are discarded. Note, however, that if a screen contains two or more
character string display elements to which the same character string memory
table has been set, only the element having the earliest display order is valid.
Normally, the display order is the order in which elements were created. This
order can be changed using the Support Tool.
- There is no restriction on the number of character string displays that can be
registered to one screen data file; any number can be registered as long as the
maximum data file size is not exceeded.
- Character string display elements cannot be specified indirectly. If indirect
specification is set, display will not be as intended.
166
Character String Display
Section 4-10
- The following numbers of characters can be displayed in one character string
display, depending on the scale.
1 x 1 (equal): Up to 40 characters
2 x 1 (wide): Up to 40 characters
1 x 2 (high): Up to 20 characters
2 x 2: Up to 20 characters
4 x 4: Up to 10 characters
8 x 8: Up to 5 characters
(3 x 3 characters set on the Support Tool are displayed as 2 x 2 characters
on the NTH25/NTH25C.)
Note, however, that if the character string display size exceeds the screen
size with the specified value, the position of the display field is automatically
modified so that all of the character string fits inside the screen.
If the character string display cannot be displayed to fit inside the screen
even if its position has been modified, an error message will be displayed.
Note, however, that on the NTH25/NTH25C, a character string of more
than set number of character digits can be displayed. In such a case, the
character string continues as it is to the right. If this results in the character
string projecting off the screen, a carriage return is made at that point, and
the text following it is shifted one line downward and displayed from the left
edge. If the character string projects from the bottom of the screen, the text
following it is displayed at the top left of the screen.
- On the NTH25/NTH25C, the number of words that are referenced by character string displays is fixed as 21.
The first of the allocated words is the word for setting the character size and
display attributes, and the remaining 20 words are displayed as character
strings.
- The characters that can be displayed are alphanumeric, symbols and marks.
Note, however, that control codes from ASCII codes other than 00 Hex are
displayed as standard spaces (20 Hex). 00 Hex is treated as the end of the
character. So, prevent character strings from containing 00 Hex. Display ends
just before 00 Hex. (When you specify a character string, try to specify one
word such as 0000 Hex at the end of the character.)
167
Section 4-10
Character String Display
[Setting Restrictions]
The items that can be set on the Support Tool vary from the valid settings on the
NTH25/NTH25C. Pay attention to these restrictions when creating screen data.
Item
Support Tool
NTH25/NTH25C
Maximum number of character string displays in one
screen.
256
50
(See ”Restrictions”.)
Indirect referencing
Settable
Not supported (fixed to direct referencing)
Font type ”Half Height”
Settable
Not supported (displayed
as standard font)
Size 3 x 3
Settable
Not supported (displayed
as 2 x 2)
Smoothing
Settable
Not supported (displays
without smoothing)
Character size, attribute
Settable
Not supported (These can
be set any time according
to the contents of the first
allocated word on the
host.)
(See ”Character size and
attribute” page 169.)
Number of character digits
Any number of digits can
be set within the range 1 to
40 (after standard character conversion)
Not supported (The number of character digits is
adjusted according to the
contents stored to the allocated words on the host.)
[Common Attributes]
The following shows the relationship between the properties of a character string
display and the displayed character string.
Only sections enclosed by
168
are valid.
Section 4-10
Character String Display
! Properties
General
Position
Coordinates of the top left corner of the field in which the character
string is displayed.
Color
Foreground
Display color of the text (Colors other than black and white are features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
Background Background color of the text (Colors other than black and white are
features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
Settings
Reference
Table Entry
Character string memory table number to which the character string
to be displayed is currently stored
Position
Foreground color
ABCDE
Background color
Character size and attribute
On the NTH25/NTH25C, you can change the character size and how the character is displayed (display attribute) according to the contents of the first allocated
word on the host.
The contents of the first word specifies the character size and attribute as follows:
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
First word
High
1 Hex:
2 Hex:
4 Hex:
8 Hex:
equal
x2
x4
x8
Wide
1 Hex: equal
2 Hex: x 2
4 Hex: x 4
8 Hex: x 8
Display mode
01 Hex: Standard
02 Hex: Inverse
03 Hex: Flash
04 Hex: Inverse Flash
On the NTH25/NTH25C, you can specify the size of the character in the high and
wide directions for each character. Available scales are as follows.
1 x 1 (Equal), 1 x 2 (High), 2 x 1 (Wide), 2 x 2, 4 x 4, 8 x 8
If you specify an invalid size, the character is displayed at equal size.
The origin of the character when it is scaled is the top left corner coordinate of the
character string.
If the character string projects off the NTH25/NTH25C’s screen, a carriage return
is made at that point, and the text following it is shifted one line downward and displayed from the left edge. If the character string projects from the bottom of the
screen, the text following it is displayed at the top left of the screen.
169
Section 4-10
Character String Display
Character string display elements are displayed as follows according to the setting
of the first word.
Attribute
1: Standard
Drawing Result
The character string display element is displayed at the
specified foreground color and background color.
ABCDEFG
2: Inverse
The character string display element is drawn at each of
the inverse colors for the foreground color and
background color.
ABCDEFG
3: Flash
Repeated alternation of the ”standard” display and no
display.
ABCDEFG & No display
4: Inverse Flash
Repeated alternation of the foreground color and
background color.
ABCDEFG & No display
! How to specify character strings
On the NTH25/NTH25C, the contents of allocated words (second to 21st word) on
the host are treated as ASCII code, and the character string corresponding to
these codes is displayed in order from the second word onwards. The data in one
word is displayed from the upper byte (bits 31 to 16) followed by the lower byte (bits
15 to 0).
The NTH25/NTH25C displays 20 words of character string data at all times. So, to
display a character string that does not fill 20 words, you must either append the
character string with 0000 Hex, or fill the remainder with standard spaces (20
Hex).
When 0000 Hex is written to one word of data as a character string, the
NTH25/NTH25C treats this as the end of the character string. Subsequent data is
invalid. Note, however, that the NTH25/NTH25C does not clear the display when
the character string display is updated. Sometimes the previously displayed character string remains behind the currently displayed character string. If the number
of characters to be displayed is not fixed, fill the trailing part with standard spaces
(20 Hex), and write 0000 Hex last of all to indicate the end of the character string.
170
Section 4-10
Character String Display
[Display Functions]
In the character string display, the character string is displayed in accordance with
the ”General” settings.
For details on the display mode according to the ”General” settings, see ”Common
Attributes” (page 173).
[Input Functions]
Character string displays do not have a direct input function as they display the
contents of words on the host via character string memory tables. Note, however,
that the NTH25/NTH25C does not actually have character string memory tables,
so actually the character string display reads the contents of words on the host.
[Output Functions]
Character string displays have no output function.
[Processing Functions]
Character string displays have no processing function.
[Relationship with Other Elements]
- Character string displays overlap other elements in accordance with the order
in which they were registered to the screen using the Support Tool. Note, however, that you can change the way in which they overlap using the Support
Tool.
171
Section 4-11
Graphs
4-11
Graphs
The following two types of graphs can be used with the NTH25/NTH25C. The contents of numeral memory tables (words on the host) are automatically read, and
the graph display is updated.
-- Bar graphs
See below
-- Trend graphs
Page 176
4-11-1
Bar Graphs
[Function Outline]
The contents of a numeral memory table (words on the host) are displayed in the
form of a bar graph.
The numeral can also be indicated as a percentage of the specified numeral.
(The frame is not displayed on the NTH25/NTH25C.)
[Restrictions]
- The maximum number of bar graph elements that can be registered to one
screen varies as follows according to the communications method:
[Host link, NT link (1:1)]
Max. 30
The number of bar graph elements is counted according to their display order,
and elements exceeding this maximum are discarded. Normally, the display
order is the order in which elements were created. This order can be changed
using the Support Tool.
[Memory link]
Max. 30
Bar graphs are counted in order from the smallest numeral memory table number. Bar graphs exceeding this maximum are discarded.
- Bar graph elements in the same screen cannot reference the same numeral
memory table. If there are two or more bar graph elements to which the same
numeral memory table is set in the same screen, the element having the smallest display number is valid. Normally, the display order is the order in which
elements were created. This order can be changed using the Support Tool.
- There is no restriction on the number of bar graphs that can be registered to
one screen data file; any number can be registered as long as the maximum
data file size is not exceeded.
- On the NTH25/NTH25C, the contents of the words on the host are recognized
according to the setting made for ”Numeral Storage Type” (BCD/binary) for the
numeral memory table. For details, see ”Word contents and display numerals”
page 163. Note, however, that the number of referenced words for bar graphs
is fixed to one.
- On the NTH25/NTH25C, the number of words that are referenced for displaying bar graphs is fixed to one.
- Bar graphs cannot specify numeral memory tables indirectly. Direct referencing must be used.
172
Section 4-11
Graphs
- Restrictions on % display characters are the same as for fixed display--text.
(See page 119.)
[Setting Restrictions]
The items that can be set on the Support Tool vary from the valid settings on the
NTH25/NTH25C. Pay attention to these restrictions when creating screen data.
Item
Support Tool
NTH25/NTH25C
Maximum number of bar
graphs on one screen
50
30 (See ”Restrictions”.)
Frame
Settable
Not supported (displayed
without frame)
Sign display
Settable
Not supported (displayed
without sign)
Color ”Frame” ”-- Range”
Settable
Not supported
--100% ”Value”
Settable
Not supported
0% ”Value”, 100% ”Value”
Minus numbers can also
be set.
Minus numbers are treated
as 0.
% value ”Table Entry”
Settable
Not supported (fixed to setting by value)
[Common Attributes]
The following shows the relationship between the properties of a bar graph and the
display results.
Only sections enclosed by
are valid.
173
Section 4-11
Graphs
! Properties
General
Position
Coordinates of the top left corner of the bar graph area
Size
Width and height of the area in which the bar graph is displayed (unit:
dot)
Width: 2 to 320, Height: 2 to 240
Direction
Direction in which the bar graph extends (See ”Incremental Direction
of Bar Graphs”, page 175.)
Up/Down/Left/Right
Color
+ Range
Display color of the positive range (Colors other than black and white
are features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
Settings
Value
Table Entry
Display %
Number of numeral memory table to be displayed
Percentage (%) indication of the contents of the numeral memory
table for the specified value (”How to calculate the percentage value”, page 175.)
Checked (percentage display)/ Unchecked (no percentage display)
For details on the ”Display %” property, see ”Text (Fixed Display)”
(page 119).
100%*1
Value
Specify the 100% value (default: 100).
Range: 0 to 2147483647
(Minus numbers specified on the Support Tool are treated as 0 on
the NTH25/NTH25C.)
0%*1
Value
Specify the 0% value (default: 0).
Range: 0 to 2147483647
(Minus numbers specified on the Support Tool are treated as 0 on
the NTH25/NTH25C.)
*1 The 0% value and 100% values must satisfy the following relationship:
0% value < 100% value
Reference
It is not possible to specify a character attribute and transparent background for a
percentage display.
! Display result
Position
(Top left corner of the rectangular area
including the graph and percentage display)
Frame color
Percentage display
Size
(Y direction)
60%
Display color for the + range
Size (X direction)
0% position
100% position
(The frame is not displayed on the NTH25/NTH25C.)
174
Section 4-11
Graphs
! Incremental direction of bar graphs
The following shows the incremental directions of the bar graph according to the
setting made for ”Direction”.
“Up”:
The bar graph increments upward.
“Down”:
The bar graph increments downward.
Direction
Direction
“Left”:
The bar graph increments to the left.
“Right”:
The bar graph increments to the right.
Direction
Direction
! How to calculate the percentage value
The percentage value is calculated as follows:
Percentage value =
Displayed numeric value ( [0%]
[100%] ( [0%]
× 100
If the result of calculating the % value is less than 0%, the result is taken to be 0%
and if the result is more than 100% it is taken to be 100%. Bar graphs are displayed
with % values calculated in this way.
! Contents of host words
With bar graphs on the NTH25/NTH25C, the contents of the words on the host are
recognized according to the setting made for ”Numeral Storage Type” (BCD/
binary) for the numeral memory table. For details, see ”Word contents and displayed numeral” for ”Numeral displays” on page 163. Note, however, that the number of referenced words for bar graphs is fixed to one.
[Display Functions]
Bar graphs indicate numerals in accordance with the ”General” settings.
For details on the display method according to the ”General” settings, see ”Common Attributes”.
[Input Functions]
Bar graphs have no input function.
[Output Functions]
Bar graphs do not have a direct output function as they display the contents of
words on the host via numeral memory tables. Note, however, that the
NTH25/NTH25C does not actually have numeral memory tables, so actually the
bar graph reads the contents of words on the host.
[Processing Functions]
Bar graphs calculate the percentage value in accordance with the settings made
for ”Settings”.
For details on how to calculate depending on the ”Settings” settings, see ”Common Attributes”.
175
Section 4-11
Graphs
[Relationship with Other Elements]
- Bar graphs overlap other elements in accordance with the order in which they
were registered to the screen using the Support Tool. Note, however, that you
can change the way in which they overlap using the Support Tool.
4-11-2
Trend Graphs
[Function Outline]
Trend graphs represent the changes over time in the contents of a numeral
memory table (words on the host) as a single line.
It is possible to display two or more lines in the same frame so that they can be
compared.
There are two types of trend graph: ”standard” where the graph is drawn as though
a pen were moving across paper, and ”pen recorder” where the graph is drawn as
though the paper were moving under a pen.
With trend graphs, a 100% value and 0% value can be specified for each line, and
the graph is displayed based upon the largest 100% value and smallest 0% value
on the line to be displayed.
Past values can be recorded, and then displayed by back tracking (the ”logging
function”), and the contents of words on the host can be sampled even while other
screens are displayed (the ”background function”). On the NTH25/NTH25C, the
contents of the set word on the host continue to be sampled regardless of whether
or not there is a trend graph on the currently displayed screen. (Sampling can also
be stopped by manipulating touch switches and controlling operation from the
host.)
[Restrictions]
- One trend graph frame can be registered to one screen. Up to eight trend
graph frames can be registered at once to each screen.
- The maximum number of trend graph lines that can be registered to a screen
data file is as follows.
The number of trend graph lines are counted in order from the smallest screen
number, and lines exceeding 40 are discarded. Also, the number of lines in one
screen are counted according to the display order. Normally, the display order
is the order in which elements were created. This order can be changed using
the Support Tool.
176
Graphs
Section 4-11
- Trend graph elements in the same screen cannot reference the same numeral
memory table. If there are two or more trend graph elements to which the
same numeral memory table is set in the same screen, the element having the
smallest display number is valid. Normally, the display order is the order in
which elements were created. This order can be changed using the Support
Tool.
- The maximum number of trend graph frames that can be registered to a
screen data file is 20.
- If the set sampling cycle is shorter than the time taken for display update processing, sampling results that cannot be processed in time are skipped and the
data is sometimes not be displayed correctly.
Example: The data indicated by X marks in the graph on the left cannot be
processed in time for screen updating, and is skipped. So only the
data indicated by
is displayed. The result is as shown in the
graph on the right.
- On the NTH25/NTH25C, the contents of the words on the host are recognized
according to the setting made for ”Numeral Storage Type” (BCD/binary) for the
numeral memory table. For details, see ”Word contents and displayed numeral” page 163. Note, however, that the number of referenced words for trend
graphs is fixed to one.
- Trend graphs cannot specify numeral memory tables indirectly. Direct referencing must be used.
- On the Support Tool, you can set whether or not to display signs. On the
NTH25/NTH25C, however, this setting is invalid. Signs are displayed as a ratio
to the largest 100% value and smallest 0% value on the line to be displayed.
The --100% value setting is also invalid as there is no sign display.
- On the Support Tool, you can select whether or not to use the data logging
function and background function. On the NTH25/NTH25C, however, these
functions are used all the time, so this setting is invalid.
177
Section 4-11
Graphs
- On the NTH25/NTH25C, dedicated touch switch functions vary as follows
from the NT series PT. For details, see “Display controls using touch switches”
from page 184.
Item
NT series PT
NTH25/NTH25C
Stop
Stops sampling of the current
trend graph.
Stops sampling of all groups belonging to the current trend
graph.
Continue
Continues sampling of the current trend graph.
Continues sampling of all groups
belonging to the current trend
graph.
Clear Display
Clears the display of the current
trend graph, and start display
again. (Past records are not
cleared.)
Cancels the clear record state by
the ”Clear record touch switch”
and starts display. This function
acts on all groups belonging to
the current trend graph.
Clear Log
Clears all past logging data in the
PT. Recording is resumed immediately after past logging data is
cleared.
Clears all group logging data belonging to the current trend
graph. After logging data is
cleared, the record clear state remains as it is, and recording is
not started.
[Setting Restrictions]
The items that can be set on the Support Tool vary from the valid settings on the
NTH25/NTH25C. Pay attention to these restrictions when creating screen data.
Item
178
Support Tool
NTH25/NTH25C
Maximum number of lines
that can be displayed in
one trend graph
50
8 (See ”Restrictions”.)
Maximum number of trend
graph frames that can be
registered to one screen
data file
No limit
20 (See ”Restrictions”.)
Maximum number of lines
that can be registered to
one screen data file
No limit (Maximum number
of lines is 8 when lines are
sampled by data logging
function.)
40 (All lines are sampled
by data logging.)
Frame
Settable
Not supported (displayed
with frame)
Display Sign
Settable
Not supported (displayed
without sign)
Color ”-- Range”
Settable
Not supported
Display %
Settable
Not supported (% not displayed)
--100% ”Value”
Settable
Not supported
0% ”Value”, 100% ”Value”
Minus numbers can be set. Minus numbers are treated
as 0.
% value ”Table Entry”
Settable
Not supported (fixed to setting by value)
Data logging function,
background function
Use of these respective
functions can be set.
Not supported (always
used)
(See ”Restrictions”.)
Section 4-11
Graphs
[Common Attributes]
The following shows the relationship between the properties of a trend graph and
the display results.
Only sections enclosed by
are valid.
! Properties
General
Position
Coordinates of the top left corner of the graph area
Size
Width and height of the area in which the trend graph is displayed
(unit: dot)
Width: 2 to 320, Height: 2 to 240
Display
Type
Line drawing mode (See ”Line drawing mode”, page 181.)
Standard/Pen Reco)
Drawing
Width
Interval between consecutive data on the drawn graph in dot units
(See ”Drawing width”, page 181.)
Direction
Direction of motion of the graph (See ”Line drawing mode”, page
181.)
Up/down/left/right
-- Standard type:
Direction of motion from the latest drawing position
-- Pen recording type:
Direction of motion of the line as a whole
Sampling
Cycle
Cycle (time interval) for data reading (graph updating)
Range: 0.5 to 6553.5 in 0.5 second units
(Input range is 5 to 65535 (in 0.1 steps). Multiples of 5 only can be
entered. Note, however, that on the NTH25/NTH25C units are
rounded up to one second units (multiples of 10).)
179
Section 4-11
Graphs
General
Color
Frame
Display color of the frame (Colors other than black and white are features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
+ Range
Display color of the plus range (Colors other than black and white
are features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
Settings (properties of each line)
Line
Color
Display color of the line (Colors other than black and white are
features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
Style
Line type used
⋅ Solid line:
⋅ Broken line:
⋅ 1-dot chain line:
⋅ 2-dot chain line:
100%*1
Value
Specify the 100% value (default: 100).
Range: 0 to 2147483647
(Minus numbers specified on the Support Tool are treated as 0 on
the NTH25/NTH25C.)
0%*1
Value
Specify the 0% value (default: 0).
Range: 0 to 2147483647
(Minus numbers specified on the Support Tool are treated as 0 on
the NTH25/NTH25C.)
Data Logging
Touch Switches for Logging
Forward
Presense/absence of a touch switch to proceed to the next page
Checked (touch switch set)/Unchecked (touch switch not set)
Rewind
Presense/absence of a touch switch to return to the previous page
Checked (touch switch set)/Unchecked (touch switch not set)
Clear
record *2
Presense/absence of a touch switch to clear the logging data
Checked (touch switch set)/Unchecked (touch switch not set)
Touch Switches for Display Function
*1:
Continue *2
Presence/absence of a touch switch to continue data sampling
Checked (touch switch set)/Unchecked (touch switch not set)
Stop *2
Presence/absence of a touch switch to stop data sampling
Checked (touch switch set)/Unchecked (touch switch not set)
Clear
display *2
Presense/absence of a touch switch to clear the trend graph display
Checked (touch switch set)/Unchecked (touch switch not set)
The 0% value and 100% value must satisfy the following relationship:
0% value < 100% value
*2: On the NTH25/NTH25C, trend graphs are managed in order from the smallest screen number 1 to 20 having a trend graph. Clear record, continue sampling, stop sampling and clear display touch switches can be controlled in separate groups, 1 to 16 (group 1) and 17 to 20 (group 2) from among trend
graphs 1 to 20.
For example, when the trend graph stop switch for trend graph 11 is pressed,
sampling of all trend graph numbers 1 to 16 in group 1 is stopped.
To control trend graphs individually one frame at a time, use the trend graph
control area. (See page 186.)
180
Section 4-11
Graphs
The line thickness for trend graphs is fixed to 1 dot.
Reference
If a small value is set for ”Interval Type”, the line will appear to be a solid line even if
”broken line”, ”1--dot chain line”, or ”2--dot chain line” is specified.
! Display result
Position
(Top left corner of the rectangular area including the
graph, percentage display, and touch switches)
Frame color
100% position
Display color for the + range
Size
(Y direction)
Line (color, style)
Line (color, style)
0% position
Size (X direction)
! Drawing width
The drawing width is the interval at which successive data are drawn in the direction of motion. If a value outside the display area of the graph is specified, the
graph will not be displayed.
On the NTH25/NTH25C, the actual drawing width is adjusted to a value obtained
by evenly dividing the frame width.
Drawing width
Direction of motion
%
! Line drawing mode
The graph is drawn as shown below depending on the settings made for ”Type”
and ”Direction”.
The 100% value is at the top of the frame when ”Direction” is set to horizontal and
at the right of the frame when ”Direction” is set to vertical.
<When ”Standard” is set for ”Type”>
With the standard type, the latest drawing position moves in the direction of motion
specified by ”Direction” with the passage of time. If the direction of motion is set to
”Right”, the display changes as indicated below. When the line reaches the edge of
the graph area, the line is cleared and then drawn again from the beginning.
Direction of
motion %
f: Latest data
To start, the
NTH25/NTH25
C draws a line
from 0 to the
latest data.
f: Latest data
f: Latest data
f: Latest data
f: Latest data
Thereafter, the
NTH25/NTH25C
draws a line from
the last data to
the latest data.
181
Section 4-11
Graphs
The following shows the drawing results for each ”Direction” setting.
“Down”:
The drawing position
moves downward.
“Up”:
The drawing position
moves upward.
Direction of motion
Direction of motion
100%
100%
“Right”:
The drawing position
moves to the right.
“Left”:
The drawing position
moves to the left.
100%
100%
Direction of motion
Direction of motion
<When ”Pen Reco” is set for ”Type”>
With the pen recorder type, the latest drawing position is always displayed at the
edge of the graph area. As time passes, the line already displayed on the graph
moves in the direction specified by ”Direction” (as if paper were moving under a
pen). When the direction of motion is set to ”Right”, the display changes as shown
below. When the line reaches the edge of the graph area, the data is cleared from
the oldest first.
Direction of
motion %
f: Latest data
To start, the
NTH25/NTH25
C draws a line
from 0 to the
latest data.
f: Latest data
f: Latest data
f: Latest data
f: Latest data
The data is
progressively
cleared, oldest
first.
The following shows the drawing results for each ”Direction” setting.
“Up”:
The drawn line moves
upward.
Direction of motion
Direction of motion
100%
“Left”:
The drawn line moves
to the left.
100%
Direction of motion
182
“Down”:
The drawn line moves
downward.
100%
“Right”:
The drawn line moves
to the right.
100%
Direction of motion
Section 4-11
Graphs
! Trend graph frame maximum and minimum values
The maximum and minimum values that can be displayed in a trend graph are as
follows:
<Maximum value>
The largest value of the 100% values for each of the lines displayed on the trend
graph become the maximum value of the trend graph frame.
<Minimum value>
The smallest value of the 0% values for each of the lines displayed on the trend
graph become the minimum value of the trend graph frame.
Example: Standard type graph displaying three lines
The 100% and 0% values of the displayed lines are displayed as follows:
Line 1
100% Value
0% Value
500
200
Line 2
250
0
Line 3
1000
500
In this case, the maximum value becomes 1000 and the minimum value becomes
0.
Changing the values of each line in the trend graph results in the graph shown below.
1st sample
2nd sample
3rd sample
4th sample
Line 1
400
1000
500
200
Line 2
100
--100
--200
--500
Line 3
800
0
600
1000
1st sample 2nd sample 3rd sample 4th sample
1000
Line 1
0
Line 2
Line 3
Direction of motion
Take care when setting maximum and minimum values as setting lines whose
100% and 0% values are far away from each other will make the graph difficult to
view.
! Out--of--range display
Values exceeding the maximum and minimum values of the trend graph are displayed as the maximum and minimum values.
! Contents of host words
On NTH25/NTH25C trend graphs, the contents of the words on the host are interpreted according to the setting made for ”Numeral Storage Type” (BCD/binary) for
the numeral memory table. For details, see ”Word contents and display numerals”
page xx. Note, however, that the number of referenced words for trend graphs is
fixed to one.
183
Section 4-11
Graphs
! Data logging function and background function
The data logging function allows you to record (log) the displayed values internally
on the NTH25/NTH25C.
The data logging function allows you to back track and display past data in the form
of a trend graph.
On the NTH25/NTH25C, the data logging function can be executed on a maximum
of 40 data points. Note, however, that the maximum amount of data that can be
recorded for each line is 640 points. If the data exceeds the limit, the data is deleted
from the oldest point. When all of the data for the page is deleted while past data is
being displayed, the oldest data at that time is displayed by pressing the ”Forward”
touch switch.
If the ”Clear Log” touch switch has been set to be automatically generated, the
data can be cleared at any time (data is cleared in groups). Note, however, that the
record clear state using the ”Clear Log” touch switch can be canceled only by the
”Clear display” touch switch. To use the ”Clear Log” touch switch, be sure to set the
”Clear display” touch switch so that it is automatically generated.
The background function allows data to be sampled even while the trend graph is
not displayed.
The recorded data is displayed by back tracking when the trend graph is displayed.
Note, however, that processing on the NTH25/NTH25C may be slowed down
since sampling continues while the background function is being used.
Reference
- Data retained by the data logging function is retained even when the
NTH25/NTH25C is turned OFF.
- The data logging function and background function are used at all times for trend
graphs on the NTH25/NTH25C.
Data is recorded as follows by the data logging function and background function.
Screen
switching
Trend graph screen
Return
Other screen
Trend graph screen
Data logging performed continually
! Display controls using touch switches
Trend graphs can be given the following indication and touch switches for controlling operation.
These dedicated touch switches can be used for sampling data and manipulating
display.
The relevant functions are performed only once when the touch switches are
pressed.
184
Section 4-11
Graphs
Reference
- On the NTH25/NTH25C, trend graphs are managed by numbers 1 to 20 in order
from the smallest screen number having a trend graph.
Trend graphs are managed in two separate groups: group 1 (trend graph numbers 1 to 16) and group 2 (trend graph numbers 17 to 20). For example, if you
press the ”stop” touch switch for the trend graph having trend graph number 11
belonging to group 1, sampling of all trend graph numbers 1 to 16 in group 1 is
stopped. Likewise, pressing the touch switch for trend graph number 17, sampling of all trend graph numbers 17 to 20 is stopped.
- To control (clear record, stop/continue sampling) trend graphs one frame at a
time, use the trend graph control area. (See page 186.)
”Stop” touch switch
This switch stops data sampling. Updating of the trend graph display is
also stopped at the same time.
On the NTH25/NTH25C, the ”stop” touch switch operates on all data
within a group.
While sampling is stopped, the ”stop” touch switch is lit.
When the background function is used, pressing the
(stop) touch
switch stops sampling in the background.
(previous
After pressing the ”stop” touch switch, if you press the
page (rewind)) touch switch to return to a past display and then press the
(restart (continue)) touch switch to restart sampling, past data will not
be displayed and new data will start to be drawn again.
Example:
”Restart” (continue) touch switch
This touch switch restarts the sampling of data stopped by pressing the
”stop” touch switch. Updating of the trend graph display is also started at
the same time.
On the NTH25/NTH25C, the ”restart” touch switch operates on all data
within a group.
During sampling, the ”restart” (continue) touch switch is lit.
DSP
CLR
”Display clear” (clear display) touch switch (Function differs with that for
NT series PTs.)
This cancels the clear record state made by the ”log clear” touch switch,
and restarts recording and display.
On the NTH25/NTH25C, the ”clear display” touch switch operates on all
data within a group.
185
Section 4-11
Graphs
LOG
CLR
”Log clear” (clear log) touch switch (Function differs with that for NT series PTs.)
This touch switch clears all the logging data. At the same time, the currently displayed trend graph is also cleared. When the ”log clear” touch
switch is pressed, records are cleared, and recording and display are no
longer carried out until the ”clear display” touch switch is pressed.
On the NTH25/NTH25C, the ”clear log” touch switch operates on all data
within a group.
”Previous page” (rewind) touch switch
This touch switch displays logging data older than that of the currently
displayed trend graph.
With a standard type trend graph, if this touch switch is pressed during
display of the latest data to back track to past data, and then the ”next
page” (forward) touch switch is pressed to return to display of the latest
data, the latest data is drawn following the past data.
Example:
%
%
”Next page” (forward) touch switch
This touch switch displays logging data newer than that of the currently
displayed trend graph.
When the latest data is displayed during data logging, updating of the
trend graph display is automatically restarted.
! Display control using the trend graph control area
Stopping/continuing trend graphs and clearing of records is also possible by manipulating the trend graph control area. Manipulating the trend graph control area
allows trend graphs to be individually controlled.
The trend graph control area allows you to allocate words on the host at the ”trend
control area” of the NTH Screen Data Converter.
For details on operations, see ”Trend graph control area setting” on page 271.
186
Section 4-11
Graphs
! Display direction of previous/next page touch switch
The following shows the display direction of the previous/next page touch switches
when ”Right” is set for ”Direction”.
[Type: Standard]
1 page of display
Oldest
Previous page
(rewind)
Next page
(forward)
Latest
[Type: Pen Reco]
1 page of display
Next page
(forward)
Latest
Previous page
(rewind)
Oldest
! When the display is rewound from past data to the latest.
The following shows the display when the page is rewound to the latest display
after displaying past data.
-- Standard type
1 page of display
Latest data
Display
Latest data
-- Pen record type
With the pen recorder type, the latest drawing position is always displayed at the
edge of the graph area. So, old data may be displayed discontinuously as shown
below (internally, the data is recorded continuously) depending on the number of
data points in the latest page.
1 page of display
Latest data
Display
Latest data
187
Section 4-11
Graphs
[Display Functions]
- With trend graphs, the graph area is displayed in accordance with the ”General” settings, and the broken line is displayed in accordance with the ”Settings”
(properties of each line) settings.
For details on the display mode depending on the ”General” and ”Settings”
(properties of each line) settings, see ”Common Attributes”.
- When two or more broken line graphs are registered, they are overwritten in
the order in which they were registered. When broken lines overlap, colors are
displayed in their corresponding inverse color. So, line types and colors may
appear to be different from their specified color. The same applies when broken lines overlap the graph frame.
*: Display color and their respective inverse colors are as follows:
Black $ White, Blue $ Yellow, Red $ Cyan, Magenta $ Green
[Input Functions]
Trend graphs do not have a direct input function as they display the contents of
words on the host via numeral memory tables. Note, however, that the
NTH25/NTH25C does not actually have numeral memory tables, so actually the
trend graph reads the contents of words on the host.
[Output Functions]
Trend graphs have no output function.
[Processing Functions]
Trend graphs have no data processing function.
[Relationship with Other Elements]
Do not overlap other elements within the area in which a trend graph is drawn. This
can cause the graph to be displayed incorrectly.
188
Section 4-12
Alarm List, Alarm History
4-12
Alarm List, Alarm History
[Function Outline]
! Alarm list
The NTH25/NTH25C can monitor the state of bits on the connected host specified
in bit memory tables and display the corresponding message (”Value” of character
string memory table) when the state of a specific bit changes to ”1” (ON). The element used to execute this function is called an ”alarm list”.
Message set for bit memory table No. 1
(”Value” of character string memory table No. 32)
“Value” of Character string
memory table No. 32
Character string memory table
number 50
No. 0
Character string memory table
number 32
No. 1
Character string memory table
number 54
No. 2
Bit
Host
0 A000000
1 A000001 " 1 (ON)
0 A000002
! Alarm history
The NTH25/NTH25C can continually monitor bits on the host specified in bit
memory tables, record the date and time when their state changes to ”1” (ON), and
display this information together with the corresponding message (”Value” of character string memory table) for the bit. The element used to execute this function is
called an ”alarm history”.
Message set for bit memory table No. 24
(”Value” of character string memory table No. 13)
Record data
”Value” of
12/04 11:19 character
string memory
table No.13
”Value” of
character
12/04 11:25 string memory
table No.12
Reference
Character string memory table
number 11
No. 22
Character string memory table
number 12
No. 23
Character string memory table
number 13
Bit memory table 24
97/12/04 11:19:20
ON
Bit memory table 23
97/12/04 11:25:12 ON
No. 24
- On the NTH25/NTH25C, when a message projects off the display field, it is displayed over two or more lines at double--line spacing.
- Alarm history record data that is currently recorded internally by the
NTH25/NTH25C is retained by a capacitor when operation is stopped, for example, during use of the programming console function, or when the power is
turned OFF. Note, however, that the capacitor discharges and the record data
will be cleared after a few days. Record data is also cleared when screen data is
sent to NTH25/NTH25C memory.
! Differences between alarm list and alarm history
The alarm list and alarm history differ in the following respects:
Item
Alarm List
Alarm History
Recording
No recording executed
Date and time of occurrence is recorded.
Display order
Ascending order of bit
memory table numbers
whose bits on the host
have changed state to ”1”
(ON)
Chronological order in
which the states of the
monitored bits changed to
”1” (ON) (the newest record
first)
189
Section 4-12
Alarm List, Alarm History
! Outline of alarm list/alarm history operations
The following describes alarm list and alarm history operations.
Reference
- The alarm list and alarm history check bits on the host allocated bit memory
tables.
Consequently, if a large number of host bits is set, processing on the
NTH25/NTH25C may be slowed down.
- Alarm lists are displayed in ascending order of bit memory table numbers, and
alarm histories are displayed in occurrence order (from the newest record).
- In the case of alarm lists, the message is automatically cleared if the state of a
host bit allocated a bit memory table returns to ”0” (OFF) while an alarm list is
displayed.
In the case of alarm histories, the previous message remains, and a message
indicating that the bit has changed to 0 (OFF) again is displayed if the state of a
host bit allocated a bit memory table returns to 0 (OFF) while an alarm history is
displayed.
Also, the corresponding message is displayed if the state of a host bit changes to
1 (ON) while an alarm history is displayed.
[Restrictions]
- Only either of an alarm list or alarm history can be registered to a screen.
- An alarm list/alarm history can display up to 8 messages at the same time.
Messages which are hidden can be displayed by operating the line or page
scroll touch switches specially provided.
- The maximum number of data records that can be recorded with the alarm history is 200.
- On the Support Tool, bit memory table numbers and the number of referenced
bit memory tables can be set to alarm lists. The NTH25/NTH25C, however,
always monitors 240 host bits (15 words) from the PC address (bit) currently
set to bit memory table number 0. So, the bit memory table numbers and the
number of referenced bit memory tables settings are invalid. (See ”Bit memory
tables” page 103.)
- On the NTH25/NTH25C, messages for alarm lists and alarm histories that
cannot fit on one line are displayed over two or more lines. (If the message
projects downwards off the screen, the entire message is fed to the next
page.) Messages spread over two or more lines are displayed at double--line
spacing. For this reason, the appearance of messages differs from that on the
Support Tool.
Be sure to check the display on the NTH25/NTH25C before use.
190
Section 4-12
Alarm List, Alarm History
- On the Support Tool, you can set whether or not to display the date and time of
occurrence and the display mode. On the NTH25/NTH25C, however, this setting is invalid, and the display is always the occurrence order in the format
”month/day, hours:minutes”. Set as follows to prevent mismatch with the display on the Support Tool:
History Info:
Order Type:
Info Type:
Checked
Occurrence order
Month/day, hours:minutes
On the NTH25/NTH25C, changes in bit states are displayed as follows in addition
to the infomation above:
When bit state changes from 0 (OFF) to 1 (ON):
When bit state changes from 1 (ON) to 0 (OFF):
Alarm occurrence
Recovery
- On the Support Tool, the width of the message display field is ”Length” plus the
date and time of occurrence. (Actually, it is slightly longer as the field is adjusted to fit the touch switch.) Whereas, on the NTH25/NTH25C, the part up to
the date of occurrence display is included in ”Length” and the display field
width is calculated by adding the message display field on the Support Tool to
the bit change information component (5 digits). So, when ”month/day
hours:minute” display (12 digits) is set, the display on the NTH25/NTH25C is
seven digits narrower than on the Support Tool. Arrange elements taking this
into consideration when creating screens.
Example:
When ”Length” is set to 16 and ”month/day hours:minutes” display is set:
-- On Support Tool
Display field width = 16 digits + 12 digits = 28 digits
-- On the NTH25/NTH25C
Display field width = 16 digits + 5 digits = 21 digits
According to the above calculation, only four digits will be used for displaying
messages on the NTH25/NTH25C. To use 16 digits for displaying messages,
you must set ”Length” to 28.
- On the NTH25/NTH25C, the alarm history cannot be displayed in the frequency (count) order.
- On the Support Tool, you can set the color of message display field frames and
their background color when lit. On the NTH25/NTH25C, however, these settings are invalid as message display fields do not have a function for acting a
touch switch. Display fields are displayed in their OFF color at all times.
- On the Support Tool, you can set whether or not to display image/library data
and their color. On the NTH25/NTH25C, however, image/library data cannot
be displayed in alarm lists and histories, so these settings are invalid.
191
Section 4-12
Alarm List, Alarm History
[Setting Restrictions]
The items that can be set on the Support Tool vary from the valid settings on the
NTH25/NTH25C. Pay attention to these restrictions when creating screen data.
Item
Support Tool
NTH25/NTH25C
Maximum number of alarm
list and histories on one
screen
Total of 4
Either of one
Maximum number of messages that can be displayed simultaneously
12
8
Bit memory table number
for alarm lists, number of
referenced bit memory
tables
Settable
Not supported (All bit
memory tables are referenced at all times.)
(See ”Restrictions”.)
Alarm history properties
Settable
”History Info”, ”Order Type”,
”Info Type”
Not supported (The occurrence order is always displayed in the ”month/day
hours:minute” format.)
(See ”Restrictions”.)
Display scaling of messages
Settable
Not supported (always displayed as Equal)
Smoothing
Settable
Not supported (displayed
without smoothing)
”Frame” and ON color of
message display field
Settable
Not supported (displayed
at OFF color)
(See ”Restrictions”.)
Display and color of Image- Settable
Lib
Not supported (Image/library data cannot be displayed.)
(See ”Restrictions”.)
[Common Attributes]
The following shows the relationship between the common properties of alarm
lists and alarm histories and the display result.
Only sections enclosed by
192
are valid.
Section 4-12
Alarm List, Alarm History
! Properties
General
Position
Coordinates of the top left corner of the alarm list/history
Size
Width and height of the alarm list/history (unit: dot)
(Note that motion is in touch--switch--sized units only.)
Message
Length
Maximum number of characters in the message to be displayed
1 to 39
Display Line Qty Maximum number of messages to be displayed
1 to 8
(Values 9 or above set on the NTH25/NTH25C are handled as
8.)
Line Scroll Touch
Switches
Touch switches for scrolling messages in line units
Checked (touch switches present)/Unchecked (touch
switches absent)
Page Scroll Touch
Switches
Touch switches for scrolling messages in page units
Checked (touch switches present)/Unchecked (touch switches
absent)
General
Background color
OFF
OFF color of the message display field (Colors other than
black and white are featured on only the NTH25C.
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
Position
(Top left corner of the rectangular area enclosing the message
display field and touch switches.)
“Length”
Size (Y direction)
”Display Line Qty”
Size (X direction)
OFF color
- The positions of line/page scroll touch switches can be set separately. Note,
however, that their display colors and sizes cannot be changed.
- The ”Length” range in alarm histories is different from the above. (See ”Restrictions”.)
193
Section 4-12
Alarm List, Alarm History
[Display Functions]
! Alarm list
In addition to the ”Common Attributes”, alarm lists have “Settings” properties. All
properties, however, are invalid.
-- Drawing result
An alarm list monitors 240 host bits (15 words) from the PC address (bit) set to bit
memory table number 0, and executes display in accordance with the ”General”
settings.
For details on the display mode according to the ”General” settings, see ”Common
Attributes”.
! Alarm history
Apart from the ”Common Attributes”, alarm histories have the “Settings” properties. All properties, however, are invalid.
-- Display result
The history is displayed as follows depending on the settings made for ”General” .
Change information
(Ararm/Recovery (5 digits)
Time of occurence
Month/Day hour:minute
(12 digits)
Message
Line scrolling touch switches
Page scrolling touch switches
Number of digits complies
with “Length”
For details on the display mode according to the ”General” settings, see ”Common
Attributes”.
! Display at message update
When the state of a monitored host bit changes during display of an alarm list/
alarm history, the display changes as follows.
-- With an alarm list
When the state of a monitored host bit changes to ”1” (ON), the corresponding
message is displayed. When it changes back to ”0” (OFF), the message is cleared
(the messages are displayed in ascending order of bit memory table numbers).
[When a message is added]
-- If a message is added outside the display range (before or after the display
range), the currently displayed message does not change.
-- If a message is added within the display range, the new message is displayed,
and the messages following it are shifted one line downward.
[When a message is deleted]
-- If a message is deleted outside the display range (before or after the display
range), the currently displayed message does not change.
-- If a message is deleted within the display range, the messages following it are
shifted one line upward, except when it is the topmost message in the display that
is deleted. In this case, the message immediately preceding the present display
range is displayed in its place.
194
Section 4-12
Alarm List, Alarm History
! Alarm history
When the status of the monitored host bit changes to ”1” (ON), the corresponding
message becomes the latest message and is appended to the history record.
When the state of the bit changes back to ”0” (OFF), the message remains displayed.
Since new messages are added at the end of the history, the displayed messages
do not change. If the states of multiple bits change to ”1” (ON) at the same time, the
bit memory table with the smallest bit memory table number is given priority.
! Note on clearing alarm history record data
Alarm history record data that is currently recorded internally by the
NTH25/NTH25C is retained by a capacitor when operation is stopped, for example, during use of the programming console function, or when the power is turned
OFF. Note, however, that the capacitor discharges and the record data will be
cleared after a few days. Record data is also cleared when screen data is sent to
NTH25/NTH25C memory.
[Input Functions]
Alarm lists and alarm histories do not have a direct input function as they display
the contents of words on the host via bit memory tables. Note, however, that the
NTH25/NTH25C does not actually have bit memory tables, so actually the Alarm
lists and alarm histories read the contents of words on the host.
[Output Functions]
Alarm lists and alarm histories have no output function.
[Processing Functions]
Alarm lists and alarm histories have no data processing function.
[Relationship with Other Elements]
- Alarm lists and alarm histories monitor the states of host bits and display messages, in accordance with the settings of bit memory tables. For details, see
”Bit Memory Tables” (page 103).
195
Section 4-13
Inputting Numerals
4-13
4-13-1
Inputting Numerals
Numeral key type (”Numeral Input”)
[Function Outline]
Numeral key type numeral input fields are input fields for inputting numerals on the
screen.
The numerals input to a numeral input field using touch switches are written to a
numeral memory table (words on host).
The values can be input either in decimal or hexadecimal format.
The NTH25/NTH25C does not actually have numeral memory tables, so only the
PC address set to the numeral string memory table and the numeral storage type
are used to directly reference words on the host from a numeral display element.
! Outline of operation
The following shows the basic operation of a numeral key type numeral input field.
(1) A numeral is input to a numeral input field using touch switches.
NTH25/NTH25C
Numeric value displayed in
the numeral setting input field
1234
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
Input
Input the numeric value with the numeric keys
on the screen.
(2) On applying the input numeral with the touch switch it is written to a numeral
memory table (words on host).
At this time, the host is notified via the PT status notify area that a numeral has
been input.
With thumbwheel type numeral input field, each time a change is made to the
numeral and applied, the host is notified of that change.
NT31/NT31C
1234
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
196
NTH25/NTH25C
Data writing
Host
Input
On pressing the
the host.
key, the input value is written to
Inputting Numerals
Section 4-13
[Restrictions]
- The maximum number of numeral input elements that can be registered to one
screen varies as follows according to the communications method:
[Host link, NT link (1:1)]
Max. 80 total of numeral key types and thumbwheel types
The number of numeral input elements is counted according to their display
order, and elements exceeding this maximum are discarded. Note, however,
that on the Support Tool numeral key type and thumbwheel type numeral input
elements are counted individually. So, both of their display orders cannot be
checked simultaneously. Take care to prevent this limit from being exceeded,
and thoroughly check the screen on the NTH25/NTH25C before operation.
[Memory link]
Max. 80 total of numeral key types and thumbwheel types
The number of numeral input elements is counted in order from the smallest
numeral memory table number, and elements exceeding this maximum are
discarded. (The same numeral memory table cannot be set to two or more numeral input elements in the same screen.)
- There is no restriction on the number of input fields that can be registered to
one screen data file; any number can be registered as long as the maximum
data file size is not exceeded.
- The range of numerals that can be input varies on the ”Storage Type” (BCD/
binary) of the numeral memory table, and the ”Display Type” (decimal/hexadecimal), and ”Display Type” settings made for the numeral input element. For
details, see ”Input numeral and stored data” (page 200).
- The number of words on the host that are referenced by numeral input elements is as follows depending on the number of display digits:
When the number of digits in the integer part + number of digits past the
decimal point is =< 4 digits: 1 word
When the number of digits in the integer part + number of digits past the
decimal point is > 5 digits: 2 words
- With numeral key type numeral input elements on the standard screen (base
screen), numerals in the process of being entered are not displayed. The numerals are displayed once the
or ENT key is pressed to apply the entry.
Note, however, that the previous numeral remains displayed if the numeral
you entered is in error or is caught in the limit check.
With numeral key type numeral input fields (temporary input fields) on window
screens, numerals in the process of being entered are displayed. Note, however, that the previous numeral remains displayed if the numeral you entered
is in error or is caught in the limit check.
- The maximum number of digits that can be set on the Support Tool is ten. However, on the NTH25/NTH25C, the maximum is eight for the integer part and six
for the decimal fraction. The sign digit and decimal point are counted as one
digit each. Set the number of digits taking this restriction into consideration to
prevent mismatch with the display on the Support Tool.
- On the Support Tool, signed display can be set. However, minus numbers cannot be entered in numeral input on the NTH25/NTH25C. So this setting is invalid.
197
Section 4-13
Inputting Numerals
[Setting Restrictions]
The items that can be set on the Support Tool vary from the valid settings on the
NTH25/NTH25C. Pay attention to these restrictions when creating screen data.
Item
Support Tool
NTH25/NTH25C
Maximum number of numeral key type numeral inputs in one screen
256
80
(This maximum includes
the total of both numeral
key types and thumbwheel
types.)
(See ”Restrictions”.)
Font type ”Half Height”
Settable
Not supported (displayed in
standard)
Font type ”Double Width”
Settable
Displayed as standard font
with width doubled. Note,
however, that 8 x 8 fonts
are displayed as standard
font.
Size 3 x 3
Settable
Not supported (displayed in
2 x 2)
Smoothing
Settable
Not supported (displayed
without smoothing)
Maximum number of display digits
10 digits
8 digits (The decimal point
is also counted as one digit.)
(See ”Number of display
digits” on page 200.)
Display Sign
Settable
Not supported (Minus numbers cannot be entered.)
Focus Frame, Focus Attrib- Settable
ute
Not supported (displayed
without cursor)
[Common Attributes]
The following shows the relationship between the properties of a numeral input
field and the numerals input and displayed.
Only sections enclosed by
198
are valid.
Section 4-13
Inputting Numerals
! Properties
General
Position
Coordinates of the top left corner of the numeral input field
Font Type
Display font for the numerals
Standard/Double Width
(When a double width font is specified, the standard font is
displayed with its width doubled. Half height fonts are displayed
as standard fonts.)
Scale
Scale at which the numeral is displayed (See ”Enlarged
display”, page 162.)
1 x 1 (equal), 1 x 2 (high), 2 x 1 (wide), 2 x 2, 4 x 4, 8 x 8
(3 x 3 characters set on the Support Tool are displayed as 2 x 2
characters on the NTH25/NTH25C.)
Attribute
Display mode for numerals (See ”Display attributes and
drawing result”, page 202.)
Standard/Flash/Inverse Flash
Color
Foreground
Display color of numerals (Colors other than black and white
are features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
Background
Background color of numerals (Colors other than black and
white are features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
Settings
Table Entry
Number of the numeral memory table to which the input
numeral is written (BCD 4 digits)
0 to 1999 (host link, NT link (1:1))
0 to 499 (memory link)
Display Type
Display type for numerals (See ”Input numeral and stored data”,
page 200.)
Decimal/Hexadecimal
Format (See ”Number of display digits”, page 200.)
Integer
Number of digits in the integer part of
the numeral
1 to 8
Decimal
Number of digits in the decimal
fraction of the numeral
0 to 6
Maximum combined
total of 8 digits
Limit (See ”Upper/lower (max./min.) limit check”, page 202.)
Maximum
Upper limit for numerals that can be input
Minimum
Lower limit for numerals that can be input
Zero Suppression Use of zero suppression (See ”Zero suppression”, page 163.)
Checked (zero suppression used)/Unchecked (zero
suppression not used)
Position
Foreground color
123456
Background color
199
Section 4-13
Inputting Numerals
! Number of display digits
All numerals are stored as integers to words on the host. To display a numeral that
has a decimal fraction in a numeral input field, set the ”Decimal” setting to ”1” or
higher to specify the number of places past the decimal point. A decimal point is
automatically inserted.
If the number of numeral digits is greater than the ”Integer” and ”Decimal” total, the
upper digits are discarded, and only the displayable lower integer digits and the
decimal fraction are displayed.
The maximum number of digits in the integer part is eight, and the maximum number of digits past the decimal point is six. Up to a total of eight digits including one
digit for the decimal point can be specified.
Example:
Displaying ”123456”
-- Setting for ”Integer” = 8 and ”Decimal” = 0:
Resulting display: 00123456
-- Setting for ”Integer” = 4 and ”Decimal” = 4:
Resulting display: 12.3456
-- Setting for ”Integer” = 2 and ”Decimal” = 4:
Resulting display: 12.3456
-- Setting for ”Integer” = 1 and ”Decimal” = 4:
Resulting display: 2.3456
! Input numeral and stored data
The range of numerals that can be input and the conversion method for storing
numerals depend on the following factors:
Numeral Storage Type (BCD/binary)
Display Type (decimal/hexadecimal)
<Function of Numeral Storage Type>
The numeral storage type determines whether the contents of words on the host
are recognized as BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) or binary (hexadecimal). Numerals are converted according to this method also when words on the host are written
to.
Note, however, that minus numbers cannot be entered in numeral input on the
NTH25/NTH25C.
200
Section 4-13
Inputting Numerals
<Function of Display Type>
The display type determines whether numerals are displayed in decimal or hexadecimal.
<Permissible Input Range>
The table below shows the permissible input ranges for each of the settings made
for ”Numeral Storage Type” and number of referenced words, and ”Display Type”.
Note, however, that the decimal point is not shown in the table as numerals are
displayed using the values stored on the host. Even if an attempt is made to enter a
value outside of these ranges, the limit check on the NTH25/NTH25C prevents the
value from being entered. (Even if the value is within the ranges in the table, values
outside the range set to the limit check cannot be input.)
Storage
types
Number of
words
BCD
1
2
Binaryy
1
2
*:
Display Type
Permissible Display Range
Decimal
0 to 9999
Hexadecimal
0 to 270F Hex
Decimal
0 to 99999999
Hexadecimal
0 to 5F5E0FF Hex
Decimal
0 to 9999
*
Hexadecimal
0 to 7FFF Hex
Decimal
0 to 99999999
Hexadecimal
0 to 7FFFFFFF Hex
*
If the numeral has a decimal point, the number of digits that can be used as the
numeral is one digit less.
<Numerals and contents of host words>
When a numeral is entered, it is written to the words on the host according to the
settings made for ”Display Type” and ”Numeral Storage Type”.
The examples in the following table are for numerals without a decimal point.
Input
numeral
1234
Display
Type
Words
Storage
Type
Decimal
1 word
BCD
123456
1234
000004D2
1234
Hexadecimal
i l
123456789
4660
Display on
NTH25/NTH25C
after Numeral Is
Applied
1234
1234
1 word
1234
1234
2 words
00001234
00001234
1 word
2A
0042
1 word
1234
04D2
12345678
00BC614E
1234
4660
2 words
Decimal
Contents of
Word on Host
1 word
Binaryy
32768
1 word
8000
32768
123456789
2 words
BC614E
12345678
1 word
1234
1234
1234
7FFF
7FFFFFFF
Hexadecimal
i l
1 word
7FFF
7FFF
2 words
7FFFFFFF
7FFFFFFF
201
Section 4-13
Inputting Numerals
Reference
- When the ”Numeral Storage Type” is set to BCD, entered numerals are converted to BCD data before they are written to words on the host. Note, however,
that when a value that is not a BCD is entered, the value will not be entered or
displayed as intended. For example, some digits will be ignored.
When the ”Numeral Storage Type” is set to binary, entered numerals are converted to hexadecimal data before they are written to words on the host.
- When the ”Numeral Storage type” is set to BCD, set the ”Display Type” to decimal. Even if ”Display Type” is set to hexadecimal, entered numerals are treated
as BCD and cannot be input correctly.
- Though minus numbers cannot be entered on the NTH25/NTH25C, minus numbers are sometimes displayed in the numeral input field on the NTH25/NTH25C
when a minus number is stored to the contents of words on the host.
! Upper/lower (max./min.) limit check
The NTH25/NTH25C has a function for checking the correctness of an input numeral. This prevents a numeral outside the permissible range from being input so
that the input of an illegal value will not adversely affect the system.
In the case of a numeral key type numeral input field, the limit check is executed
when an attempt is made to apply a numeral. If the value is higher than the upper
limit or lower than the lower limit, the input value is cleared. (The status returns to
that before input was attempted.)
Caution
Be sure to use the limit check function to ensure safe use of the numeral input
function.
! Display attribute and drawing result
Attribute
Standard
Drawing Result
The numeral display is displayed at the specified
foreground color and background color.
12345678
Flash
Repeated alternation of the ”standard” display and no
display.
12345678
Inverse Flash
& No display
Repeated inverted display of each of the foreground and
background colors and no display.
12345678
& No display
! Specifying the input field when there are multiple input fields
When the screen contains multiple input fields, specify the required numeral input
field by the cursor move touch switch.
Note, however, that on the NTH25/NTH25C, only the cursor move touch switch
that you use to register numeral input fields to screen is valid. Cursor move touch
switches made for different purposes using the touch switch functions cannot be
used even if they are linked to a numeral input field later.
202
Section 4-13
Inputting Numerals
[Display Functions]
Numerals are displayed in the numeral input field in accordance with the ”General”
settings.
For details on the display mode according to the ”General” settings, see ”Common
Attributes”.
[Input Functions]
Numerals are input to numeral input fields by using the ”control code input key”
touch switches.
[Output Functions]
Numeral inputs do not have a direct input function as they write to words on the
host via numeral memory tables. Note, however, that the NTH25/NTH25C does
not actually have numeral memory tables, so actually numeral inputs write to
words on the host.
The host is notified that a numeral has been input by the PT status notify area.
[Processing Functions]
With numeral input fields, input numerals are converted to display numerals in accordance with the ”Settings” property.
For details on the method of conversion using the ”Settings” property, see ”Common Attributes”.
[Relationship with Other Elements]
- ”Numeral display” (page 159) use the same conversion method and display
mode as numeral input fields.
- Input and apply touch switches are required to use numeral input fields.
- A cursor move touch switch must be made for numeral key type numeral input
fields, so numeral input fields cannot overlap each other, and numeral input
fields cannot overlap touch switches.
4-13-2
Thumbwheel Type (Thumbwheel)
[Function Outline]
Thumbwheel type numeric input fields are input fields for inputting numerals on the
screen.
Touch switches are provided to increment or decrement each digit of a numeral,
making it easier to change numerals and to write them to numeral memory tables.
The values can be input in either decimal or hexadecimal format.
The NTH25/NTH25C does not actually have numeral memory tables, so only the
PC address currently set to the numeral string memory table and the numeral storage type are used to directly reference words on the host from a numeral display
element.
203
Section 4-13
Inputting Numerals
! Outline of operation
The following shows the basic operation of a thumbwheel type numeral input field.
(1) The value in the numeral input field is changed using the increment and decrement (+, --) touch switches.
NTH25/NTH25C
((((
1234
++++
Press the [(] key to decrement the digit.
Press the [+] key to increment the digit.
(2) Each time a change is made to the numeral and applied, the host is notified of
that change via the PT status notify area.
NTH25/NTH25C
((((
1234
++++
Data writing
1234
Host
Numeral memory table
Each time a [+] or [(] key is pressed, the input value is written
to the numeral memory table and the change is notified to the
host at the same time.
[Restrictions]
- The maximum number of numeral input elements that can be registered to one
screen varies as follows according to the communications method:
[Host link, NT link (1:1)]
Max. 80 total of numeral key types and thumbwheel types
The number of numeral input elements is counted according to their display
order, and elements exceeding this maximum are discarded. Note, however,
that on the Support Tool numeral key type and thumbwheel type numeral input
elements are counted individually. So, both of their display orders cannot be
checked simultaneously. Take care to prevent this limit from being exceeded,
and thoroughly check the screen on the NTH25/NTH25C before operation.
[Memory link]
Max. 80 total of numeral key types and thumbwheel types
The number of numeral input elements is counted in order from the smallest
numeral memory table number, and elements exceeding this maximum are
discarded. (The same numeral memory table cannot be set to two or more numeral input elements in the same screen.)
- There is no restriction on the number of input fields that can be registered to
one screen data file; any number can be registered as long as the maximum
data file size is not exceeded.
- The range of numerals that can be input depends on the ”Storage Type” (BCD/
binary) of the numeral memory table, and the ”Display Type” (decimal/hexadecimal) settings made for the numeral input field. For details, see ”Input numeral and stored data” (page 208).
204
Section 4-13
Inputting Numerals
- The number of words on the host that are referenced by numeral input elements is as follows depending on the number of display digits:
When the number of digits in the integer part + number of digits past the
decimal point is =< 4 digits: 1 word
When the number of digits in the integer part + number of digits past the
decimal point is > 5 digits: 2 words
- The maximum number of digits that can be set on the Support Tool is ten. However, on the NTH25/NTH25C, the maximum number of digits in the integer
part is eight, and the maximum number of digits past the decimal point is six.
Up to a total of eight digits including one digit for the decimal point can be specified. Set the number of digits taking this restriction into consideration to prevent mismatch with the display on the Support Tool.
- On the Support Tool, signed display can be set. However, minus numbers cannot be entered in numeral input on the NTH25/NTH25C. So this setting is invalid.
- The appearance of thumbwheel type numeral input fields on the Support Tool
differs from that on the NTH25/NTH25C. Check the display on the
NTH25/NTH25C before use.
[Setting Restrictions]
The items that can be set on the Support Tool vary from the valid settings on the
NTH25/NTH25C. Pay attention to these restrictions when creating screen data.
Item
Support Tool
NTH25/NTH25C
Maximum number of
thumbwheel type numeral
inputs in one screen
64
80
(This maximum includes
the total of both numeral
key types and thumbwheel
types.)
(See ”Restrictions”.)
Frame color
Color of frame for numeral
input field and color of
character and frame of ”+”
and ”--” touch switches
Color of character and
frame of ”+” and ”--” touch
switches
Maximum number of displayed digits
10 digits
8 digits (The decimal point
is also counted as one digit.)
(See ”Number of digit displayed” on page 207.)
Display Sign
Settable
Not supported (Minus numbers cannot be entered.)
205
Section 4-13
Inputting Numerals
[Common Attributes]
The following shows the relationship between the properties of a thumbwheel type
numeral input field and the numerals input and displayed.
Only sections enclosed by
are valid.
! Properties
General
Position
Coordinates of the top left corner of the numeral input field
Thumbwheel Color
Frame
Color of character and frame of ”+” and ”--” touch switches
(Colors other than black and white are features only on the
NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
Foreground
Foreground color of the numeral input field (Colors other than
black and white are features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
Background
Background color of the numeral input field (Colors other than
black and white are features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
Character Color
206
Foreground
Display color of the numerals (Colors other than black and
white are features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
Background
Background color of the numerals (Colors other than black and
white are features only on the NTH25C.)
Black/Blue/Red/Magenta/Green/Cyan/Yellow/White
Section 4-13
Inputting Numerals
Settings
Table Entry
Number of the numeral memory table to which the input
numeral is written (BCD 4 digits)
0 to 1999 (host link, NT link (1:1))
0 to 499 (memory link)
Display Type
Display format for the numeral (See ”Input numeral and stored
data”, page 208.)
Decimal/Hexadecimal
Format (See ”Number of digits displayed”, page 207.)
Integer
Number of digits in the integer part of
the numeral
1 to 8
Decimal
Number of digits in the decimal
fraction of the numeral
0 to 6
Maximum combined
total of 8 digits
Limit (See ”Upper/lower (max./min.) limit check”, page 209.)
Maximum
Upper limit for numerals that can be input
Minimum
Lower limit for numerals that can be input
Color of the input field (foreground/background
color of tiling pattern)
Character color
Frame color
Background color of numerals
Position
Number of digits in integer part
! Number of digits displayed
All numerals are stored as integers to words on the host. To display a numeral that
has a decimal fraction in a numeral input field, set the ”Decimal” setting to ”1” or
higher to specify the number of places past the decimal point. A decimal point is
automatically inserted.
If the number of numeral digits is greater than the ”Integer” and ”Decimal” total, the
upper digits are discarded, and only the displayable lower integer digits and the
decimal fraction are displayed.
The maximum number of digits in the integer part is eight, and the maximum number of digits past the decimal point is six. Up to a total of eight digits including one
digit for the decimal point can be specified.
Example:
Displaying ”123456”
-- Setting for ”Integer” = 8 and ”Decimal” = 0:
Resulting display: 00123456
-- Setting for ”Integer” = 4 and ”Decimal” = 4:
Resulting display: 12.3456
-- Setting for ”Integer” = 2 and ”Decimal” = 4:
Resulting display: 12.3456
-- Setting for ”Integer” = 1 and ”Decimal” = 4:
Resulting display: 2.3456
207
Section 4-13
Inputting Numerals
! Input numeral and stored data
The range of numerals that can be input and the conversion method for storing
numerals depend on the following factors:
-- Numeral Storage Type (BCD/binary)
-- Display Type (decimal/hexadecimal)
<Function of Numeral Storage Type>
The numeral storage type determines whether the contents of words on the host
are recognized as BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) or binary (hexadecimal). Numerals are converted according to this method also when words on the host are written
to.
Note, however, that minus numbers cannot be entered in numeral input on the
NTH25/NTH25C.
<Function of Display Type>
The display type determines whether numerals are displayed in decimal or hexadecimal.
<Permissible input ranges>
The table below shows the permissible input ranges for each of the settings made
for ”Numeral Storage Type” and number of referenced words, and ”Display Type”.
Note, however, that the decimal point is not shown in the table as numerals are
displayed using the values stored on the host. Even if an attempt is made to enter a
value outside of these ranges, the limit check on the NTH25/NTH25C prevents the
value from being entered. (Even if the value is within the ranges in the table, values
outside the range set to the limit check cannot be input.)
Storage
types
Number of
words
Display Type
Permissible Display Range
BCD
1
Decimal
0 to 9999
Hexadecimal
0 to 270F Hex
2
Binaryy
1
2
*:
Reference
Decimal
0 to 99999999
Hexadecimal
0 to 5F5E0FF Hex
Decimal
0 to 9999
Hexadecimal
0 to 7FFF Hex
Decimal
0 to 99999999
Hexadecimal
0 to 7FFFFFFF Hex
If the numeral has a decimal point, the number of digits that can be used as the
numeral is one digit less.
- When the ”Numeral Storage Type” is set to BCD, entered numerals are converted to BCD data before they are written to words on the host.
When the ”Numeral Storage Type” is set to binary, entered numerals are converted to hexadecimal data before they are written to words on the host.
- When the ”Numeral Storage Type” is set to BCD, set the ”Display Type” to decimal. Even if ”Decimal Type” is set to hexadecimal, entered numerals are treated
as BCD and cannot be input correctly.
- Though minus numbers cannot be entered on the NTH25/NTH25C, minus numbers are sometimes displayed in the numeral input field on the NTH25/NTH25C
when a minus number is stored to the contents of words on the host.
208
*
*
Section 4-13
Inputting Numerals
! Upper/lower (max./min.) limit check
The NTH25/NTH25C has a function for checking the correctness of an input numeral. This prevents a numeral outside the permissible range from being input so
that the input of an illegal value will not adversely affect the system.
The upper/lower (max./min.) limit check is executed at the following timing according to the type of numeral input field.
For a thumbwheel type numeral input field, the check is executed each that time
the increment/decrement key of each digit position is pressed.
Note, however, that carry over and underflow are no longer possible at the highest
digit position if n and m are in the relationship n...n < m...m [upper limit: 1n...n, lower limit: 0m...m (”n” and ”m” are arbitrary values at each digit)].
Example:
Caution
If the upper limit value and the lower limit value are 1200 and 201,
respectively, the numeral can be changed only in the following range:
from 201 to 999 if the default is a 3--digit value and from 1000 to 1200
if the default is a 4--digit value.
The reason for this is that the upper/lower (max./min.) limit check
function does not allow the numeral at the highest digit position to
change from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0.
To avoid this, either set the upper and lower limit values so that the
relationship becomes ”n...n >= m...m”, or provide a touch switch separately to write a numeral for carry over or underflow.
Upper/lower limits are checked when the entered numeral values are applied.
[Display Functions]
Numerals are displayed in the numeral input field in accordance with the ”General”
settings.
For details on the display mode according to the ”General” settings, see ”Common
Attributes”.
[Input Functions]
Numerals are input to a thumbwheel type numeral input field by using the ”+” and
”--” touch switches provided for each digit.
[Output Functions]
Numeral inputs do not have a direct input function as they write to words on the
host via numeral memory tables. Note, however, that the NTH25/NTH25C does
not actually have numeral memory tables, so actually numeral inputs write to
words on the host.
The host is notified that a numeral has been input by the PT status notify area.
[Processing Functions]
With numeral input fields, input numerals are converted to display numerals in accordance with the ”Settings” property.
For details on the method of conversion using the ”Settings” property, see ”Common Attributes”.
209
Section 4-13
Inputting Numerals
[Relationship with Other Elements]
- ”Numeral display” (page 159) use the same conversion method and display
mode as numeral input fields.
- A cursor move touch switch must be made for numeral key type numeral input
fields, so numeral input fields cannot overlap each other, and numeral input
fields cannot overlap touch switches.
210
Section 4-14
Special Functions
4-14
Special Functions
In addition to display elements, the NTH25/NTH25C is provided with the following
functions. These functions can also be executed on the NTH25/NTH25C.
------
Window Function
Function Switches
Backlight OFF Function
Clock Function
Programming Console Function
P 211
P 214
P 215
P 216
P 217
This section describes each of these special functions.
4-14-1
Window Function
The NTH25/NTH25C has a ”window function.” This function can display a window
overlapping the currently displayed screen (base screen). This function allows you
to open windows without restriction whenever you need them.
What are windows?
A ”window” is a screen that can be displayed overlaying the currently displayed
screen (base screen). You can specify any size and display position for a window.
Windows can be used mainly for the applications below. Windows are referred to
as ”Window/Keyboard Screen” in the Support Tool due to the fact that they are
mainly used as keyboards.
-- An explanatory message can be registered to a window, enabling it to be used as
a HELP screen during operation.
Control
the
conveyor.
HELP
OPEN
HELP
CLOSE
HELP
OPEN
HELP
CLOSE
Window opens
Press here
-- If you register multiple control keys (touch switches) for numeral input in advance, you can call up these keys whenever you need them.
Numeral input field
7 8 9
4 5 6 .
1 2 3 0
Press ”OPEN Keyboard”
OPEN
Keyboard
CLOSE
Keyboard
OPEN
Keyboard
CLOSE
Keyboard
Input window
Reference
To fix a numeral setting, you need a key for applying the numeral that you entered. Allocate the or ENT control key to a touch switch to create this key.
211
Section 4-14
Special Functions
-- If you register multiple screen switching keys (touch switches) in advances, you
can use these keys as menus for switching the screen.
Graph
Next
MENU
MENU
When “Graph” is pressed
Press here
When “Next” is pressed
MENU
MENU
Window Screens and Display Elements
The window function allows you to create a window in any of the user screens,
numbered 1 to 1000. (A screen to which a window is registered is called a ”window
screen”.)
You can register up to 20 window screens to one screen data file.
When a screen is registered as a window screen, you must specify the window
area to set the size of the window. The window is always displayed at the ”window
area” size.
The window position becomes the position of the ”window area” on the window
screen. (You cannot change this position.)
You can register the following elements on NTH25/NTH25C window screens. Other elements are invalid in window screens.
-- Fixed display elements (characters, graphics, marks)
-- Touch switches (Input notify touch switch is not allowed.)
-- Numeral input field (Only one can be used. This becomes the ”temporary input
field.”)
Reference
- Elements that project off the window area will not be displayed when the window
opens.
- Display processing slows down slightly while a window is open.
- On the NTH25/NTH25C, the window screen can no longer be used when even
part of a window overlaps a touch switch on the base screen.
Opening/closing a window
On the NTH25/NTH25C, windows are opened and closed as follows:
-- By pressing a touch switch having a ”pop--up keyboard function”
212
Section 4-14
Special Functions
Reference
- If the window that you specified to open is not a window screen, the open instruction is ignored.
- On the NTH25/NTH25C, only one ”Open” or ”Toggle” key can be displayed inside the same screen. Even though multiple keys can be registered on the Support Tool, only the key having the smallest display order number is valid. Other
keys are discarded.
! Pressing a touch switch having the pop--up keyboard function
Pressing a touch switch having the pop--up keyboard function opens and closes
the window currently specified on the NTH25/NTH25C.
Opening and closing a window by a pop--up keyboard function key involves the
following control operations:
Open: Opens the specified window. If another window is already opened, that
window is first closed before the specified window opens. If the specified
window is already opened, nothing happens.
Close:Closes the currently open window regardless of the number of the specified window. Toggles keys set on the Support Tool function as open keys
on the NTH25/NTH25C.
Only one window can be opened at any one time.
When you switch to a different screen, the currently opened window is automatically closed.
No change even by pressing ”CLOSE”
Base Display
No change even by pressing ”Screen 1”
Press ”Screen 1”.
Base Display
Display
OPEN
window
CLOSE
window
Display
Display
CLOSE
Press Close.
CLOSE
[Settings]
When you create a screen on the Support Tool, set the ”pop--up keyboard function”
for opening and closing the window to a touch switch, and specify the window number (keyboard screen number) to be opened to register it to the screen.
You can specify the following window screen numbers:
0001 to 1000: Screen numbers (keyboard screen number) 1 to 1000
Reference
- The window will not open if the number you specified is not a window screen.
- The state of the window after the or ENT key is pressed to apply a numeral
during numeral key type numeral input varies according to the communications
method as follows:
[Host link, NT link (1:1)]
The window remains displayed also after numerals are applied.
[Memory link]
The window closes when a numeral is applied.
- On the Support Tool, the touch switch for the ”cursor move” function has a check
box for the ”Use Window/Keyboard Screen” function. This check box is not provided on the NTH25/NTH25C. The NTH25/NTH25C has no function for automatically displaying a window by pressing a cursor move key.
213
Section 4-14
Special Functions
Temporary Input Fields
Only one numeral key type numeral input field can be registered to a window. This
input field is shared with multiple numeral input fields on the base screen, and can
be used as a temporary input field before actually inputting data to the actual input
field on the base screen.
The advantage of a temporary input field is that entries can be input to it while
checking the current setting on the base screen.
Numeral input field Temporary input field (displays data being input)
123456
41.8
41.8
0002.71
Current setting
0555.44
7
4
1
0
8 9
5 6
2 3
. ENT
Window
However, if there is not even one numeral input field (numeral key type) on the
base screen, the temporary input field will be displayed but cannot be used. Also,
thumbwheel type numeral input fields cannot be registered to windows.
If the temporary input field has fewer digits than the actual input field on the base
screen (integer part + decimal fraction part + decimal point digit + sign digit), it will
be displayed but cannot be used.
If it is not possible to use a temporary input field, you must input the data directly
onto the base screen.
4-14-2
Function Switches
The NTH25/NTH25C is provided with 13 function switches: ”+”, ”--” and ”F1” to
”F11”. The host can be notified of the function of these function switches.
This section only briefly describes the functions of these function switches. For
details on how to set these function switches, see ”Function key Settings” (page
265).
Reference
The ”+” and ”--” function switches can be set to output bits as operation output at
the same time as the above notify host function. For details, see ”Use of Operation
Output” (page 36).
Bit notify and word notify
There are two type of notify actions when a function switch is pressed: bit notify
and word notify.
Reference
- When the host link or NT link (1:1) is used, bit notify and word notify can be used
simultaneously.
When the memory link is used, you can use only one of bit notify (notify only the
bit ON/OFF state) or word notify (notify the specified value).
The notification details and action during notification vary according to the communications method. For details, see ”Function key Settings” (page 265).
- The host notification method can be set separately on each function switch.
214
Section 4-14
Special Functions
! Bit notify
The host is notified of changes in the switch state.
Two notify actions are available: notification only when the switch is pressed (momentary), and notification when the switch is pressed and then released (alternate).
! Word notify
When the switch is pressed, the host is notified of a number (binary, 4--digit hexadecimal) currently set by the NTH Screen Data Converter.
4-14-3
Backlight OFF Function
The NTH25/NTH25C has a backlight OFF function for turning the screen OFF if it
is not operated for a fixed period of time. The purpose of this function is to extend
the service life of the backlight.
This backlight OFF function operates only while the NTH25/NTH25C is running,
and can only started up in the CHECK menu or in the RUN mode.
Caution
When the backlight is out or the display state is ”no--display,” do not inadvertently
touch a touch switch or function switch.
Check the safety of the system before you touch a touch switch or function switch.
Reference
- The backlight can also be turned OFF by setting the state of the PT status control bit, bit 0 (backlight mode). Note, however, that ”Configuration” -- ”Auto CFL
off” must be set to (disable backlight auto OFF function) on the NTH Screen
Data Converter when the PT status control bit is used. So, the PT control area
bit and the backlight auto OFF function cannot be used simultaneously.
- The backlight OFF function does not function while screen switching is periodically being performed from the host.
Turning the backlight ON again
The above operations can turn the backlight back ON again when the backlight
OFF function is activated and the backlight is OFF:
-- Pressing a function switch
-- Touching a touch panel
-- Switching the screen from the host
If you touch a touch switch while the backlight is OFF, only the operation of turning
the backlight ON again is executed and touch switch functions (e.g. notification to
host, screen switching) are not executed. (When a function switch is pressed, notification of the function switch also is executed.)
Reference
- When the backlight is turned OFF by manipulating the PT status control bit, it
can be turned ON again only by setting the PT status control bit ”backlight
mode” (bit 0) to 1 (ON). (The backlight cannot be turned ON again by the above
operation.)
- The backlight will not turn ON again when display contents (e.g. currently displayed numerals and character strings) are only updated.
215
Section 4-14
Special Functions
Setting the backlight OFF function
On the NTH Screen Data Converter, set whether or not to use the backlight OFF
function or set the time until the backlight turns OFF when the backlight OFF function is set to be used when you send the screen data to the NTH25/NTH25C.
For details on the setting, see ”[Initialise] page” page 261.
4-14-4
Clock Function
The NTH25/NTH25C has a clock function for managing the date and time. The
clock data managed internally by the NTH25/NTH25C can also be written to the
host by instructing reading from the host.
Reference
- The NTH25/NTH25C does not have a backup battery. Required data is backed
up by a capacitor. Note, however, that this capacitor discharges and the clock
data will be cleared after a few days, causing the clock function to malfunction.
- The NTH25/NTH25C does not allow display and setting of clock data by using
the clock function on the Support Tool. To set the date and time, use System
Menu.
- The clock data is not set on the NTH25/NTH25C before shipment from the factory.
Setting Clock Data
Display the menu for displaying and setting clock data from the System Menu and
make the required settings. For details, see 3--8 ” Setting the Clock Data” (page
71).
How to read the clock data
Output the clock data currently set by the NTH25/NTH25C’s clock function to the
host.
The following area for NTH25/NTH25C clock data is provided in the PT status control area and PT status notify area:
[PT status notify area]
n+3ch
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
Notify content
Clock data output
Backlight mode
5
0
[PT status notify area]
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 Bit
Word
m
m+1
System reserve
m+2
System reserve
m+3
Month (BCD 2--digit)
Day (BCD 2--digit)
m+4
Hour (BCD 2--digit)
Minute (BCD 2--digit)
m+5
216
PT status notify bits
Year (BCD 4--digit)
PT status
Clock data
1 (ON)
0 (OFF)
Yes
ON
OFF
No
Section 4-14
Special Functions
[Settings]
The PT status control area and PT status notify area must be allocated to words on
the host. So, settings for controlling operation on the NTH25/NTH25C are not required.
[Operation]
To output the NTH25/NTH25C’s internal clock to the PT status notify area, manipulate the PT status control area as follows.
(1) Set bit 5 of the 4th word (n+3 word) in the PT status control area as follows:
n+3 word
Bit 5:
Clock data output
Output:
1 (ON)
No output: 0 (OFF)
Clock data is written at 1--minute intervals to the area for notifying the clock
data in the PT status notify area for the duration that the state of this bit is 1
(ON). Note, however, that the clock data output interval may fluctuate when
numerals are frequently input on the NTH25/NTH25C.
4-14-5
Programming Console Function (Expansion Function)
As an extended function, the NTH25/NTH25C features the ”programming console
function”. This function allows the NTH25/NTH25C to be used in place of a programming console (model CPM1A) for a C--series CPM1 (CPM1A), or a CQM1,
C200HX/HG/HE--EZ or SRM1--C02--V1.
Almost all of the programming console functions are possible, with the exception
of recording (storing) ladder programs on cassette tape and playing (reading)
them back.
For details on the system configuration for using the programming console function, how to connect to a PC, and how to use the programming console function,
see 3--10 ”Programming Console Function” (page 74).
The programming console function can be used even when the PC is in the RUN
mode. Note, however the NTH25/NTH25C will stop operating at the same time
that the programming console function is applied. (RUN LED turns OFF.)
Pressing the ”Quit” touch switch on the programming console function screen
quits the programming console function. The RUN mode is then returned to, and
the screen currently specified at ”Screen Switch Setting” in the PT status control
area is displayed.
217
SECTION 5
Using Memory Link (NTH Protocol)
This section gives an overview of memory link (NTH protocol) operations, and mainly describes communications between
the NTH25/NTH25C and host when using memory link (NTH protocol).
5-1
Operation of Memory Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1 PT Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-2 Configuration of PT Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-3 Key Points When Creating Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Outline of Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-1 Communications Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2 Memory Link Commands/Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-3 Notes on Using Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Data Structure According to Display Element and Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
220
220
221
222
224
224
225
228
230
219
Section 5-1
Operation of Memory Link
5-1
Operation of Memory Link
This section describes the function of the memory link (NTH protocol). For an outline of the memory link functions, see 1--4 ”Communications by Using Memory
Link”.
5-1-1
PT Memory
With the NTH25/NTH25C memory link, data transactions between the host and
the NTH25/NTH25C are handled via ”PT memory.” PT memory is automatically
allocated to each element.
PT memory is a virtual PC area within the NTH25/NTH25C. The NTH25/NTH25C
reads and writes to the internal PT memory, and the host controls and monitors the
NTH25/NTH25C by reading/writing PT memory.
With PT memory, there is no classification of the area as there is with real PC
areas; it comprises a memory link area of addresses 0000 to 9999 and A000 to
A050.
With the NTH25/NTH25C memory link, PT memory differs from regular PC
memory in that one address corresponds to a single elements. So, when two
words are used for a single element such as for a numeral display, the data of multiple words corresponds to a single address. (The data of multiple words can be
read or written on a single address by memory link commands.)
The following table summarizes the differences in the allocated words (addresses)
between when regular direct accessing is performed and when the
NTH25/NTH25C memory link is used.
Item
Direct Access
Memory Link (NTH protocol)
Address/element correspondence
Allocatable to any address Addresses used for each
(area and position)
element is already determined.
Address/data correspondence
-- In case of word address- The data volume per 1 ades: 1 word for 1 address varies according to
dress. In case of bit ad- element type.
dresses: 1 bit for 1 address
-- In case of elements that
use multiple words, multiple addresses are occupied.
Reference
220
With the NTH25/NTH25C memory link, addresses are automatically allocated to
each element. So, the PC addresses and number of allocated channels set on the
Support Tool are invalid. (Predetermined bits must be set for only lamp bits.)
Section 5-1
Operation of Memory Link
5-1-2
Configuration of PT Memory
The following table shows the correspondence between display elements and
functions in PT memory.
Address
Reference
Words/
Address
Write
Direction
Display Elements/Function
See
0000
1 word
PT % host
Touch switches (for input notify function)
Page 230
Function switches
0001 to
0080
2 words
PT % host
Numeral input (numeric key type,
thumbwheel type)
Page 233
0900
1 word
PT % host
PT status notify bit
(Function differs slightly from direct
access.)
Page 234
0903 to
0905
1 word
PT % host
Clock data
Page 235
1000
1 word
PT $ host
Display screen number
Page 236
Page 237
1001
1 word
Host % PT
PT status control bit
(Function differs slightly from direct
access.)
2000 to
2014
1 word
Host % PT
Bit memory table (alarm list, alarm
history)
Page 238
3001 to
3120
2 words
Host % PT
Numeral display
Page 239
4001 to
4200
4 words
(x 4 words
bits)
Host % PT
Image/library lamp
Page 240
7001 to
7030
1 word
Host % PT
Bar graph
Page 241
8001 to
8040
1 word
Host % PT
Trend graph
Page 242
8103 to
8104
1 word
Host % PT
Clear trend graph record
Page 243
8107 to
8108
1 word
Host % PT
Trend graph sampling stop/continue Page 244
9001 to
9050
21 words
Host % PT
Character string display
Page 245
A001 to
A050
4 words
(x 4 words
bits)
Host % PT
Standard lamp
Page 247
F000
1 words
PT % Host
Touch switches (for input notify function)
Page 230
Function switches
Addresses are specified in BCD. Note, however, that the first word of addresses
used only by lamps is ”A” (41 Hex) and Switches Notify “F” (46 Hex).
221
Section 5-1
Operation of Memory Link
5-1-3
Key Points When Creating Screen Data
Memory link has unique restrictions since the allocation of elements differs with
that for host link and NT link (1:1).
The following table summarizes points to be aware of when creating screen data
for the memory link. For details, see descriptions for elements in this section and in
Section 4 ”NTH25/NTH25C Functions”.
Display Elements/
Function
Settings When Creating Screen Data
Memory Link Operation on NTH25/NTH25C
Touch switches (for An appropriate allocated bit is set to
The position code of a touched touch switch is written to PT
input notify functhe touch switch notify bit. (This setting memory address 0000.
tion)
is actually invalid.)
At the same time, the notify command notifies the host of
the state and position code of the touch switch.
Function switches
The notify method is set by the NTH
Screen Data Converter.
The position code or numeral value of the touched function
switch is written to PT memory address 0000 according to
the currently set notify method.
At the same time, the notify command notifies the host of
the state and position code or numeral value of the function
switch.
Numeral input (numeric key type,
thumbwheel type)
Appropriate allocated bits are set to
numeral memory tables 0 to 79 (these
settings are actually invalid), and those
numeral memory tables are set to numeral input elements.
Numeral memory tables 0 to 79 are automatically allocated
to PT memory addresses 0001 to 0080. Note, however, that
when there are two or more numeral input elements to
which the same numeral memory table has been set, only
the numeral input element having the smallest screen number and earliest display order is valid.
PT status notify bit
Though PT status notify area must be
allocated on the Support Tool, this allocation is actually invalid. Allocate this
area to an appropriate channel.
When the state of the PT status notify bit changes due to
the state of the backlight or normal/erroneous execution of
a memory link command, the change is written to PT
memory address 0900.
At the same time, the notify command notifies the host of
the PT status notify bit.
Bit memory table
An appropriate allocated bit is set to bit Bit memory tables 0 to 239 are automatically allocated to
(for alarm list/alarm memory table 0 (this setting is actually each of the bits in PT memory addresses 2000 to 2014.
history function)
invalid), and the alarm list/alarm history
elements are registered to the screen.
Numeral display
Appropriate allocated bits are set to
numeral memory tables 0 to 119 (these
settings are actually invalid), and that
numeral memory table is set to a numeral display element.
Numeral memory tables 0 to 119 are automatically allocated to PT memory addresses 3001 to 3120. Note, however, that when there are two or more numeral display elements to which the same numeral memory table has been
set, only the numeral display element having the smallest
screen number and earliest display order is valid.
Image/library lamp
Image/library lamp numbers 1 to 64
are calculated according to the display
order, and lamp bits are allocated to
00000 to 00315 according to this lamp
number.
Screen numbers 1 to 200 are automatically allocated to PT
memory addresses 4001 to 4200.
A single PT memory address comprises four words (lamp
bits for 64 image/library lamps). So, during control by the
host, the notify command writes 4--word data to the PT
memory address corresponding to the screen.
Bar graph
Appropriate allocated words are set to
numeral memory tables 0 to 29 (these
settings are actually invalid), and that
numeral memory table is set to a trend
graph element.
Numeral memory tables 0 to 29 are automatically allocated
to PT memory addresses 7001 to 7030. Note, however, that
when there are two or more trend graph elements to which
the same numeral memory table has been set, only the
trend graph element having the smallest screen number
and earliest display order is valid.
222
Operation of Memory Link
Display Elements/
Function
Section 5-1
Settings When Creating Screen Data
Memory Link Operation on NTH25/NTH25C
Trend graph
An appropriate numeral memory table
is set to each line to be displayed on
the trend graph (this setting is actually
invalid), and that line is set to the trend
graph element.
Each line is automatically allocated to PT memory addresses 8001 to 8040 in order from the smallest screen number
and in the earliest display order if in the same screen.
Trend graph frames are automatically allocated to each of
the bits of PT memory addresses 8103 and 8104 (clear
trend graph records) and 8107 and 8108 (sampling stop/
continue) as trend graph control area in order from the
smallest screen number.
Character string
display
Appropriate allocated words are set to
character string memory tables 0 to 49
(these settings are actually invalid),
and that character string memory table
is set to a character string display element.
Character string memory tables 0 to 49 are automatically
allocated to PT memory addresses 9001 to 9050. Note,
however, that when there are two or more character string
display elements to which the same character string
memory table has been set, only the character string display element having the smallest screen number and earliest display order is valid.
Standard lamp
Standard lamp numbers 1 to 64 are
calculated according to the display order, and the lamp bits are allocated to
00000 to 00315 according to this lamp
number.
Screen numbers 1 to 1000 are automatically allocated to
PT memory addresses A001 to A050 in 50 screen increments. (For example, screen numbers 1, 51, 101 ... 951
share PT memory address 4001.)
A single PT memory address comprises four words (lamp
bits for 64 standard lamps). So, during control by the host,
the notify command writes 4--word data to the PT memory
address corresponding to the screen.
223
Section 5-2
Outline of Communications
5-2
Outline of Communications
This section describes the basic communications protocol when using memory
link and the program flow for using memory link. In this description, communications is performed on the RS--232C interface using BASIC commands.
5-2-1
Communications Protocol
Communications between the host and the NTH25/NTH25C takes place in accordance with the following protocol.
(1) To perform communications, the communications line must first be opened.
”Opening” here means enabling use of the line.
(2) The NTH25/NTH25C is controlled and its state read by commands.
(3) To terminate communications, close the communications line.
[Host program]
OPEN instruction
LINE INPUT
#instruction
CLOSE instruction
Open state
PRINT #instruction
Communication line
Line opened
Command
transmission
[Operation at NTH25/NTH25C]
Command/
response
transmission
Command
reception
Command/
response
transmission
Line closed
Once the line has been opened, it can be used until it is closed.
! Function of each instruction
OPEN instruction
: Opens the RS--232C line.
Also sets the communications conditions at the host
(see page 55).
PRINT # instruction
: Sends commands to the NTH25/NTH25C via the
RS--232C line.
LINE INPUT # instruction : Receives the response from the NTH25/NTH25C.
The LINE INPUT command is used as the response
data sometimes includes data that corresponds to a
control code.
CLOSE instruction
: Closes the RS--232C line.
For detailed information on instructions, refer to the BASIC language instruction
manual for the host.
224
Section 5-2
Outline of Communications
5-2-2
Memory Link Commands/Responses
With memory link, data transactions between the host and NTH25/NTH25C are
handled using the following commands and responses.
Commands and responses are used according to the following three operations.
! Writing to PT from Host
Data is written to PT memory from the host according to commands, and the result
(normal or erroneous end) is returned as the response.
This operation can be performed only on PT memory whose write direction is
”Host to PT”.
Reading to Host from PT
The host issues commands for reading the contents of PT memory, and the read
data is returned as the response.
This operation can be performed only on PT memory whose write direction is ”PT
to host”.
Notifying to Host from PT
The host is notified of changes in PT memory states as the command. (A response
from the host is not required.)
The following two changes in PT memory states are notified:
Touch switches/function switches (address 0000)
PT status notify bit (address 0900)
Reference
When commands are issued continuously, be sure to acknowledge the response
from the NTH25/NTH25C for the previous command before issuing the next command.
Writing to PT from Host
[Operation at host]
Command transmission
[Operation at NTH25/NTH25C]
Data write command
Command reception
Command processing
Response reception
Response transmission
Rsponse
(ACK or NAK)
! Data write command
The write command is sent in the following format. This command can be used
only for PT memory that can be written to by the host.
ID
[ENO]
05
30
[ESC]
30
1B
W
Address
57
Write data
D11
D12
D13
D14
Dn1
Dn2
Dn3
Dn4
[CR]
0D
ID
: ”00” (30 Hex, 30 Hex) fixed
W
: ”W” (57 Hex) fixed
This indicates the write mode.
225
Section 5-2
Outline of Communications
Address
: Address of PT memory at write destination (4 BCD digits)
Note, however, that the first word of addresses used only by lamps
is ”A” (41 Hex).
D11, D12, D13, D14 to Dn1, Dn2, Dn3, Dn4:
Write data (4 hexadecimal digits) n words
Number of words n and the contents of the data vary according to
the element.
For details, see the description for the respective element.
! Response during a write
A response is returned as follows according to the results of processing:
Normal end
[ACK]
06
Erroneous end
[NAK]
15
Reading to Host from PT
[Operation at host]
Command transmission
[Operation at NTH25/NTH25C]
Data write command
Command reception
Command processing
Response reception
Response
(response data or NAK)
Response transmission
! Read command
The read command is sent in the following format:
ID
[ENO]
05
30
[ESC]
30
1B
Number of read data
Address
R
52
[CR]
0D
226
ID
: ”00” (30 Hex, 30 Hex) fixed
R
: ”R” (52 Hex) fixed
This indicates the read mode.
Address
: Address of PT memory at read source (4 BCD digits)
Note, however, that the first word of addresses used only by lamps
is ”A” (41 Hex).
When the data of continuous multiple elements is to be read, specify the first address.
Section 5-2
Outline of Communications
Number of read data:
Number of elements whose data is to be read (4 BCD digits)
The maximum data that can be read in one operation is 63 words.
When an attempt is made to read data exceeding 63 words, data
may not be read correctly.
! Response during a read
A response is returned as follows according to the results of processing:
Normal end
Read data
ID
[STX]
05
D11
30
Dn1
ID
D12
D13
D14
30
Dn2
Dn3
Dn4
[CR]
[ETX]
0D
03
: ”00” (30 Hex, 30 Hex) fixed
D11, D12, D13, D14 to Dn1, Dn2, Dn3, Dn4 :
Write data (4 hexadecimal digits) n words
When the data of continuous multiple elements is read, the data for
the number of elements is returned in order from the first element.
Number of words n and the contents of the data vary according to
the element.
For details, see the description for the respective element.
The maximum data that can be read in one operation is 63 words.
Erroneous end
[NAK]
15
Notify PT to Host
[Operation at host]
[Operation at NTH25/NTH25C]
Reception of notify contents
Notify command
Transmission of notify command
! Notify command
The notify command is sent in the following format. This command is used only
when notifying ”touch switches/function switches”, “clock data” and the ”PT status
notify bit”.
02
Address
ID
[STX]
38
30
Notify data
[CR]
0D
ID
Address
[EXT]
03
: ”80” (38 Hex, 30 Hex) fixed
: Address of PT memory whose state changed (4 BCD digits)
D1, D2, D3, D4 : Notify data (4 hexadecimal digits) n words
The contents of the data varies according to the element. For
details, see the description for the respective element.
227
Section 5-2
Outline of Communications
5-2-3
Notes on Using Commands
The following describes the points that should be observed when using commands.
! Method for Specifying Commands
When a personal computer or similar device is used as the host and a high--level
language such as BASIC or C is used for writing the program, commands are specified as ASCII character strings.
Write the numeric values (BCD or hexadecimal) or character string for parameters
as ASCII character strings. Parts in brackets, such as [ESC] and [CR] each indicate one control code (the [ESC] code, the [CR] code, etc.).
In the explanations of commands, expressions such as ”4 BCD digits” and ”2 hexadecimal digits” are used to mean ”the ASCII character strings for a numeric value
expressed as four BCD digits” and ”the ASCII character string for a numeric value
expressed as 2 hexadecimal digits”, respectively. Do not specify BCD and hexadecimal data without alteration; always convert it into an ASCII character string
before transmission.
Example: To display the screen having screen number 123, specify and write
”0123” to PT memory address 1000 as follows:
Reference
[ENO]
0
0
[ESC]
1
0
0
0
05
30
30
1B
57
31
30
30
30
0
1
2
3
[CR]
30
31
32
33
0D
W
In the ”Format” sections in the explanations for commands/responses, parentheses are used to indicate parts that can under some circumstances be omitted,
and ** is used to indicate the ASCII code (2 hexadecimal digits) of the specified
character.
! Processing differences according to command length
- If a command is too long because it has been incorrectly specified, the command
will continue to be written to the next address. If the next address is for a PT
memory that cannot be written to, the NAK code (15 Hex) will be returned.
- If a command is short because it has been incorrectly specified, processing is as
follows:
If the command does not contain the CR code (0D Hex), the NTH25/NTH25C
waits for the command. If there will be no response at all, send the CR code (0D
Hex).
If the command is found to be too short when the CR code (0D Hex) is received,
the NAK code (15 Hex) will be returned from the NTH25/NTH25C.
! Command transmission intervals
- If commands are sent too frequently, processing at the NTH25/NTH25C will not
be able to keep pace with the commands and commands that cannot be processed are discarded.
- To prevent commands from being discarded, issue commands so that host waits
for the response from the NTH25/NTH25C before issuing the next command.
228
Section 5-2
Outline of Communications
! Order of priority of input communications commands
- When a reason for input notification arises during processing of a command
from the host, the input command is issued only after processing of the currently
executing command has ended.
229
Section 5-3
Data Structure According to Display Element and Function
5-3
Data Structure According to Display Element and Function
This section describes for each element the structure of the data that is specified
by the write command and the data that is returned by the read command.
Touch switches, function switches (PT to host) Address 0000/F000
The data (position or numeral) that indicates the touched touch switch or function
switch is written when a touch switch or function switch having the input notify
function is pressed on the NTH25/NTH25C. (The state of PT memory does not
change when a touch switch not having the input notify function is pressed.)
Elements and address
Only PT memory address 0000 is used regardless of the touch switch or function
switch that was touched.
Data contents
This data comprises one word as follows:
! Touch switches
The position code (4 hexadecimal digits) to be written to PT memory address
0000/F000 corresponds to the 16 (horizontal) x 12 (vertical) touch area as follows:
[Touch switch area and position codes]
0000 Hex
0001 Hex
0002 Hex
000F Hex
0100 Hex
0101 Hex
0102 Hex
010F Hex
0200 Hex
0201 Hex
0202 Hex
020F Hex
0A00 Hex
0A01 Hex
0A02 Hex
0A0F Hex
0B00 Hex
0B01 Hex
0B02 Hex
0B0F Hex
When a touch switch is registered straddling two or more touch switch areas, the
position of the top left touch switch area is notified.
230
Section 5-3
Data Structure According to Display Element and Function
! Function switches (notify by position code)
If the function switch is set so that it is notified by a position code (”SW”) by the NTH
Screen Data Converter, the position code (4 hexadecimal digits) to be written to
PT memory address 0000/F000 is as follows:
[Function switches and position codes]
Function switch
Position code
Function switch
Position code
+
0C00 Hex
F1
0D00 Hex
--
0C01 Hex
F2
0D01 Hex
F7
0C02 Hex
F3
0D02 Hex
F8
0C03 Hex
F4
0D03 Hex
F9
0C04 Hex
F5
0D04 Hex
F10
0C05 Hex
F6
0D05 Hex
F11
0C06 Hex
-- Function switches (notify by specified value)
If the function switch is set so that it is notified by a specified value (”specified value”) by the NTH Screen Data Converter, the currently set ”specified value” (4 hexadecimal digits, 0000 to FFFE Hex) is notified.
Reference
When a value in the same range as the position code of a touch switch/function
switch is specified as the ”specified value,” the distinction as to whether the data is
a position code or the currently set specified value can no longer be made. Take
note of this when setting the ”specified value.”
! Position code/specified value and read/notify data
Position code (4
hexadecimal digits)
Specified value (4
hexadecimal digits)
Read data
Notify data
X4 X3 X2 X1
X4
X3
X2
X1
FFFF Hex is written in place of the position code or specified value:
Until a touch switch/function switch is pressed for the first time after operation of
the NTH25/NTH25C is started
Or, from when all position codes and specified values of the touched switches are
read by the host until the next touch switch/function switch is pressed
231
Data Structure According to Display Element and Function
Section 5-3
[Explanation]
- The switch state is notified as follows by ”addresses” by the notify command of
the touch switch/function switch. (With memory link, all touch switch notify operations are ”momentary.”)
When pressed: address F000 Hex
When released: address 0000 Hex
- Only one position code or specified value can be read from PT memory address
0000/F000 in one operation. However, up to eight position codes or specified
values of pressed touch switches/function switches are registered to
NTH25/NTH25C memory.
When the next touch switch/function switch is pressed before PT memory address 0000/F000 is read by the host, that position code or specified value is registered to NTH25/NTH25C memory. Each time that PT memory address
0000/F000 is read, data is written to PT memory address 0000/F000 in order
from the oldest data.
If a touch switch is pressed nine times or more before PT memory address
0000/F000 is read by the host, the previous record is held, and the new position
codes and specified values are no longer registered to NTH25/NTH25C
memory.
- When memory link is used, do not press four or more touch switches simultaneously. Doing so might prevent the change in touch switch states from being
read correctly by the NTH25/NTH25C.
232
Section 5-3
Data Structure According to Display Element and Function
Numeral input (PT to host)
Addresses 0001 to 0080
When a numeral is entered in the numeral input field (numeric key type, thumbwheel type) on NTH25/NTH25C, the entered numeral is written.
Elements and address
Numeral memory tables 0 to 79 currently set to the numeral input elements correspond to PT memory addresses 0001 to 0080.
Data contents
This data comprises two words. Note, however, that when the number of input digits is four or less, the 2nd word becomes 0000 Hex.
The structure of the data to be read is as follows:
Input numeral (8 digits) X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X4
X3
X2
X1
X8
X7
X6
X5
Read data
1st word
2nd word
Input numerals are notified in BCD when the ”numeral storage type” set on the
Support Tool is set to ”BCD” and are notified in hexadecimal when the ”numeral
storage type” is set to ”binary”.
00000000 Hex is written until the first numeral is input to the relevant numeral
memory table after start of NTH25/NTH25C operation.
Explanation
- PT memory for numeral input is separated from PT memory for numeral display
and graph display. So, PT memory for numeral input is not affected if the same
numeral memory table is used on a numeral display element or graph element.
233
Section 5-3
Data Structure According to Display Element and Function
PT status notify bit (PT to host)
Address 0900
The state of the backlight on the NTH25/NTH25C and the error status (protocol
error) of memory link commands is reflected at all times.
Reference
Memory link differs from direct access (host link , NT link (1:1) in that there is no
numeral input strobe for the PT status notify bit. The PT status notify bit in memory
link commands also reflects the presence of an error for the command in bit 2.
Elements and address
Only PT memory address 0900 is used.
Data contents
This data comprises one word.
The following shows the function of each bit.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PT status notify bit value (4
hexadecimal digits)
2
1
0
Bit
0
X4 X3 X2 X1
2
0
X4
X3
X2
Notify content
Protocol error
Backlight status
1 (ON)
Yes
ON
0 (OFF)
No
OFF
X1
Read data
Explanation
- If the state of the backlight changes during NTH25/NTH25C operation, the
change in state is reflected in ”backlight status.” Also, if an erroneous command
is received during NTH25/NTH25C operation, ”protocol error” is set to 1 (ON).
- If host control changes the state of the backlight or sends an illegal command to
NTH25/NTH25C, a command for notifying the change in state of the PT status
notify bit (PT memory address 0900) is returned from the NTH25/NTH25C in
addition to the response (ACK or NAK) to the sent command.
If issue of an illegal command causes the PT status notify bit to be notified from
the NTH25/NTH25C, and a normal command is issued after this notification, the
command for notifying the ”protocol error” 0 (OFF) state is issued by
NTH25/NTH25C.
234
Section 5-3
Data Structure According to Display Element and Function
Clock data (PT to host)
Addresses 0903 to 0905
The NTH25/NTH25C’s internal clock data is written to these addresses.
Elements and address
Clock data corresponds to PT memory addresses 0903 to 0905 as follows:
Month, day: 0903
Hour, minute: 0904
Year: 0905
Data contents
This data comprises three words.
The following shows the structure of the data to be read:
Clock data
Data
Range
Month
01 to 12 (two BCD digits)
Day
01 to 31 (two BCD digits)
Hour
00 to 23 (two BCD digits, 24--hour system clock)
Minute
00 to 59 (two BCD digits)
Year
1980 to 2079 (four BCD digits)
M1 M2 Month D1 D2 Day
M2
M1
D2
h1 h2 Hour m1 m2Minute
D1
h2
h1
m2
Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Year
m1
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Read data
1st word
2nd word
3rd word
0000 Hex is written to addresses 0903 to 0905 until execution of clock data output
after start of NTH25/NTH25 operation.
Explanation
- NTH25/NTH25C’s internal clock data is written at 1--minute intervals for the
duration that ”clock data output” (bit 5) of the PT status control bit at PT memory
address 1001 is 1 (ON).
The clock data is not output when ”clock data output” of the PT status control bit
is 0 (OFF). In this case, the previous value is held as the contents of the PT
memory address.
- To batch read all clock data, specify 0903 as the ”address” and 0003 as the read
data, and execute the read command.
- Individual clock data can be read by independently reading PT memory addresses 0903 to 0905.
- Normal operation of NTH25/NTH25C can be confirmed by periodically reading
the clock data.
235
Section 5-3
Data Structure According to Display Element and Function
Display screen number (sent between PT and host)
Address 1000
The meaning of this data varies according to which of the NTH25/NTH25C or host
the screen number is written from.
When the screen is switched by operation on the NTH25/NTH25C, the new screen
number is written from the NTH25/NTH25C.
When the screen number is written from the host, the specified screen is displayed
on the NTH25/NTH25C.
Elements and address
Only PT memory address 1000 is used.
Data contents
This data comprises one word.
The screen number (0000 to 1000, four BCD digits) are stored as follows:
Screen number
(four BCD digits)
X4 X3 X2 X1
X4
X3
X2
X1
Read data/write data
Screen number 0000 Hex indicates ”no display”. Note, however, that there is also
no display on the NTH25/NTH25C when a screen number to which no screen data
is registered is specified.
236
Section 5-3
Data Structure According to Display Element and Function
PT status control bit (host to PT)
Address 1001
This data controls the state of the NTH25/NTH25C’s backlight (turns it ON or
OFF), and outputs the NTH25/NTH25C’s internal clock data.
Elements and address
Only PT memory address 1001 is used.
Data contents
This data comprises one word.
The following shows the function of each bit.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PT status control bit value
(4 hexadecimal digits)
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
X3
X2
Bit
5
0
X4 X3 X2 X1
X4
0
Control content
Clock data output
Backlight mode
1 (ON)
Yes
ON
0 (OFF)
No
OFF
X1
Write data
Explanation
- When the state of the backlight changes, the contents of PT status notify bit PT
memory address 0900 also changes.
”Backlight mode” (bit 0) is enabled only when ”Configuration” -- ”Auto CFL off” is
set to 0 by the NTH Screen Data Converter. If ”Auto CFL off” is set to a value
within the range 1 to 99, the backlight cannot be controlled even by changing
”backlight mode”.
- Clock data is written at 1--minute intervals to clock data output PT memory addresses 0903 to 0905 for the duration that clock data output is 1 (ON).
237
Section 5-3
Data Structure According to Display Element and Function
Bit memory table (host to PT)
Addresses 2000 to 2014
The date when bit memory tables were changed and messages currently set to bit
memory tables can be displayed in alarm list/history elements on the
NTH25/NTH25C by writing 1 (ON) to the bit memory table from the host. (On the
NTH25/NTH25C, bit memory tables are used only by the alarm list/history function.)
Elements and address
Bit memory tables 0 to 239 correspond to each of the bits of PT memory 2000 to
2014 as shown in the figure below. (The allocated bits set to bit memory tables on
the Support Tool are invalid.)
PT memory 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
2000
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
2001
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
2013
223 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 209 208
2014
239 238 237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 229 228 227 226 225 224
Bit
(Numbers in frames are bit memory table numbers.)
Data contents
Each of the PT memory addresses comprises one word.
Specify the data to write as follows in blocks of 16 bit memory tables.
16 bits (1 word) of bit memory
table data (4 hexadecimal digits)
X4
X4 X3 X2 X1
X3
X2
X1
1 word of write data
Data is 0000 Hex until the first write operation is performed after start of
NTH25/NTH25C operation.
Explanation
- Data can be batch--written to continuous multiple PT memory addresses. To do
this, specify the first PT memory address at ”address” and then specify the data
of the number of words to be written at ”write data”.
238
Section 5-3
Data Structure According to Display Element and Function
Numeral display (host to PT)
Addresses 3001 to 3120
This data specifies the display value on numeral display elements.
Elements and address
Numeral memory tables 0 to 119 currently set to numeral display elements correspond to PT memory addresses 3001 to 3120. (With memory link on
NTH25/NTH25C, up to 120 numeral display elements can be registered in the entire screen data file.)
Data contents
This data comprises two words.
Specify the data to write as follows.
Numerical value
to write (8 digits)
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X4
X3
X2
X1
X8
X7
X6
X5
Write data
1st word
2nd word
Write display numerals in BCD when the ”numeral storage type” currently set to
the numeral memory table is set to ”BCD” and in hexadecimal when the ”numeral
storage type” is set to ”binary”.
00000000 Hex is written until the first numeral is input to the relevant numeral
memory table after start of NTH25/NTH25C operation.
Explanation
- The number of words to be actually used for numeral display is determined by
the number of display digits (number of digits in integer section + number of digits past the decimal point) on the numeral display element as follows:
Number of display digits
4 digits: 1 word
Number of display digits > 4 digits: 2 words
If only one word is to be used for display, only the 1st word (lower four digits) are
enabled. (The 2nd word is ignored.)
- PT memory for numeral display is separated from PT memory for numeral input
and graph display. So, PT memory for numeral display is not affected if the same
numeral memory table number is used on a numeral input element or graph element.
239
Section 5-3
Data Structure According to Display Element and Function
Image/library lamp (host to PT)
Addresses 4001 to 4200
This data controls (turns ON and OFF) image/library lamps. (The image/library
corresponding to the state (ON or OFF) is displayed on image/library lamps.)
Elements and address
Screen numbers 1 to 200 correspond to PT memory addresses 4001 to 4200.
(Image/library lamps can be used only in screens with screen numbers 1 to 200.)
Data contents
This data comprises four words (64 bits).
Four words (64 bits) of data (4 hexadecimal digits x four words) corresponds to
image/library lamps as shown in the figure below. (Up to 64 image/library lamps
can be used in a single screen.) The image/library lamp numbers in the figure below are automatically allocated from 1 according to the image/library lamp display
order.
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Hexadecimal representation
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1st word
2nd word
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3rd word
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
X24 X23 X22 X21
X34 X33 X32 X31
4th word
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
X44 X43 X42 X41
X14 X13 X12 X11
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
(Numbers in frames are image/library lamp numbers.)
X14
X13
X12
X11
X24
X23
X22
X21
Write data
1st word
X34
2nd word
X33
X32
3rd word
X31
X44
X43
X42
X41
4th word
Explanation
- The image/library lamp number is automatically allocated from 1 according to
the display order. Though this order is normally the same as the order in which
image/library lamps are created on the Support Tool, the order can be changed
on the Support Tool.
- To use image/library lamps, you must set a lamp bit (00000 to 000315) that corresponds to a lamp number when you create screen data on the Support Tool.
(See page 143.) The lamp will not function as a lamp if an incorrect lamp number
is set.
- Image/library lamps PT memory is provided for each screen. Image/library
lamps can also be turned ON and OFF the moment they are displayed by writing
this information before displaying the screen.
240
Section 5-3
Data Structure According to Display Element and Function
Bar graph (host to PT)
Addresses 7001 to 7030
This data specifies the numeral to be displayed on bar graphs.
Elements and address
The order 1 to 30, when numeral memory table numbers currently set to bar
graphs are counted from the smallest number upwards, corresponds to PT
memory addresses 7001 to 7030. (With memory link on NTH25/NTH25C, up to 30
bar graphs can be registered to a single screen.)
Data contents
This data comprises one word.
Specify the data to write as follows:
Numerical value to write (4 digits)
X4
X4 X3 X2 X1
X3
X2
X1
Write data
Write bar graphs in BCD when the ”numeral storage type” currently set to the numeral memory table is set to ”BCD” and in hexadecimal when the ”numeral storage
type” is set to ”binary”.
0000 Hex is written until the first numeral is input to the relevant numeral memory
table after start of NTH25/NTH25C operation.
Explanation
- PT memory for bar graph display is separated from PT memory for numeral input, numeral display and trend graph display. So, PT memory for bar graph display is not affected if the same numeral memory table number is used on a numeral input, numeral display and trend graph display element.
241
Section 5-3
Data Structure According to Display Element and Function
Trend graph (host to PT)
Addresses 8001 to 8040
This data specifies the numeral to be displayed on trend graphs.
Elements and address
The order 0 to 39, when trend graph lines are counted from the smallest screen
number upwards, corresponds to PT memory addresses 8001 to 8040. (With
memory link on NTH25/NTH25C, up to 40 lines displayed in trend graphs can be
registered in the entire screen data file.) When the lines of two or more trend
graphs are currently registered to a single screen, the order number is allocated
according to the display order. Though this order is normally the same as the order
in which trend graphs are created on the Support Tool, the order can be changed
on the Support Tool.
Data contents
This data comprises one word.
Specify the data to write as follows:
Numerical value to write (4 digits)
X4
X4 X3 X2 X1
X3
X2
X1
Write data
Write trend graphs in BCD when the ”numeral storage type” in the numeral
memory table currently set to trend graph lines is set to ”BCD” and in hexadecimal
when the ”numeral storage type” is set to ”binary”.
0000 Hex is written until the first numeral is input to the relevant numeral memory
table after start of NTH25/NTH25C operation.
Explanation
- With memory link on NTH25/NTH25C, the PT memory corresponding to the
lines currently registered to the trend graph frame are read according to the sampling interval currently set to the trend graph frame.
- Numerals that are read from PT memory are registered to NTH25/NTH25C
memory by the data logging function.
- Clearing of past records and reading (sampling) of trend graph PT memory can
be controlled by writing to PT memory addresses 8103 and 8104 (clear trend
graph records) or PT memory addresses 8107 and 8108 (sampling stop/continue). (See pages 243 and 244.)
- PT memory for trend graph display is separated from PT memory for numeral
input, numeral display and bar graph display. So, PT memory for trend graph
display is not affected if the same numeral memory table number is used on a
numeral input, numeral display and bar graph display element.
242
Section 5-3
Data Structure According to Display Element and Function
Clear trend graph record (host to PT)
Addresses 8103, 8104
These data clear the display numerals of past trend graphs recorded using the
data logging function. Records can be cleared by individual trend graph frame.
Elements and address
Trend graph numbers 1 to 16 correspond to PT memory address 8103, and numbers 17 to 20 to address 8104. (For details, see ”Data contents” below)
Data contents
These data each comprise one word (16 bits).
The data (4 hexadecimal digits) of each word (16 bits) in each PT memory address
corresponds to the trend graph frame as shown in the figure below. (Only one trend
graph frame can be registered to a single screen, and in all up to 20 trend graph
frames can be used in the entire screen data file.)
The trend graph numbers shown below are automatically allocated from trend
graph 1 in order from the smallest screen number for screens having a trend
graph.
Bit
PT memory 8103
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8104
20 19 18 17
Hexadecimal representation
X14 X13 X12 X11
0
0
0
X21
(Numbers in frames are trend graph numbers. ”--” indicates that the number is unused (always ”0”).)
Write data to PT
memory address 8103
Write data to PT
memory address 8104
X14
X13
X12
X11
X21
0
0
0
30
30
30
The records in trend graph frames are cleared as follows according to the state of
the corresponding bit:
When the bit state changes from ”0” (OFF) to ”1” (ON):
Other bit states:
Record is cleared.
Record is not cleared.
Explanation
- Trend graph numbers are automatically allocated from 1 in order from the smallest screen number for screens having a trend graph.
- Clearing of trend graph records is executed when the bit corresponding to the
trend graph number changes state from 0 (OFF) to 1 (ON). To execute another
clear after records have been cleared, return the bit state to 0 (OFF) and then set
it to 1 (ON). Note, however, that the response to the first clear record command
must be acknowledged before the second clear record command is executed.
- Batch writing to PT memory addresses 8103 and 8104 is also possible. To do
this, specify 8103 as the ”address”, and specify two words of data to ”write data”
in the order ”write data to PT memory address 8103” and then ”write data to PT
memory address 8104”.
243
Section 5-3
Data Structure According to Display Element and Function
Trend graph sampling stop/continue (host to PT) Addresses 8107, 8108
These data control (stop/continue) sampling (reading) of data (PT memory addresses 8001 to 8020) for trend graphs. Sampling can be controlled by individual
trend graph frame.
Elements and address
Trend graph numbers 1 to 16 correspond to PT memory address 8107, and numbers 17 to 20 to address 8108. (For details, see ”Data contents” below)
Data contents
These data each comprise one word (16 bits).
The data (4 hexadecimal digits) of each word (16 words) in each PT memory address corresponds to the trend graph frame as shown in the figure below. (Only
one trend graph frame can be registered to a single screen, and in all up to 20 trend
graph frames can be used in the entire screen data file.)
The trend graph numbers shown below are automatically allocated from trend
graph 1 in order from the smallest screen number for screens having a trend
graph.
Bit
PT memory 8107
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8108
20 19 18 17
Hexadecimal representation
X14 X13 X12 X11
0
0
0
X21
(Numbers in frames are trend graph numbers. ”--” indicates that the number is unused (always ”0”).)
Write data to PT
memory address 8107
Write data to PT
memory address 8108
X14
X13
X12
X11
X21
0
0
0
30
30
30
Data for trend graphs is sampled as follows according to the state of the corresponding bit:
When bit is ”0”: Sampling is executed (continued).
When bit is ”1”: Sampling is not executed (stopped).
Explanation
- Trend graph numbers are automatically allocated from 1 in order from the smallest screen number for screens having a trend graph.
- Trend graph display no longer changes state while sampling of trend graphs is
stopped. (The data logging function also stops while sampling is stopped.)
- Batch writing to PT memory addresses 8107 and 8108 is also possible. To do
this, specify 8107 as the ”address”, and specify two words of data to ”write data”
in the order ”write data to PT memory address 8103” and then ”write data to PT
memory address 8108”.
244
Section 5-3
Data Structure According to Display Element and Function
Character string display (host to PT)
Addresses 9001 to 9050
This data specifies display character strings on character string display elements
and their display method.
Elements and address
Character string memory tables 0 to 49 currently set to character string display
elements correspond to PT memory addresses 9001 to 9050. (With memory link
on NTH25/NTH25C, up to 50 character string display elements can be registered
in the entire screen data file.)
Data contents
This data comprises 21 words.
Specify the data to write as follows. (The first word specifies the display method.)
C1 C2
1 x 2 (High)
1 Hex: Equal
2 Hex: 1 x 2
4 Hex: 2 x 2
8 Hex: 2 x 4
2 x 1 (Wide)
1 Hex: Equal
2 Hex: 2 x 1
4 Hex: 2 x 2
8 Hex: 4 x 2
A
A
Write data
Display mode
01 Hex: Standard
L1a L1b L2a L2b
02 Hex: Inverse
03 Hex: Flash
04 Hex: Inverse Flash
A
30
A
L1a
L1b
L2a
C39 C40
Character string to write
(max. 40 characters)
L39a L39b L40a L40b
Character code
(Two hexadecimal
digits)
L2b
2nd word
1st word
L39a
L39b
L40a
L40b
21st word
The effective size of actual characters on the NTH25/NTH25C is as follows:
Equal, 1 x 2 (High), 2 x 1 (Wide), 2 x 2, 4 x 4, 8 x 8
0000 Hex is written until the first character string is written to the relevant character
string memory table after start of NTH25/NTH25C operation.
Explanation
- All 21 words need not necessarily be specified as the write data. Only the first
word is written to change only the attribute of the data, for example. In this case,
the NTH25/NTH25C executes processing when the CR code (0D Hex) indicating the end of the write command is received.
245
Data Structure According to Display Element and Function
Section 5-3
- When 0000 Hex is written to one word of data as a character string, the
NTH25/NTH25C treats this as the end of the character string, and ignores subsequent data. Note, however, that the display is not cleared when the character
string display is updated on the NTH25/NTH25C. So, the previously displayed
character string may still be remaining on screen behind the data. If the number
of display characters is not fixed, fill the remaining area with standard spaces (20
Hex), and write 0000 Hex last of all to indicate the end of the character string.
- The origin from where the character is extended is the top left corner coordinate
of the character string.
- If a newly specified character string extends out of the right of the
NTH25/NTH25C’s screen, it will be carriage--fed at that point, and displayed
from the left edge of the next line (position lowered by the height of the character).
If the character string extends out of the bottom of the screen, it will be displayed
from the top left corner of the screen.
246
Section 5-3
Data Structure According to Display Element and Function
Standard lamp (host to PT)
Addresses A001 to A050
This data controls (turns ON and OFF) standard lamps.
Elements and address
With standard lamps, addresses A001 to A050 are shared with screen numbers 1
to 1000 as follows:
Address
Screen number
A001
1
51
101
951
A002
2
52
102
952
A003
3
53
103
953
A050
50
100
150
1000
Data contents
This data comprises four words (64 bits).
Four words (64 bits) of data (4 hexadecimal digits x four words) corresponds to
standard lamps as shown in the figure below. (Up to 64 image/library lamps can be
used in a single screen.) The standard lamp numbers in the figure below are automatically allocated from 1 according to the standard lamp display order.
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Hexadecimal representation
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1st word
2nd word
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3rd word
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
X24 X23 X22 X21
X34 X33 X32 X31
4th word
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
X44 X43 X42 X41
X14 X13 X12 X11
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
(Numbers in frames are standard lamp numbers.)
X14
X13
X12
X11
X24
X23
X22
X21
Write data
1st word
X34
2nd word
X33
X32
3rd word
X31
X44
X43
X42
X41
4th word
247
Data Structure According to Display Element and Function
Section 5-3
Explanation
- The standard lamp number is automatically allocated from 1 according to the
display order. Though this order is normally the same as the order in which standard lamps are created on the Support Tool, the order can be changed on the
Support Tool.
- 50 screens’ worth of standard lamp PT memory is provided. Standard lamps can
also be turned ON and OFF the moment they are displayed by writing this information before displaying the screen.
- To use standard lamps, you must set a lamp bit (00000 to 000315) that corresponds to a lamp number when you create screen data on the Support Tool.
(See page 143.) The lamp will not function as a lamp if an incorrect lamp number
is set.
248
SECTION 6
NTH Screen Data Converter
This section describes the functions of NTH Screen Data Converter and how to use these functions.
6-1
6-2
6-3
Outline of NTH Screen Data Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-1 What is NTH Screen Data Converter? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-2 Functions of NTH Screen Data Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up NTH Screen Data Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-1 Equipment Needed To Use NTH Screen Data Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-2 How to Install NTH Screen Data Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating NTH Screen Data Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-1 Starting Up and Exiting NTH Screen Data Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-3 Function key settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-4 Window control area setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-5 Trend graph control area settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-6 Transmitting Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
250
250
251
252
252
253
259
259
260
265
269
271
273
249
Section 6-1
Outline of NTH Screen Data Converter
6-1
6-1-1
Outline of NTH Screen Data Converter
What is NTH Screen Data Converter?
The NTH25/NTH25C cannot be selected on the Support Tool as PT models. To
specify the screen data for use on the NTH25/NTH25C, you must specify the PT
model as follows:
NTH25: PT model ”NT31”
NTH25C: PT model ”NT31C”
However, the functions and data sizes of the NT31/NT31C differ from those of the
NTH25/NTH25C. So, the screen data created on the Support Tool for use on the
NT31/NT31C must be converted to screen data for use on the NTH25/NTH25C by
NTH Screen Data Converter before it is sent to the NTH25/NTH25C.
On NTH Screen Data Converter, you can make settings specific to the
NTH25/NTH25C.
Personal Computer
Support
Tool
NTH Screen
Data Converter
NTH25/NTH25C
Conversion/
transmission
Create/save
screen data
(mmi format).
Read/set up
screen data.
Screen data file
(for NT31/NT31C)
Reference
- NTH Screen Data Converter can be executed independently of the Support
Tool. So, it need not be installed on the same personal computer as the Support
Tool. In this case, however, move the screen data file saved in mmi format to the
personal computer running NTH Screen Data Converter so that the data can be
read by NTH Screen Data Converter.
- The screen data currently registered on the NTH25/NTH25C cannot be read by
NTH Screen Data Converter and the Support Tool.
250
Outline of NTH Screen Data Converter
6-1-2
Section 6-1
Functions of NTH Screen Data Converter
NTH Screen Data Converter has the following functions:
! Reading of screen data files
The screen data file for use on the NT31/NT31C that was created using NT Series Support Tool for Windows95/98 (Ver.3.0) is read.
Note, however, that only mmi format files can be read. The screen data to be
read by NTH Screen Data Converter and transferred to NTH25/NTH25C must
be saved in the mmi format.
Screen data containing functions that are not supported on the NTH25/NTH25C
sometimes cannot be read.
! Settings for the NTH25/NTH25C
The following items are set as NTH25/NTH25C--specific settings:
[Configuration]
Backlight auto OFF time
Communications method (host link/NT link (1:1)/memory link (NTH protocol))
Communications conditions with the host
Host PC type
[Function key setting]
Set the notification method of function switches and allocated bits and words for
function switches.
[Window control area setting]
Set the word to be used for manipulating window functions.
[Trend graph control area setting]
Set the area for controlling (sampling stop/continue, clear records) trend graphs.
! Screen data conversion
The screen data created on the Support Tool for use on the NT31/NT31C is converted for use on the NTH25/NTH25C.
During conversion, functions that are not supported on the NTH25/NTH25C,
out--of--range bit and word settings, and elements exceeding the maximum permissible number of elements are invalid and deleted from the screen data file.
Reference
When invalid settings or elements are deleted, messages and error logs are not
displayed on NTH Screen Data Converter. When creating screens for the
NTH25/NTH25C, observe restrictions such as the maximum permissible number
of elements, and check these elements on the NTH25/NTH25C screen after sending them to the NTH25/NTH25C.
251
Setting Up NTH Screen Data Converter
Section 6-2
! Sending (writing) screen data to the NTH25/NTH25C
After the settings are made for the NTH25/NTH25C and screen data is converted for use on the NTH25/NTH25C, the screen data is sent to the
NTH25/NTH25C.
The NTH25/NTH25C must be set to the screen send mode before the screen
data is sent to the NTH25/NTH25C.
For details on how to enter the screen send mode, see Section 3--4 ”Transmitting
the Screen Data” on page 65.
6-2
6-2-1
Setting Up NTH Screen Data Converter
Equipment Needed To Use NTH Screen Data Converter
Prepare the following equipment to use NTH Screen Data Converter:
Hardware
! Recommended CPU
Pentium 100 MHz or faster
! Personal computer
Use an IBM personal computer or 100% compatible machine capable of running
Microsoft Windows95 or Microsoft Windows98.
An RS--232C port capable of communications at a baud rate of 19,200 bps or
higher must be allocated to one of ports COM1 to COM4 to send screen data to
the NTH25/NTH25C.
! RAM
At least 16 MB
! Free area in hard disk
At least 5 MB
! CD ROM drive
At least one drive is required to install NTH Screen Data Converter.
! Display
VGA compatible display
! Mouse
Serial mouse or bus mouse
Operating system
! Microsoft Windows95 or Microsoft Windows98
Windows3.1, WindowsNT and WindowsNT4.0 are not supported.
252
Section 6-2
Setting Up NTH Screen Data Converter
6-2-2
How to Install NTH Screen Data Converter
Install NTH Screen Data Converter on the hard disk.
To install NTH Screen Data Converter, execute the installation program provided
with the NTH25/NTH25C.
Reference
When you specify ”Custom” as the setup method, you can select the required
items to install from the following files:
-- Program Files (NTH Screen Data Converter application)
-- Ddata Files (PC information files)
Data cannot be converted successfully without ”Ddata Files”. Normally, be sure to
install all of these files.
Basic installation operation
The following buttons are displayed during installation:
:
Clicking on this button confirms the settings in the currently displayed window and
displays the next window.
:
Clicking on this button cancels the settings in the currently displayed window and
displays the previous window.
:
Clicking on this button closes the currently displayed window. The status currently
set in the window is canceled.
If you click this button in the installation window, you can cancel installation. In this
case, a cancel confirmation message appears on screen.
:
Clicking on this button displays the actual folder configuration as a tree. In this display, you can select the folder to install NTH Screen Data Converter to.
253
Section 6-2
Setting Up NTH Screen Data Converter
Procedure
(1) Start up Windows95 or Windows98. (In this example, the OS is Windows98.)
(2) Put NTH Screen Data Converter CD--ROM in the CD--ROM drive (in this example, drive D:). The setup program automatically starts. Proceed to step 6.
If the setup program does not start automatically, follow steps 3 to 5 to execute the setup program.
Reference
You can execute the setup program by double--clicking ”Setup.exe” in the ”English” folder in NTH Screen Data Converter CD--ROM by displaying the ”Explorer”
of Windows95 or Windows98. In this case, you can skip steps 3, 4, and 5.
(3) Click on the Windows Start button and select ”Run...”.
(4) Enter ”D: \ENGLISH\SETUP” in the input field in the displayed window. (This
entry is not case--sensitive, you can enter either lower--case or upper--case
characters.)
Note that the drive destination must agree with the name of the drive where
you put the CD--ROM. If you put the CD--ROM in drive E:, input ”E: \ENGLISH\SETUP”.
(5) Click on
.
This starts installation of NTH Screen Data Converter.
(6) When the setup (Welcome) screen of NTH Screen Data Converter is displayed, click on
.
The screen for entering the user information (name and company name) appears.
254
Setting Up NTH Screen Data Converter
Section 6-2
(7) Enter your name and company name.
The default name and company name are those currently registered to your
personal computer.
After you have finished setting the user information, click on
.
The screen for specifying the setup method and installation directory appears.
(8) Choose the setup method (Typical/compact/custom) and the installation directory.
The following is the default directory:
C:\Program Files\Omron\NTHConverter\
To change the installation directory, click
, and specify the required
drive and directory. (If you specify a directory that does not exist on the hard
disk, the directory is automatically made under the name you specified.)
After you have finished setting the drive and directory, click on
.
If you chose ”Custom” as the setup method, a screen for selecting the program and data (components) to install appears.
If you chose ”Typical” or ”Compact” as the setup method, a screen for specifying the registration destination (program folder) for the Start menu appears
immediately. Proceed to step 10. (The installation procedure is the same for
both the ”Typical” and ”Compact” setup methods; all items are installed.)
255
Section 6-2
Setting Up NTH Screen Data Converter
(9) Click on the check box, displayed to the left of the program to be selected.
This prefixes the program with the check mark.
After you have finished selecting the program, click on
.
The screen for specifying the registration destination (program folder) for start
menu appears.
Reference
Data cannot be converted successfully without ”Ddata Files”. Normally, install all
of these files.
(10) In the Windows Start menu, specify the folder (program folder) where the
short--cut to NTH Screen Data Converter is created.
The default short--cut is as follows:
Start\Program\Omron\NTH Converter
If you want to change the folder, select the desired folder from the ”Existing
Folders” or directly enter the folder name. (If you specify a folder that does not
exist on the hard disk, the folder is automatically made under the name you
specified.)
After specifying the folder, click on
.
A screen for confirming the installation method appears.
256
Section 6-2
Setting Up NTH Screen Data Converter
(11) Scroll the contents of ”Current settings” and confirm the installation method
and contents to be installed.
After you have finished checking, click on
.
This executes the installation and starts copying of the files to the specified
directory.
During the installation, a progress bar is displayed to indicate how far installation has progressed.
(12) When installation ends, the folder specified in step 10 is displayed, and the
following window appears.
Click on
. This completes installation of NTH Screen Data Con-
verter.
257
Setting Up NTH Screen Data Converter
Section 6-2
Uninstall
The Uninstaller (uninstall software) is not provided with NTH Screen Data Converter.
If NTH Screen Data Converter is no longer required, follow the procedure below to
delete NTH Screen Data Converter files and installation information. (If the same
folder as NTH Screen Data Converter contains other files in addition to those that
were copied when NTH Screen Data Converter was installed, these files will not be
deleted and remain in the folder after NTH Screen Data Converter is uninstalled.)
(1) Select the Windows [Start] button and then select [Settings] -- [Control Panel].
The Control Panel window appears.
(2) Double--click [Add/Remove Programs].
(3) Select ”NTHConverter” from the list of applications currently displayed in the
[Setup and Delete] page, and click [Add/Remove].
The confirmation message for removing the files appears.
(4) Click [Yes].
From here on, follow the on--screen instructions.
258
Section 6-3
Operating NTH Screen Data Converter
6-3
6-3-1
Operating NTH Screen Data Converter
Starting Up and Exiting NTH Screen Data Converter
Starting up NTH Screen Data Converter
To start up NTH Screen Data Converter, click the Windows Start button, and select
”Programs”, ”Omron”, ”NTH Converter” and then ”NTHConverter”.
This starts up NTH Screen Data Converter, and the window for specifying the
screen data file (mmi format file created on the Support Tool for use on the
NT31/NT31C) to be converted for use on the NTH25/NTH25C appears.
Specify the screen data file and click
Reference
. The main window appears.
If you attempt to read an illegal screen data file, the message ”Selected file cannot
be converted” is displayed. Click
. The display returns to the window for
specifying the screen data file. Examples of illegal screen data files are files with
the .mmi extension but containing data that was not created on the Support Tool,
or files to which elements having functions not supported on the NTH25/NTH25C
are registered.
259
Section 6-3
Operating NTH Screen Data Converter
Exiting NTH Screen Data Converter
Any of the following operations exits NTH Screen Data Converter:
-- Clicking
-- Clicking the
on the main window
button at the top right of the main window
-- Double--clicking the NTH Screen Data Converter icon at the top left of the main
window
-- Clicking the NTH Screen Data Converter icon at the top left of the main window
and selecting [Close] in the control menu box that is displayed
-- Simultaneously holding down the Alt key and F4 key.
When NTH Screen Data Converter is exited, the display returns to the Windows
screen.
6-3-2
Configuration
Click
in the main window. The [Configuration] screen appears.
This screen comprises the following three pages, and is used for setting the PT
model, communications methods, communications conditions and host PC type:
-- [Initialize] page
-- [Communication] page
-- [PLC Setting] page
260
Section 6-3
Operating NTH Screen Data Converter
[Initialize] page
This page is for setting the basic operation of the NTH25/NTH25C.
Item
Function
Screen setting
Model
The PT model is displayed according to the contents of the read
screen data file.
NT31 screen data: NTH25 black--and--white
NT31C screen data: NTH25C color
Screen size
The screen size of the PT model is displayed.
(fixed to 320 x 240 dots)
Mode
The color mode of the PT model is displayed.
NTH25: black--and--white
NTH25C: color (8)
Initial screen
No.
The number of the ”initial screen” that is set when you created the
screen data on the Support Tool is displayed.
Auto CFL off
Set the time that the NTH25/NTH25C’s backlight automatically
turns OFF in minutes.
0:
The backlight does not automatically turn OFF. (Operation
follows the PT status control bit on the host.)
1 to 99: Time (1 to 99 minutes) until the backlight automatically
turns OFF. (The PT status control bit is invalid.)
Communication Method
Comm.
Method
Set one of the following communications methods to be used for
communications with the host.
Host link, memory link, NT link
261
Operating NTH Screen Data Converter
Section 6-3
! About the Backlight Auto OFF Function (Auto CFL off function)
The NTH25/NTH25C is provided with the backlight auto OFF function. This
function automatically turns the NTH25/NTH25C’s backlight OFF when it is not
operated for a fixed period of time.
Using this function allows you to extend the backlight’s service life.
To enable use of the auto backlight OFF function, set ”Auto CFL off” to a value
within the range 1 to 99 (number of minutes until the backlight automatically
turns OFF). At this setting, the PT status control bit ”backlight mode” (bit 0) is
disabled.
To disable use of the auto backlight OFF function, set ”Auto CFL off” to 0. At this
setting, the PT status control bit ”backlight mode” (bit 0) is enabled.
When the backlight auto OFF function is activated and the backlight is turned OFF,
the backlight can be turned ON again by one of the following operations:
-- Pressing a function switch
-- Touching the touch panel
-- Screen switching from the host
If you press a touch switch while the backlight is OFF as a result of activation of the
backlight auto OFF function, only relighting of the backlight will be executed; the
function of the switch (e.g. notification to host or screen switching) is not executed.
(When a function switch is pressed, notification of the function switch’s state is
also executed.)
Reference
- If the backlight is turned OFF by manipulating the PT status control bit with
”Auto CFL off” set to 0, the backlight can be turned back ON only by changing
the PT status control bit ”backlight mode” (bit 0) state to 1 (ON). (It cannot be
turned back ON by the methods described in the previous paragraph when the
backlight auto OFF function is activated.)
- In its default state, the contents of each of the areas on the PC are 0. So, the PT
status control bit ”backlight mode” (bit 0) also is 0 (OFF). When the
NTH25/NTH25C is connected with ”Auto CFL off” set to 0, the backlight will remain OFF.
[Communication] page
This page is for setting the communications conditions with the host.
For details on setting the communications conditions on the host, see ”2--5 ”Connecting to the Host”.
Reference
- The communications conditions on NTH Screen Data Converter must be set to
the same settings as on the host.
- When ”Comm. Method” in the [Configuration] page is set to [NT Link], the communications conditions cannot be set.
When ”Comm. Method” is set to [Host Link], be sure to set the following communications conditions:
Stop bit: 2
Data length: 7
Parity: even
262
Section 6-3
Operating NTH Screen Data Converter
Item
Function
RS232C settings
Baud rate
Set one of the following as the baud rate:
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps
Stop bit
Set either of the following as the stop bit:
1, 2
Data length
Set either of the following as the data length:
7, 8
Parity
Set one of the following as the parity setting and type:
Even, odd, none
[PLC Setting] page
This page is for setting the PC type (host) to be connected to the NTH25/NTH25C.
Reference
When ”Comm. Method” in the [Configuration] page is set to [Memory Link], the PC
type cannot be set.
263
Section 6-3
Operating NTH Screen Data Converter
Item
Function
PLC Mode Setting
PLC Model
Set one of the following as the PC type to be connected to
the NTH25/NTH25C:
OMRON SYSMAC--C (C series PC, SRM1)
OMRON SYSMAC--CV/CS1 (CVM1/CV/CS1 series PC)
PT control setting area
264
PT Control Area
The allocated word (first word number) in the ”PT status
control area” that was set when screen data was created
on the Support Tool is displayed.
PT Notify Area
The allocated word (first word number) in the ”PT status
notify area” that was set when screen data was created on
the Support Tool is displayed.
Bit Memory Table
The allocated word (first word number) in bit memory table
number 0 that was set when screen data was created on
the Support Tool is displayed.
Section 6-3
Operating NTH Screen Data Converter
6-3-3
Function key settings
Click
in the main window. The [Function Key Setting] screen is
displayed.
In this screen, set the action of the function switches.
265
Section 6-3
Operating NTH Screen Data Converter
Host link, NT link (1:1)
Set the following items to each of the function switches.
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
Item
Function
(1)
Set the bit by which pressing of the function switch is notified. (This can be
used simultaneously with word notification in (2).)
For details on settable areas, see ”Allocated bits” below.
To disable bit notification, enter ”*”.
(2)
Set the word by which pressing of the function switch is notified. (This can
be used simultaneously with bit notification in (1).)
For details on settable areas, see ”Allocated words” below.
To disable word notification, enter ”*”.
(3)
Set one of the following as the notification action in bit notification:
Momentary: While pressed
1 (ON)
While not pressed
0 (OFF)
Alternate: Each press toggles the bit state between 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON).
(4)
Set the value that is written to the word when a function switch is pressed in
word notification. (Releasing the function switch will not result in any
change.)
0000 to FFFE Hex
Allocated bits
The areas in the following table can be specified as the notify bit for function
switches:
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocation
CVM1/CV
Series PCs
DM
Data memory
Data memory
CH
I/O relay
I/O relay
TIM
Timer present
value
Timer present
value
CNT
Counter present
value
Counter present
value
HR
Holding relay
AR
Auxiliary relay
LR
Link relay
Allocation
How To
Specify Bits
1212
HR0101
Special auxiliary
relay
LR1215
: OK
: NG
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. For details, see
Appendix H ”PC Memory Map”, page 321.
266
Section 6-3
Operating NTH Screen Data Converter
[How to Specify Areas]
-- I/O relay
Enter only two word number digits and two bit number digits.
-- Other areas
Enter the characters (HR, LR) indicating the area followed by two word number
digits and two bit number digits.
! Allocated words
The areas in the following table can be specified as the notify word for function
switches. The allocated word for function switches is fixed to one word.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocation
CVM1/CV
Series PCs
Allocation
How To
Specify Bits
DM
Data memory
Data memory
DM0123
CH
I/O relay
I/O relay
TIM
Timer present
value
Timer present
value
TIM055
CNT
Counter present
value
Counter present
value
CNT032
HR
Holding relay
AR
Auxiliary relay
LR
Link relay
1
Special auxiliary
relay
: OK
: NG
The range of memory area differs according to the PC type. For details, see Appendix H ”PC Memory Map”, page 321.
[How to Specify Areas]
-- I/O relay
Enter only four word number digits.
-- Other areas
Enter the characters (DM, TIM, CNT) indicating the area followed by the word
number. For the DM area, enter a 4--digit word number. For the TIM or CNT areas,
enter a 3--digit word number.
267
Section 6-3
Operating NTH Screen Data Converter
Memory link
(1)
(2)
When the memory link is used, the area to be used is already determined (PT
memory). So, bits and words need not be allocated.
! Response to the host % PT read command
When a function switch is pressed, one word of data indicating the switch is written to PT memory (address 0000 Hex). (Four words are held in the
NT25/NTH25C’s internal buffer.)
When the PT memory (address 0000 Hex) is read from the host, the data which
is currently written to PT memory is returned to the host. For details, see Section
5 ”Using Memory Link (NTH Protocol).”
Set the following items to each of the function switches:
Item
Function
(1)
Set one of the following as the action of the function switch when it is
pressed:
OFF: Nothing is executed.
SW: The position code is written to PT memory. (See page 269.)
Specified value: The specified value in (2) below is written to PT memory.
(2)
Set the value to be written to PT memory when (1) above is set to ”Specified value”.
0000 to FFFE Hex
FFFF Hex is written when a touch switch or function switch is not pressed or
when all of the information of a pressed switch is being read from the host.
! Response to the PT % host notify command
When a function switch is pressed or released, the host is notified of a 1--word
address and 1--word data as the notify command. For details, see Section 5 ”Using Memory Link (NTH Protocol).”
Set the following items to each of the function switches:
268
Section 6-3
Operating NTH Screen Data Converter
Item
Function
(1)
Set one of the following as the action of the function switch when it is
pressed or released:
OFF:
Nothing is notified.
SW:
When pressed
Address: F000 Hex
Data: Position code
When released Address: 0000 Hex
Data: Position code
(For details on position codes, see page xx.)
Specified value: When pressed
Address: F000 Hex
Data: Specified value of (2) below
When released Address: 0000 Hex
Data: Specified value of (2) below
(2)
Set the value to be notified to the host when (1) above is set to ”Specified
value”.
0000 to FFFE Hex
Position Codes of Function Switches
The following table shows the position codes of the function switches:
6-3-4
Function switch
Position code
Function switch
Position code
+
0C00 Hex
--
--
--
0C01 Hex
F1
0D00 Hex
F7
0C02 Hex
F2
0D01 Hex
F8
0C03 Hex
F3
0D02 Hex
F9
0C04 Hex
F4
0D03 Hex
F10
0C05 Hex
F5
0D04 Hex
F11
0C06 Hex
F6
0D05 Hex
Window control area setting
Click
in the main window. The [Window Control Area Setting]
screen appears.
This screen is for setting the allocated words for the work area to be used in window displays.
In a window display, a work area of one word for each window screen is required.
Specify words not used for other applications in order from word number 1 for the
necessary number of window screens.
Caution
! Be sure to set the same number or more window control areas than the actual
number of windows in the screen data file.
! Do not change the contents of words as they are used by the NTH25/NTH25C as
work area.
Reference
When ”Comm. Method” in the [Configuration] page is set to [Memory Link], the
window control area cannot be set.
269
Section 6-3
Operating NTH Screen Data Converter
window control area setting
The areas in the following table can be specified as the window control area. The
allocated word is fixed to one word.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocation
CVM1/CV
Series PCs
Allocation
How To
Specify Bits
DM
Data memory
Data memory
DM0123
CH
I/O relay
I/O relay
TIM
Timer present
value
Timer present
value
TIM055
CNT
Counter present
value
Counter present
value
CNT032
HR
Holding relay
AR
Auxiliary relay
LR
Link relay
1
Special auxiliary
relay
: OK
: NG
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. For details, see
Appendix H ”PC Memory Map”, page 321.
[How to Specify Areas]
-- I/O relay
Enter only four word number digits.
-- Other areas
Enter the characters (DM, TIM, CNT) indicating the area followed by the word
number. For the DM area, enter a 4--digit word number. For the TIM or CNT
areas, enter a 3--digit word number.
270
Section 6-3
Operating NTH Screen Data Converter
Reference
Click
at the right of the entry field. The following screen for setting the address
appears. In this screen, you can specify the area type and word number individually.
In this screen, the number of digits for the word number are as follows:
DM: 4 digits, Other: 3 digits
6-3-5
Trend graph control area settings
Click
in the main window. The [Trend Graph Control Area Set-
ting] screen appears.
This screen is for setting the allocated words of the areas for trend graph control.
There are two areas for trend graph control. For details on trend graph control
areas, see ”Trend Graphs” on page 176.
-- Data clear control area
This area clears past data (logging data) in words to be displayed. Data can be
cleared from each trend graph frame individually.
-- Display updating stop control area
This area stops and continues reading (sampling) of words to be displayed.
Sampling can be stopped and continued on each trend graph frame individually.
Reference
When ”Comm. Method” in the [Configuration] page is set to [Memory Link], the
trend control area cannot be set.
271
Section 6-3
Operating NTH Screen Data Converter
The areas in the following table can be specified as the trend graph control area.
The allocated words for the trend graph control area are fixed to four words.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocation
CVM1/CV
Series PCs
Allocation
How To
Specify Bits
DM
Data memory
Data memory
DM0123
CH
I/O relay
I/O relay
TIM
Timer present
value
Timer present
value
TIM055
CNT
Counter present
value
Counter present
value
CNT032
HR
Holding relay
AR
Auxiliary relay
LR
Link relay
1
Special auxiliary
relay
: OK
: NG
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. For details, see
Appendix H ”PC Memory Map”, page 321.
[How to Specify Areas]
-- I/O relay
Enter only four word number digits.
-- Other areas
Enter the characters (DM, TIM, CNT) indicating the area followed by the word
number. For the DM area, enter a 4--digit word number. For the TIM or CNT areas,
enter a 3--digit word number.
Reference
Click
at the right of the entry field. The following screen for setting the address
appears. In this screen, you can specify the area type and word number individually.
In this screen, the number of digits for the word number are as follows:
DM: 4 digits, Other: 3 digits
Trend graph control area functions
The NTH25/NTH25C manages trend graphs using numbers 1 to 20 in order from
the smallest number for screens having a trend graph. (This number is automatically allocated by the NTH25/NTH25C.)
Corresponding trend graphs can be controlled by turning the bits in the trend graph
control area ON and OFF.
272
Section 6-3
Operating NTH Screen Data Converter
! Data clear control area
Bit
1st word
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20 19 18 17
2nd word
(Figures in frames are trend graph numbers. ”--” indicates that the number
is unused (always 0).)
Clearing of records in trend graph frames is carried out as follows according to the
state of the corresponding bit:
Bit state change from 0 to 1: Record is cleared.
Other:
Nothing is executed.
! Display updating stop control area
Bit
1st word
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20 19 18 17
2nd word
(Figures in frames are trend graph numbers. ”--” indicates that the number
is unused (always 0).)
Data for trend graphs is read (sampled) according to the state of the corresponding bit:
Bit ”0”:
Bit ”1”:
6-3-6
Sampling is carried out (continued).
Sampling is stopped.
Transmitting Screen Data
When you have finished making the required settings, send the screen data to the
NTH25/NTH25C following the procedure below.
(1) Connect the NTH25/NTH25C to a personal computer on which NTH Screen
Data Converter is running. (See page 38.)
(2) Set the NTH25/NTH25C to the screen send mode.
Select ”Send Screen” in the CHECK menu on the NTH25/NTH25C.
For details on operations in the CHECK menu and the screen send mode, see
Section 3 ”CHECK Menu Operation.”
(3) Click
in the main window on NTH Screen Data Converter.
The following screen appears.
(4) Choose one of ”COM1” to ”COM4” as the RS--232C port to which the
NTH25/NTH25C is connected. Then click
.
This starts transmission of screen data.
273
Operating NTH Screen Data Converter
Section 6-3
When transmission of screen data ends successfully, the display returns to the
NTH Screen Data Converter main window and the NTH25/NTH25C automatically
restarts.
If transmission of screen data does not end successfully, the following happens:
-- On NTH Screen Data Converter, the ”Communications Error” message is displayed. Click
to return to the main window.
-- On the NTH25/NTH25C, the ”Standing By To Send” or ”Receiving Data” message remains displayed, or the display changes to indicate a communications
error.
If the ”Standing By To Send” or ”Receiving Data” message remains displayed,
turn the power OFF then back ON again to restart the NTH25/NTH25C.
Reference
274
If transmission of screen data does not end successfully, the screen data sent and
stored in the NTH25/NTH25C may be in error. If this happens, the
NTH25/NTH25C may malfunction and operation may not be as intended. For example, the NTH25/NTH25C may no longer enter the RUN mode when it is started
up, or screens may no longer be displayed during operation. Send the screen data
again later and check that screen data is successfully sent.
SECTION 7
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
This section describes the action to take when an error occurs during NTH25/NTH25C operation, and how to carry out maintenance and inspection to prevent errors from occurring.
7-1
7-2
7-3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance of the NTH25/NTH25C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
276
281
282
275
Section 7-1
Troubleshooting
7-1
Troubleshooting
When a fault relating to the operation of the NTH25/NTH25C occurs, find the
symptoms in the table below and remedy by following the corresponding ”Remedy”.
Caution
-- Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF.
-- Do not disassemble the PT for repair or modification.
1. When installation is not successful
Symptoms
Power LED fails to
turn ON
Cause
Remedy
Power is not being supplied.
Check the connections and make sure that power is supplied correctly. (See ”Connecting the Power Supply”, page
35.)
Power supply fuse has blown.
Contact your OMRON service center.
The display language of the initial
screen and CHECK
menu is Japanese.
Screen data created in the Japanese
version of NTST is saved to the
NTH25/NTH25C.
Send screen data created in the English version of NTST
to the NTH25/NTH25C. After this data has been sent, restart the NTH25/NTH25C and the display language will
change to English.
The display
p y is dim.
Insufficient contrast
Increase the contrast in the CHECK menu (page 70).
Backlight is defective, or its life has
expired.
Contact your OMRON service center. (The backlight cannot be replaced by the customer.)
The contrast is too high.
Decrease the contrast (page 70).
The display is faint.
2. When screen data is not sent successfully
Symptoms
Cannot communicate with the NTH
Screen Data Converter
Cause
Remedy
The NTH25/NTH25C is not in the
Screen Transmit mode.
Display the CHECK menu and select the Transmit mode.
(See 3--4 ”Transmitting the Screen Data”, page 65.)
Not connected to the NTH Screen
Data Converter.
Check the installation of the connector cable. (See 2--4
”Connecting to the NTH Screen Data Converter”, page
38.)
The PT model setting and communications port setting on the NTH
Screen Data Converter do not match
the NTH25/NTH25C.
Using the ”Configuration” settings of the NTH Screen Data
Converter, set the PT model to match the
NTH25/NTH25C. Also, match the ”COM port” setting of the
[Comms. Setting] page that is displayed when ”Transmit” is
selected with the RS--232C port that is currently connected
to the NTH25/NTH25C.
Data transmission
The cable for NTH25/NTH25C is difrom the NTH
rectly connected to the computer.
Screen Data
Converter is delayed
(approx. 30 min.)
Connect the tool connector cable to the computer, and the
NTH25/NTH25C cable to the tool connector cable. (See
2--4 ”Connecting to the NTH Screen Data Converter”,
page 38.)
The ”Data Communications Error”
g is dismessage
played.
l
d
Faulty communications cable connec- Check the cable connections, and conduct an electrical
tion
continuity test. Replace the cable if the results of the test
are no good.
The ”Excessive
Screen Data” message is displayed.
The screen capacity that can be regis- Reduce the total amount of screen data, for example, by
tered to NTH25/NTH25C is exceeded. registering some of the elements to a library.
276
Transmission of screen data was can- Do not press the right mouse button (pause data transmisceled on the NTH Screen Data Consion) on the NTH Screen Data Converter (computer) durverter.
ing transmission of screen data.
Section 7-1
Troubleshooting
3. When the NTH25/NTH25C is not started up successfully
Symptoms
Nothing is displayed
on the screen.
Cause
The backlight is OFF.
When an attempt is
made to enter the
RUN mode,, the initial
i l screen and
d the
h
”No Reply from
Host” message are
displayed alternately
ly.
Display elements
that were supposed
to have been
created in the Support Tool are not displayed, or displayed
is not as intended.
-- If the ”Auto CFL off” is set to a value other than 0 by the
NTH Screen Data Converter, the backlight will automatically turn OFF if the screen is not operated within a specific time. To turn the backlight back ON, touch the
screen again.
-- If the ”Auto CFL off” is set to 0 by the NTH Screen Data
Converter, the backlight will turn OFF for the time that bit
0 of the PT status control bit is 0 (OFF). In this case, set
bit 0 of the PT status control bit to 1 (ON).
If the above remedy does not turn the backlight ON,
contact your OMRON service center.
The PC model setting is not matching. Match ”PLC Model” on the ”Configuration” -- [PLC Setting]
page of the NTH Screen Data Converter with the actually
connected PC.
NTH25/NTH25C and host commuMake sure that the host’s communications speed, stop bit
nications conditions are not matching. length, data length and parity settings match the settings
on the NTH25/NTH25C set on the NTH Screen Data Converter.
Defective communications cable connection
The ”Device Setup
Error” is displayed.
Remedy
Screen number 0 or a screen to which This is not an error. Change the screen number. (See
screen data is not registered has been ”Screen Numbers”, page 83.)
read at the host.
Check the cable connections, and conduct an electrical
continuity test. Replace the cable if the results of the test
are no good.
The PC model setting does not match. Match ”PLC Model” on the ”Configuration” -- [PLC Setting]
page of the NTH Screen Data Converter with the actually
connected PC.
A PC address (word, bit) outside the
communication range is allocated.
Correctly set the allocated words and bits referring to the
descriptions for each of the elements in Section 4
”NTH25/NTH25C Functions” and ”Appendix H PC Memory
Map”, page 321.
An area classification outside of the
NTH25/NTH25C range is specified.
Correctly set the allocated words and bits referring to the
descriptions for each of the elements in Section 4
”NTH25/NTH25C Functions” and ”Appendix H PC Memory
Map”, page 321.
The data placed by the Support Tool
is partially deleted or changed during
data conversion by the NTH Screen
Data Converter due to functional restrictions specific to the
NTH25/NTH25C.
Check the restrictions relating to elements that can be displayed on the NTH25/NTH25C referring to Section 4
”NTH25/NTH25C Functions”, and correct the screen data.
277
Section 7-1
Troubleshooting
4. When communications with the host are not successful
Symptoms
Cause
Remedy
Cannot communicate with the host
Example)
-- The ”No Reply
py
from Host” message is displayed.
-- Communications
error message is
displayed during
communications
with the host.
The ”Configuration” -- [Communication] page setting on the NTH Screen
Data Converter is not matching.
Check the ”Configuration” -- [Communication] page on the
NTH Screen Data Converter, and match the communications protocol settings for the host and NTH25/NTH25C.
(See ”[Communication] page”, page 262.)
The NTH25/NTH25C and host are not
correctly connected.
Check that the type, length, and installation of the connector cable match the specifications. (See 2--5 ”Connecting
to the Host”, page 40.)
The PC communications port setting
does not match.
Make sure that the communications port setting matches
the communications setup (communications type, communications conditions) on the NTH25/NTH25C using the PC
peripheral tool. (See 2--5 ”Connecting to the Host”, page
40.)
The power to the NTH25/NTH25C,
RS--232C/RS--422A conversion unit
or host is OFF.
Check the power supply.
An attempt is being made to communicate by the NT series memory link
protocol.
The NTH25/NTH25C memory link differs from the memory
link of other NT series PTs in its communications method
and commands. Create a program for the
NTH25/NTH25C.
Cannot communicate by the memory
link.
The touch panel and Communications is unstable due to
function switches do external noise
not respond.
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the conditions by referring to ”Grounding” (page 35). Also, adopt
electrical noise countermeasures, for example, by separating the power lead and signal leads.
The touch panel and function
switches are broken.
Contact your OMRON service center.
Touch switches and function switches
are not allocated to the host.
Allocate the touch switches and function switches to the
host. Allocate touch switches using the Support Tool, and
allocate function switches using the NTH Screen Data
Converter.
The PC mode has
The NTH25/NTH25C changes the
changed to the mon- mode when host link communications
itor mode.
is used.
This is an NTH25/NTH25C specification. When using a PC
that can also be connected using the NT link method, use
an NT link connection (The mode is not changed with the
NT link method).
Updating of numerals and text is
delayed.
Communications is unstable due to
external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the conditions by referring to ”Grounding”, page 37. Also, adopt
electrical noise countermeasures, for example, by separating the power lead and signal leads.
There are too many numeral/text displays on the displayed screen.
Reduce the number of numeral/string displays on the
screen for which updating is delayed.
The cycle time is extended due to
heavy processing at the host.
Shorten the host cycle time.
The ”No Reply from
Host” message is
displayed from time
to time during normal operation.
Communications is unstable due to
external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the conditions by referring to ”Grounding” (page 37). Also, adopt
electrical noise countermeasures, for example, by separating the power lead and signal leads.
The display is not
switched from the
initial screen even if
switching
g of the display screen is
instructed on the
host Or,
host.
Or there is no
display.
Communications conditions between
the NTH25/NTH25C and host do not
match.
Make sure that the host’s communications speed, stop bit
length, data length and parity settings match the settings
on the NTH25/NTH25C set on the NTH Screen Data Converter.
The screen number specified in the
PT status control area is not BCD.
Specify the screen number in BCD.
A screen number to which screen
data is not registered is specified.
There is no display on the NTH25/NTH25C if you specify a
screen number to which no elements have been registered. Specify the correct screen number.
278
Section 7-1
Troubleshooting
Symptoms
Cause
Remedy
The ”Data Communications Error”
message
g is displayed.
l
d
Faulty communications cable connec- Check the cable connections, and conduct an electrical
tion
continuity test. Replace the cable if the results of the test
are no good.
The ”Device Setup
Error” is displayed.
The PC model setting does not match. Match ”PLC Model” on the ”Configuration” -- [PLC Setting]
page of the NTH Screen Data Converter with the actually
connected PC.
Transmission of screen data was can- Do not press the right mouse button (pause data transmisceled on the NTH Screen Data Consion) on the NTH Screen Data Converter (computer) durverter.
ing transmission of screen data.
A PC address (word, bit) outside the
communication range is allocated.
Correctly set the allocated words and bits referring to the
descriptions for each of the elements in Section 4
”NTH25/NTH25C Functions” and ”Appendix H PC Memory
Map”, page 321.
An area classification outside of the
NTH25/NTH25C range is specified.
Correctly set the allocated words and bits referring to the
descriptions for each of the elements in Section 4
”NTH25/NTH25C Functions” and ”Appendix H PC Memory
Map”, page 321.
5. When screen display or functions are abnormal
Symptoms
Cause
The touch panel and Communications is unstable due to
function switches do external noise
not respond.
Remedy
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the conditions by referring to ”Grounding” (page 37). Also, adopt
electrical noise countermeasures, for example, by separating the power lead and signal leads.
The touch panel and function
switches are broken.
Contact your OMRON service center.
Touch switches and function switches
are not allocated to the host.
Allocate the touch switches and function switches to the
host. Allocate touch switches using the Support Tool, and
allocate function switches using the NTH Screen Data
Converter.
The graph display
does not change.
Either of percentage display settings
0% or 100% is incorrect.
Set the 0, and 100% values in the following relationship:
0% value < 100% value
The trend graph display does not agree
with the actual time
axis.
The cycle for graph display update
Delete other display elements on the same screen as the
processing is longer than the set sam- trend graph that are allocated to the host and have a high
pling cycle.
update frequency. Or, lengthen the sampling cycle.
Updating of numerals and text is
delayed.
Communications is unstable due to
external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the conditions by referring to ”Grounding”, page 37. Also, adopt
electrical noise countermeasures, for example, by separating the power lead and signal leads.
There are too many numeral/text displays on the displayed screen.
Reduce the number of numeral/string displays on the
screen for which updating is delayed.
The cycle time is extended due to
heavy processing at the host.
Shorten the host cycle time.
The data placed by the Support Tool
is partially deleted or changed during
data conversion by the NTH Screen
Data Converter due to functional restrictions specific to the
NTH25/NTH25C.
Check the restrictions relating to elements that can be displayed on the NTH25/NTH25C referring to Section 4
”NTH25/NTH25C Functions”, and correct the screen data.
Display elements
that were supposed
to have been
created in the Support Tool are not displayed, or displayed
is not as intended.
279
Section 7-1
Troubleshooting
Symptoms
Cause
Remedy
The character attrib- A ladder program for the NT31/NT31C
ute of the character is being used without being corrected
string display differs for the NTH25/NTH25C on the host.
from its setting, or
the first character is
not displayed.
On the NTH25/NTH25C, the first allocated word of the
character string display is used for setting the character
string display method.
(The size and display attribute set on the Support tool is
invalid.)
Correct the ladder program.
Cannot input
numerals
Check the screen data’s upper/lower (max./min.) limit
check setting for numeral input, and correct it if necessary.
(For numeral key type, see page 196; for thumbwheel
type, see page 203.)
The upper/lower (max./min.) limit
check for numeral input is in effect.
Numeral memory table is not allocated When creating screen data for the NTH25/NTH25C on the
to host.
Support Tool, be sure to allocate the numeral memory
tables to be used to the host.
Window screen
does not open
Window control area is not allocated.
Allocate ”window control areas” exceeding the number of
window screens to be used to the host using the NTH
Screen Data Converter.
The display of overlapping elements is
strange.
Touch switches are overlapping.
Correct so that touch switches are not overlapping.
Overlapping placed
image/library lamps
are not displayed
correctly.
If image/library lamps are overlappping, display of the last
changed image/library lamp takes priority.
The tile spreads
The tile border is incomplete.
over the entire
screen when tiling is Tiled elements are placed on the tile
executed.
border.
Draw the tiling border as a solid line and not as a dash or
dot--dash.
Place the tiled element inside and not on the border.
The border was drawn after tiling.
Correct the display order on the entire screen so that the
tiled element is drawn behind the border.
The border set in the Support Tool is
invalid.
The color of some elements such as a frame display of
touch switches sometimes changes. Correct, for example,
by drawing the border on the line of a fixed display.
Numeral display ele- Another numeral display element is
ments are not disreferencing the same numeral
played.
memory table on the same screen.
Multiple numeral display elements are not allowed to reference the same numeral memory table on the same
screen. Correct so that a different numeral memory table is
referenced.
The alarm list/history The alarm list/history specifications
does not match the
differ between the NT31/NT31C and
image in the Support NTH25/NTH25C.
Tool.
Check the alarm list/history specifications on the
NTH25/NTH25C, and check the image on a PT.
A circular standard
lamp is lit square.
On the NTH25/NTH25C, change all lamp OFF colors inside the rectangular area enclosing the circle of the standard lamp to ON colors. Change the periphery color or
lamp OFF color.
The periphery of a circular standard
lamp is the same color as the lamp’s
OFF color.
6. When the programming console function is not functioning normally
Symptoms
The programming
console function
cannot be used.
280
Cause
Remedy
The communications settings are incorrect.
Set the communications method to ”NT link” when using
the programming console function.
A programming console is connected.
It is not possible to use a programming console and the
programming console function at the same time. Disconnect the programming console.
The PC does not support the programming console function.
Not all PCs support the programming console function.
Check the model of PC you are using. (See 3--10 ”Programming Console Function”, page 74.)
Section 7-2
Maintenance of the NTH25/NTH25C
7-2
Maintenance of the NTH25/NTH25C
Carry out maintenance work in order to ensure that the NTH25/NTH25C is always
in optimum working order.
WARNING
Do not attempt to take the NTH25/NTH25C apart and do not
touch any internal parts while the power is being supplied.
Doing so might result in electrical shock.
Caution
Continual display of the same pattern for a long time (roughly 24 hours) will result
in a residual image forming on the screen. Periodically switch the screen display
to prevent residual images from forming.
Spare PT
We recommend preparing a spare NTH25/NTH25C to minimize system downtime
in the event of an NTH25/NTH25C failure or if the screen display becomes difficult
to read due to deterioration of the display unit.
Backlight
When the backlight in the display dims and it is difficult to view the screen, contact
your OMRON service center and we will replace the backlight. (The backlight cannot be replaced by the customer.)
! Guide to backlight replacement
Under normal operating conditions it can be assumed that the backlight will need
to be replaced after about 10,000 hours. However, the life of the backlight does
varies, particularly, in accordance with the temperature in the environment in
which it is used. (For example, use in low temperatures reduces the life of the
backlight.) It should be replaced when the display dims and the screen is difficult to
view.
281
Section 7-3
Inspection and Cleaning
7-3
Inspection and Cleaning
Clean and inspect the NTH25/NTH25C regularly to ensure that it is always in optimum working order.
Cleaning Method
When the display becomes dirty, the screen becomes difficult to view. Clean the
screen from time to time as follows.
- In daily cleaning, wipe the display with a soft dry cloth. If it is particularly dirty,
attempting to remove it by wiping with a dry cloth may damage the front sheet of
the unit. In this case, wipe with a damp cloth beforehand.
- If dirt cannot be removed with a dry cloth, wipe the display with a firmly wrung
cloth moistened with diluted neutral detergent (2%).
- If rubber or vinyl products such as tape, are left stuck to the display for long periods they may cause dirt stains. If such items are stuck to the display, remove
them during cleaning.
Caution
Never use volatile solvents such as benzene or paint thinner, or chemical dusters.
Inspection Method
In normal operating environments, inspect the NTH25/NTH25C at intervals of between 6 months and a year. In environments that are extremely hot and humid, or
very dusty environments, shorten the inspection interval.
! Items required for inspection
Prepare the following items before starting the inspection:
--------
282
Screwdrivers (Philips, flat head)
Tester (or digital voltmeter)
Industrial alcohol
100% cotton cloth
Hygrometer (required in some cases)
Thermometer (required in some cases)
Synchroscope (required in some cases)
Section 7-3
Inspection and Cleaning
! Points inspected
Inspect the following points to determine whether or not they are within the standard. If they are not, either improve the surrounding environment so that the values fall within the standard, or adjust the NTH25/NTH25C, for example by re-tightening screws.
Point Inspected
Inspection Details
Standard
Inspection Instrument
Power supply
voltage
Fluctuation in power supply terminal voltage
Permissible voltage fluctuation range
(24 VDC --15% to +10%)
Tester
Ambient environmental conditions
Ambient temperature (temperature inside operation panel)
0 to 50
Thermometer
Mounting site
Components with
limited lives
Ambient humidity (humidity in the 35% to 85% RH
operation panel)
Hygrometer
Dust
Dust must not be accumulating.
Visual inspection
Connection of connector cables
Connectors must be fully inserted and
locked, and not be loose.
Philips screwdriver
Screws must not be loose.
To be no looseness
Philips screwdriver
State of external connector
cables
Faults such as incipient disconnection
Visual inspection
Brightness of the backlight
Must be sufficiently bright.
Visual inspection
Backlight life (room temperature and humidity):
Brightness is halved after about 10,000
hours in use.
Caution
-- Do not disassemble for repairs or modification.
-- Disposal of the NTH25/NTH25C (including the backlight) may be regulated by
national or local authorities. Dispose the NTH25/NTH25C (including the backlight) in accordance with the laws and regulations of the relevant country and
local authority.
Reference
Request When Replacing the NTH25/NTH25C
When replacing the NTH25/NTH25C after discovering a fault during inspections,
note the following points:
-- Be sure to switch the power OFF before starting replacement.
-- After replacement, check that the new NTH25/NTH25C is free of errors.
-- If a faulty NTH25/NTH25C is returned for repairs, write as detailed a description
of the fault as possible and send this description together with the
NTH25/NTH25C to the OMRON address indicated on the back cover of this
book.
283
APPENDIX
APPENDIX A Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX B
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX C
Using an RS--232C/RS--422A Converter Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methods for Mounting and Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX D Transporting and Storing the NTH25/NTH25C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX E
Making the Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soldering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX F
Differences with NT31/NT31C Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Setting (PT Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Transmission (Download/Upload) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Data, Library Data, and Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX G Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host Link Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CompoBus/S Master Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPUs (For Connection via a Host Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPUs (For Connection via an NT Link (1:1)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS--232C/RS--422A Converter Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS--232C Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Parts and Equipment for PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX H PC Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OMRON C--Series PC, SRM1 Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OMRON CVM1/CV--Series PC Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX I
Keycode Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISO 8859/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS--DOS CP437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
286
286
287
291
292
293
293
293
295
296
297
298
299
300
300
301
302
303
303
303
304
305
306
306
306
315
316
316
316
316
317
318
318
318
319
319
321
321
322
323
323
324
285
APPENDIX A
Specifications
APPENDIX A
Specifications
General Specifications
Item
Specification
Rated power supply voltage
24 V(DC)
Allowable power supply voltage range
20.4 V(DC) to 26.4 V(DC) (24 V(DC) --15% to +10%)
Allowable power interruption time
No regulation
Power consumption
15 W max
Operating ambient temperature
0 to +50
Storage ambient temperature
--20 to +60
Operating ambient humidity
35 to 85% RH (with no condensation)
Operating environment
No corrosive gases
Dielectric strength
1000 V(AC) for 1 minute (between power terminal and FG)
Noise resistance
Noise voltage: 1000 Vp--p (across power supply terminals and panel)
Pulse width of 100 ns to 1 )s (by noise simulator)
Vibration resistance (operating)
10 to 57 Hz with 0.075 mm amplitude
57 to 150 Hz with 9.8 m/s2 acceleration
for 60 minutes in each of X, Y, Z directions
Dimensions
205 (W) x 140 (H) x 71.2 (D) mm (excluding cables)
Weight
0.7 kg max (excluding cables), 1.2 kg max (including cables)
Enclosure ratings
Equivalent to IP65 dust--proof/drip--proof structure or equivalent*
EC directives
Applicable EC directives
or standards
*
Standards
(with no icing)
EMC directive 89/336/EEC, 92/31/EEC
Low voltage directive 73/23/EEC
EMI
EN50081-2: 1993
EMS
EN61131-2: 1995
Electrical safety
EN61131-2: 1995
The NTH25/NTH25C may not be used at a location where it is exposed to splashing oil for a long period.
286
APPENDIX A
Specifications
Performance Specifications
Display Specifications
Item
Specification
Display device
NTH25: Monocrome STN LCD (with backlight)
NTH25C: Color STN LCD (with backlight)
Number of dots (resolution)
320 dots horizontally x 240 dots vertically
Size of a double--width character 4.8 mm
Display panel
Effective display area (H) x (V)
96 x 72 (4.7 inches)
View angle
NTH25: Up: 30* Down: 20* Left/right: +30*
NTH25C: Up: 30* Down: 30* Left/right: +50*
Display color
NTH25: Black, white (2 colors)
NTH25C: 8 colors (and intermediate colors can be displayed with tiling
patterns)
Life expectancy (until contrast is
50,000 hours minimum
reduced by half)
Backlight
(white cold
cathode tube)
Indicators
Contrast adjustment
Adjustable in 3 levels by operation at the touch panel
Life expectancy*
10,000 minimum
Replacement
Not possible
POWER (green LED)
Lit while power is being supplied
+ (green LED)
Switched between alternate and momentary by settings on NTH
Screen Data Converter.
-- (green LED)
*
Time taken for brightness to reduce to half at normal temperature and humidity
Panel Specifications
Item
Specification
Type: Resistive type
Number of switches: 192 (16 horizontally x 12 vertically)
Maximum number that can be registered to one screen: 192
Touch panel
Cell size: 6 x 6 mm
Input: Pressure--sensitive type
Operating force: 1 N minimum
Life expectancy: 1 million operations minimum
Function switch
No. of switches: 13
Push lock switch
No. of switches: 1
287
APPENDIX A
Specifications
External Interface Specifications
Item
Specification
Serial interface
Conforms to EIA RS--232C
D--SUB 9--pin connector (female)
Operation output
Open collector (sink type) 12 to 24 V(DC) 50 mA
Emergency stop
output
Normally closed condition (1 circuit output)
24 V(DC) 1A, positive opening operation
IEC60947--5--1 compliant
Programming environment
Item
Specification
Programming System
Programming support software
Programming Tool
! Programming support software
NT--series Support Tool for Windows 95/98 (Ver. 3.0), made by OMRON
NTH Screen Data Converter, made by OMRON
! Personal Computer
Use a personal computer which can run Microsoft Windows 95 or 98
RAM:
At least 32 MB
Free area in hard disk:
At least 25 MB for Support Tool (To install sample collection, more
12 MB is required.)
At least 5 MB for NTH Screen Data Converter
Input device:
Keyboard, mouse
Communication port:
At least one RS--232C capable of 38.400 bps communications must
be free on ports COM1 to 4
288
APPENDIX A
Specifications
Display Specifications
Displa
play ele
ements
Item
Text data (fixed display)
Character string displays
Up to 50 per screen (not possible for window screens) (40 bytes per string)
Numeral displays
Up to 120 per screen (not possible for window screens), max. 8--digit display
Mark displays (fixed display)
Up to 65535 per screen (same applies to window screens)
Bar graph displays
Up to 30 per screen (not possible for window screens)
Trend graphs
Eight lines per frame, one frame per screen (not possible for window screens)
With the data logging function: 40 graphs per screen data file
Graphic displays (fixed
display)
Can be displayed wherever required
Maximum combined total with other fixed display elements of 65535 per screen
(same applies to window screens)
Standard lamps
Up to 64 per screen (not possible for window screens) 64000 lamps per screen data
file
Image/library lamps
Up to 64 per screen (not possible for window screens) 12800 lamps per screen data
file
(Note, however, that screen numbers 201 onwards cannot be used.)
Touch switches
Up to 192 per screen (same applies to window screens)
Image data
Up to 64 per screen (not possible for window screens)
Library data
Numeral
inputs
Up to 256 per screen (not possible for window screens)
Numeral key type
Total of 80 numeral key types and thumbwheel types per screen
Thumbwheel type (Only one numeral key type numeral input can be registered to one window screen.)
Screen typ
pes
Alarm lists
Alarm histories
One alarm list or alarm history group per screen
(not possible for window screens)
Standard screen
The standard screen display
Window screens
Only one window screen can be displayed at the same time.
Fixed display elements, touch switches and numeral input field (only one numeric
type) can be registered.
Screen attributes
Number of sscreens
Specification
Fixed character data (character strings registered to each screen)
Maximum combined total with other fixed display elements of 65535 per screen
(same applies to window screens)
Keyboard screen number
Max. number of registered
screens
1000 screens
Screen number
0: No display
1 to 1000: User registered screens
9020: Programming console function screen
Screen registration method
By transmitting screen data created using the Support Tool to the NTH25/NTH25C by
the NTH Screen Data Converter
Screen saving method
Flash memory (screen data memory in the PT)
289
APPENDIX A
Specifications
Display Element Specifications
Item
Specification
Display characters
-- Standard characters (8 x 16): Alphanumeric and symbols
-- Marks (16 x 16 dots): User--defined pictographs
Character enlargement
function
Wide, high, 2 x 2, 4 x 4, 8 x 8
Character display attributes Standard, flash, inverse flash, transparent
Image data
Pictographs composed of dots
Size: One of 32 x 32, 32 x 64, 64 x 64 or 128 x 64 dots (according to code)
Enlarged display and display attributes such as inverse and flash cannot be set.
Library data
Combinations of any graphics
Size: Min. 1 x 1 dots, max. 320 x 240 dots (Any size can be set within this range.)
Enlarged display and display attributes such as inverse and flash are implemented
according to the setting registered.
Graphics
Polyline, circle, arc, sector, rectangle, polygon
Line type
4 types only for polylines (solid line, broken line, dot--dash, dot--dot--dash)
Tiling
7 types
Graphic display attributes
Standard, inverse, flash, inverse flash
Display colors
NTH25: 2 colors (black, white)
NTH25C: 8 colors (black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow, white)
Color specification
Foreground color, background color
Special Features
Item
Specification
Maintenance function
-- Registered screen data test display function
Data retention
-- Alarm history data
-- Clock data setting
The period of time the data can be retained is not guaranteed since the data is backed up
not by a battery but by a capacitor. (2 or 3 days)
Calendar and clock function
-- Displays the current date and time in accordance with the built--in clock
-- Displayed and set with ”Clock Setting” in the ”CHECK” menu
Programming console
function
Executes functions equivalent to those of a programming console (model
C200H--PRO27--E) with C series CPM1, CPM1A, CQM1 (--EV1 only),
C200HX/HG/HE(--Z)E, and SRM1 (C02--V1 only).
Screen data transmission
functions
Function for receiving screen data from the NTH Screen Data Converter
290
APPENDIX A
Specifications
Communications Specifications
S For a Host Link
Item
*
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS--232C
Communications settings
Start--stop synchronization
Communications speed: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps
Data length: 7, 8 bits
Stop bit: 1, 2 bits
Parity: Even, odd, none
Connector
9--pin D--SUB connector (female)
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m*
Communications protocol
C--series SYSWAY (1:N)
When using an NT--AL001, the specifications are as follows:
-- RS--232C cable: Max. 2 m
-- RS--422A cable: Total length 500 m max.
S For an NT Link
Item
*
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS--232C
Connector
9--pin D--SUB connector (female)
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m*
When using an NT--AL001, the specifications are as follows:
-- RS--232C cable: Max. 2 m
-- RS--422A cable: Total length 500 m max.
S For a Memory Link (RS--232C Type)
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS--232C
Communications settings
Start--stop synchronization
Communications speed: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps
Data length: 7, 8 bits
Stop bit: 1, 2 bits
Parity: None, even, odd
Connector
9--pin D--SUB connector (female)
Number of units connected
1:1
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m
Communications protocol
Memory link (NTH)
291
APPENDIX B
Dimensions
APPENDIX B
71.2
72.0
140
205
128
61.7
44.2
56.7
Dimensions
96.0
60
Cable length: 5 m
20
M3
(depth: 5)
Unit: mm
292
APPENDIX C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
APPENDIX C
Using an RS--232C/RS--422A Converter Unit
This appendix outlines the external dimensions, procedure for mounting and removal, and specifications of the
RS--232C/RS--422A converter unit (NT--AL001). Refer to this information when designing the control panel. For
details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the NT--AL001.
Dimensions
53.5
(2.11)
110 (4.33)
om Ron
4 (0.16)
74.5 (2.93)
100.2 (3.94)
105 (4.13) max.
NT--AL001
(30)
(1.18)
45 (1.77)
30 (1.18)
Units: mm (inch)
30 (W) × 114 (H) × 100.2 (D) mm:
with the RS-422A terminal block cover closed
30 (W) × 114 (H) × 119.5 (D) mm:
with the RS-422A terminal block cover open
Methods for Mounting and Removal
The RS-232/RS-422 convertor unit (NT-AL001) can be mounted on a DIN rail or in an operation panel.
The RS-422A terminal block of the convertor unit can be easily removed.
293
APPENDIX C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
Mounting to a DIN Rail
Latch the top part of the rear face of the convertor unit (“a” in the figure) onto the top edge of the DIN rail, and push
the unit in the direction indicated by “b” in the figure.
Now fit end plates at the right and left of the convertor unit to secure it and ensure that it cannot shift laterally.
(a)
(b)
Removal from a DIN Rail
Remove the end plates at right and left of the convertor unit and, as shown in the figure below, insert a flat blade
screwdriver into the rail stopper at the bottom face of the convertor unit and prize it free.
Mounting to an Operation Panel
Drill two mounting screw holes in an operation panel with a thickness of at least 2 mm (0.08 inch) and secure the
convertor unit with screws.
30
(1.18)
100
(3.94)
110
(4.33)
21
(0.83)
Notice
294
2-M4
Units: mm (inch)
In order to ensure a secure and strong mount, mount the convertor unit in an operation panel with a thickness of at least 2 mm (0.08 inch).
APPENDIX C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
Specifications
The general specifications and communications specifications of the convertor unit are shown below.
General Specifications
Item
Specification
Dimensions
30 (W) × 114 (H) × 100.2 (D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover closed
30 (W) × 114 (H) × 119.5 (D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover open
Weight
200 g max.
Operating ambient temperature
0 to 55_C
Operating ambient humidity
10 to 90% RH (with no condensation)
Rated power supply voltage
+5 V(DC)  10% (using pin No. 6 of the RS-232C connector)
Rated power supply current
150 mA max.
Rush current
0.8 A max.
Insulation resistance
20 M, or higher, measured between all RS-422A terminal signal lines collectively and
functional ground terminal with a 500 V(DC) megger
Dielectric strength
1500 V(AC) for 1 minute between all RS-422A terminal signal lines collectively and
functional ground terminal
Leakage current: 10 mA max.
Operating environment
No corrosive gases
Storage ambient temperature
(20 to +75_C
Vibration resistance
60 minutes in each of X, Y, and Z directions
Shock resistance
47m/s2, 3 times in each of X, Y, and Z directions
Communications Specifications
S RS-232C Interface
Item
Specification
Communications speed
Max. 64k bps
Transmission distance
Max. 2 m
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female)
S RS-422A/485 Interface
Item
Specification
Communications speed
Max. 64k bps (depends on the RS-232C communications speed)
Transmission distance
Max. 500 m
Connector
8-terminal detachable terminal block, M3.0
295
APPENDIX C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
DIP Switch Settings
The convertor unit has 6 digits DIP switch for setting the RS-422A/485 communication conditions.
Before connecting the cable to the convertor unit, make the DIP switch settings.
(Factory settings)
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
omR on
NT--AL001
[SW1-1] Not used (always ON)
[SW1-2] Setting for built-in terminal resistance
- OFF Terminator not set
- ON Terminator set
[SW1-3, 4] Selection of 2-wire type/4-wire type
SW1-3
SW1-4
OFF
2-wire type (RS-485)
ON
SW1-3
SW1-4
OFF
4-wire type (RS-422A)
ON
[SW1-5, 6] Selection of the RS-422A send mode
SW1-5
SW1-6
OFF
Continual sending
ON
SW1-5
OFF
ON
SW1-6
SW1-5
OFF
ON
SW1-6
Complies with CS control of RS-232C
(Data sent at CS “H”)
Complies with CS control of RS-232C
(Data sent at CS “L”)
When using the host link or NT link (1:1), set the RS-422A send mode to “continual sending” (set both SW1-5 and 6
“OFF”).
When using the NT link (1:N), set the RS-422A send mode to “complies with CS control of RS-232C” (i.e., one of
SW1-5 and SW1-6 must be ON).
296
APPENDIX C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
S Do not set both SW1-5 and SW1-6 ON at the same time. This may damage internal circuits.
Caution
! The power supply to the device supplying +5 V must be turned OFF before starting wiring work.
! Before connecting the RS-232C cable and turning on the power to an RS-232C
device such as a PT (i.e., turning on the power to the convertor unit), check that
the cable is wired correctly and that the DIP switch settings are correct. If the
power is turned on while there is a wiring fault, the internal circuits of the convertor unit or the RS-232C device may be damaged.
! When the convertor unit is connected to a C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE) model of OMRON PC as an RS-422A device, set DIP switches SW1-5 and SW1-6 as indicated below.
SW1-5
OFF
SW1-6
ON
5 6
Pin Arrangement
The convertor unit has a terminal block for an RS-422A/485 interface connection and a connector for an RS-232C
interface connection.
The pin arrangements for the RS-422A/485 terminal block and the RS-232C connector are as follows.
RS-422A/485 Terminal Block
Terminal
block pin No.
7
5
3
1
Signal name
Abbreviation
Signal direction
(convertor unit & RS-422 device)
CSA
%
8
8
Request to send (()
6
7
Request to send (+)
CSB
%
4
6
Receive data (()
RDA
"
2
5
Receive data (+)
RDB
"
4
Send data (()
SDA
%
3
Send data (+)
SDB
%
2
Signal ground
SG (GND)
–
1
Functional ground
*
–
The CSB and CSA signals are for specialized applications.
297
APPENDIX C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Convertor Unit
RS-232C Connector
Connector
pin No.
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
*
Signal name
Abbreviation
Signal direction
(convertor unit & RS-232C device)
–
–
1
Not used
2
Send data
SD
"
3
Receive data
RD
%
4
Request to send
(shorted to CS internally)
RS
"
5
Clear to send
(shorted to RS internally)
CS
%
6
+5 V (150 mA) input for convertor unit
+5 V
%
7
Data set ready
(shorted to ER internally)
DR
%
8
Data terminal ready
(shorted to DR internally)
ER
"
9
Signal ground
SG
–
The hood is connected to the functional ground terminal of the RS-422A terminal block.
Block Diagram
A diagram showing the internal blocks of the convertor unit is shown below. Refer to this diagram when making
cables yourself, or when connecting devices with special interfaces.
RS-232C side
D-SUB 9P CASE
+5 V
SG
6 Fuse
R
POWER
LED
RS-422A/485 Dr/Rec
DC-DC Convertor
L
9
Photocoupler
RS-232C
Dr/Rec
RD
SD
RS
4
CS
5
DR
7
ER
298
3
2
8
RS-422A/485 side
8P terminal block
R
R
L
REG
IS_5 V
1
IS_0 V
2
SG
3
4
SDB
SDA
R
FG
2-wire type/
4-wire type
SW1-6
SW1-3
R
SW1-4
SW1-5
Terminator
R
5
RDB
6
RDA
7
8
CSB
CSA
SW1-2
RS--422A Dr
Transporting and Storing the NTH25/NTH25C
APPENDIX D
APPENDIX D
Transporting and Storing the NTH25/NTH25C
S When transporting the NTH25/NTH25C, use the packaging intended for it.
S When storing the NTH25/NTH25C, observe the following conditions.
Storage ambient temperature: (20 to +60_C
Storage ambient humidity:
35 to 85% RH
299
APPENDIX E
Making the Cable
APPENDIX E
Making the Cable
The procedure for making up the cable (PC connector cable, tool connector cable) yourself is described below.
Also refer to this procedure for making a connecting cable for use with RS-422A/485 type connections.
Cable Preparation
The preparation of the cable differs according to whether or not the shielding wire is to be connected to the FG.
S Cable with shielding wire connected to FG
(1) Cut the cable to the required length.
(2) Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade. Take care not to damage the shielding
underneath.
(3) Cut back the shielding wire with scissors.
(4) Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire.
(5) Fold back the shielding wire.
(6) Wrap aluminum foil tape around the folded-back shielding wire.
(1)
(2)
40 (1.57) (RS--232C)
25 (0.98) (RS--422A)
(3)
10
(0.39)
(4)
5
(0.19)
(5)
(6)
Units: mm (inch)
300
Aluminum foil tape
APPENDIX E
Making the Cable
S Cable with shielding wire not connected to FG
(1) Cut the cable to the required length.
(2) Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade. Take care not to damage the shielding
underneath.
(3) Cut back the shielding wire with scissors.
(4) Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire.
(5) Wrap vinyl tape over the cut off end of the shielding wire.
(1)
(2)
40 (1.57) (RS--232C)
25 (0.98) (RS--422A)
(3)
(4)
5
(0.19)
(5)
Units: mm (inch)
Vinyl tape
Soldering
(1) Slide heat-shrink tube over each wire.
(2) Pre-solder each wire and connector terminal.
(3) Solder each wire to each connector terminal.
1 mm
Soldering iron
Heat-shrink tube
(F, 1.5 mm dia., ℓ = 10 mm)
(4) Push the heat shrink tube over the soldered joint and heat the tube to shrink it in place.
Heat-shrink tube
301
APPENDIX E
Making the Cable
Hood Assembly
Assemble the connector hood as shown below.
Aluminum foil tape
End connected to FG
302
End not connected to FG
APPENDIX F
Differences with NT31/NT31C Screen Data
APPENDIX F
Differences with NT31/NT31C Screen Data
NTH25/NTH25C screen data is not completely compatible with screen data for the NT31/NT31C. So, NT31/NT31C
screen data must be partially corrected so that it can be used on the NTH25/NTH25C.
This appendix mainly describes the differences in the Support Tool settings.
System Setting (PT Configuration)
Items
NTH25/NTH25C
Initial Screen
1 to 1000
Key Input
Set on PT
(user settable functions not provided)
Set on PT
(not supported)
Resume Function
Backlight OFF function *1
(set on NTH Screen Data Converter)
Backlight OFF
1 to 3999
(not supported)
Tone
Buzzer
NT31/NT31C
Set on PT
Screen saver function *1
(set on PT)
Number of Table
Entries--Numeral Table
(non--existent)
512, 1000, 2000
Number of Table
Entries--String Table
(non--existent)
256, 1000, 2000
Number of Table Entries--Bit
Memory Table
(non--existent)
250, 1000
Printer for PT Printer
History
Setting
(cannot be connected)
Alarm
(fixed in latest order)
Screen
(not supported)
Numeral Storage Type
*2
DAC Function
*2
*1 The backlight OFF function is only for turning OFF the backlight. If the ”screen saver function” is used, it is possible to
display any string at a desired position in predetermined intervals in addition to turning OFF the screen/backlight.
*2 The programming console function is provided as standard on NTH25, NTH25C, NT31 and NT31C.
Data Transmission (Download/Upload)
Items
NTH25/NTH25C
NT31/NT31C
Application
Screen
Download/U
D
l d/U
Direct Access Information
pload
System Memory
Table
Get History
Log
Screen History
Alarm History
Data and Time
On the NTH25/NTH25C, downloading (transmitting) of screen data is performed from the NTH Screen Data Converter. Only downloading of application is possible, and uploading (receiving) of screen data in the NTH25/NTH25C
cannot be performed.
303
Differences with NT31/NT31C Screen Data
APPENDIX F
Image Data, Library Data, and Marks
Items
NTH25/NTH25C
NT31/NT31C
Max. 30
Max. 4095
Code
0001 to 001E Hex
0001 to 0FFF Hex
Size
Determined by code
(width x height: min. 32 x 32 to max. 128 x 64)
Any size in multiples of eight in both
horizontal and vertical directions.
Total No.
Image
g
Comp.
(Compression must be set to OFF.)
Comment
Total No.
Libraryy
Code
Max. 3980
Max. 12288
1000 to 1F8B Hex
1000 to 3FFF Hex
Max. 100
Max. 224
FF20 to FF72 Hex
FF20 to FFFF Hex
Comment
Total No.
Mark
Code
Insert in
Character String
For details on the element properties of image, library and mark data, see ”Elements” (page 306).
304
APPENDIX F
Differences with NT31/NT31C Screen Data
Memory Tables
Items
No.
NTH25/NTH25C
NT31/NT31C
(non--existent)
512, 1000, 2000
Value
Initial
Table-Numeral
Words
(determined by number of display digits
of numeral displays and numeral inputs)
PC (PLC) Address
I/O Comment
No.
Value
Table String
Table--String
(non--existent)
256, 1000, 2000
(used only as alarm messages)
Initial
Words
(fixed to 21 channels)
PC (PLC) Address
I/O Comment
No.
History
String Table Entry
Color
Table--Bit
T
bl Bit
Memory
Image/Library Code
Switch Screen
Screen No.
PC (PLC) Address
(non--existent)
256, 1000
(sampled at all times)
(fixed to 240)
NTH25:
NTH25C:
(Only the setting of bit memory table
number 0 is valid.)
NT31:
NT31C:
(image/library data cannot be displayed)
(not supported)
(not supported)
(Only the setting of bit memory table
number 0 is valid.)
I/O Comment
No.
Table--Exten
ded I/O Input
Cancel Backlight OFF
Function
Description
Table--Exten
ded I/O
O
Output
No.
PC (PLC) Address
I/O Comment
Total No.
Table--I/O
Comments
3000
3000
PC (PLC) Address
I/O Comments
305
APPENDIX F
Differences with NT31/NT31C Screen Data
Screens
Items
Screen Size (Dots)
Max. No. of Screen
Standard Screen No.
NTH25/NTH25C
NT31/NT31C
320 x 240
320 x 240
1000
3999
1 to 1000
1 to 3999
Parent Screen No.
1 to 3999
Keyboard Screen No.
1 to 1000
1 to 3999
Extended Screen No.
Occurrence History Screen No.
9001 (display only)
Frequency History Screen No.
9002 (display only)
Host Connect Screen
(System Initializing Screen)
(Initial screen is displayed when connected
to the host.)
9000
Screen Properties
Items
NTH25/NTH25C
Buzzer
NT31/NT31C
(user settable buzzer function not supported)
None, continuous, long, short
(screen display history function not
supported)
History
System Keypad
Backlight
Type
(always lit)
Color
NT31:
NT31C:
Color--Background
Elements
Items
NTH25/NTH25C
NT31/NT31C
Max. No. per screen
Max. 4
Max. 1
Alarm List
Start Bit Table Entry
(fixed to bit memory table number 0)
Alarm List
No. of Bits Referenced
Alarm
Alarm History
order of frequency/order of
occurrence
Alarm History
History Info
Alarm History
Info Type
306
(fixed to 240)
(fixed to order of occurrence)
(date of occurrence always
displayed)
(fixed to Month/Day Hour:Minute)
Message--Display Line Qty
1 to 8
1 to 12
Message--Length
1 to 39
1 to 39
APPENDIX F
Differences with NT31/NT31C Screen Data
Items
Message--Smoothing
Message--Scale
Display ImageLib
Color--Frame
Alarm
Color--Background--ON
Color--Background--OFF
Image &
Library--Color--Foreground
Image &
Library--Color--Background
NTH25/NTH25C
NT31/NT31C
(fixed to No Smoothing)
(fixed to Equal)
(image/library data cannot be
displayed)
(displays at OFF color)
NT31:
NT31C:
(displays at OFF color)
NT31:
NT31C:
NTH25:
NTH25C:
(image/library data cannot be
displayed)
(image/library data cannot be
displayed)
NT31:
NT31C:
NT31:
NT31C:
NT31:
NT31C:
Line Scroll Touch Switch
Page Scroll Touch Switch
Max. No. per screen
Max. No. in one screen
data file
Max. 64
(total of standard lamps and
image/library lamps)
Max. 256
(total of standard lamps and
image/library lamps)
No limit
No limit
Shape--Rectangle
Shape--Circle
Shape--Polygon
Shape--Sector
(displayed as rectangle)
(displayed as circle)
Frame
NT31:
NT31C:
Color--Frame
Standard
Lamp
Lamp Attribute
Color--ON
Color--OFF
Label--Max. No. of
characters
Label--Font Type
Label--Scale
Label--Smoothing
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NTH25:
NTH25C:
(”Transparent” is displayed as
”White” on the NTH25 and ”Black” on
the NTH25C.)
Max. 40
NT31:
NT31C:
NT31:
NT31C:
Max. 40
(”Half Height” is displayed as
”Standard”)
(3 x 3 is displayed as 2 x 2)
(displays without smoothing)
307
APPENDIX F
Differences with NT31/NT31C Screen Data
Items
NTH25/NTH25C
NT31/NT31C
Label--Attribute
ON
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NT31:
NT31C:
OFF
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NT31:
NT31C:
Label Color
Label--Color
Standard
Lamp
Label--Color--Background
(fixed to ”Transparent”)
(fixed to ”Transparent”)
Max. 64 (total of standard lamps and
image/library lamps)
(usable only on screen numbers 1 to
200)
Max. 256 (total of standard lamps
and image library lamps)
Max. 12800 (64 x 200 screens)
No limit
Max. 120
Max. 256
Insert Mark
Insert Image
Max. No. per screen
Image Lamp
Max. No. in one screen
data file
On State--Code
OFF State--Code
Max. No. per screen
Indirect Reference
Table Entry
Display Type-Decimal/Hexadecimal
Format--Integer/Decimal
(max. 8 digits including sign and
decimal point)
Zero Suppression
Display Sign
Numeral
Display
Font Type
Scale
Smoothing
(fixed to ”with sign”)
(”Half Height” is displayed as
”Standard”. ”Double Width” is
displayed as ”Standard” with width
doubled.)
(3 x 3 is displayed as 2 x 2)
(displays without smoothing)
Attribute
308
Color--Foreground
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NT31:
NT31C:
Color--Background
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NT31:
NT31C:
APPENDIX F
Differences with NT31/NT31C Screen Data
Items
Items
Max. No. per screen
NTH25/NTH25C
NT31/NT31C
Max. 50
Max. 256
Max. 40
Max. 40
Indirect Reference
Table Entry
Length
Font Type
String display Scale
Smoothing
Attribute
(”Half Height” is displayed as
”Standard”.)
(set at first allocated word)
(displays without smoothing)
(set at first allocated word)
Color--Foreground
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NT31:
NT31C:
Color--Background
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NT31:
NT31C:
Max. No. per screen
Max. 80
(Total with thumbwheel type)
Max. 256
Table Entry
Display Type-Decimal/Hexadecimal
Limit--Maximum
Limit--Minimum
Format--Integer/Decimal
(max. 8 digits including decimal
point)
Zero Suppression
Display Sign
Data Input-Numeral
(Numeric
Key Type)
Font Type
Scale
Smoothing
(Minus numbers cannot be input.)
(”Half Height” is displayed as
”Standard”. ”Double Width” is
displayed as ”Standard” with width
doubled.)
(3 x 3 is displayed as 2 x 2)
(displays without smoothing)
Attribute
Color--Foreground
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NT31:
NT31C:
Color--Background
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NT31:
NT31C:
Focus Frame
Focus Attribute
(displays without cursor)
(displays without cursor)
309
APPENDIX F
Differences with NT31/NT31C Screen Data
Items
Items
NTH25/NTH25C
NT31/NT31C
Table Entry
(40)
Length
Font Type
Scale
Smoothing
Data
Input String
Input--String
Attribute
Color--Foreground
NT31:
NT31C:
Color--Background
NT31:
NT31C:
Focus Frame
Focus Attribute
Max. No. per screen
Max. 64
Max. 64
Table Entry
Display Type-Decimal/Hexadecimal
(8 digits including decimal point)
Limit--Maximum
Limit--Minimum
Display Sign
(Minus signs cannot be input.)
Attribute
Data Input-Numeral
((Thumbwheel
T
Type)
)
Scale
(Shape differs slightly with
NT31/NT31C.)
End Plate
Character
Color--Foreground
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NT31:
NT31C:
Character
Color--Background
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NT31:
NT31C:
Thumbwheel Color--Frame
(+,-- display color)
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NT31:
NT31C:
Thumbwheel
Color--Foreground
(switch display color)
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NT31:
NT31C:
Thumbwheel
Color--Background
(switch display color)
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NT31:
NT31C:
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NT31:
NT31C:
Polyline
Rectangle
Polygon
Graphic
G
hi
(Fixed
Display)
Circle
Arc
Sector
Color--Foregr
Line Color
ound
310
APPENDIX F
Differences with NT31/NT31C Screen Data
Items
Items
Max. No. of Characters
NT31/NT31C
Max. 40
Max. 40
(”Half Height” is displayed as
”Standard”.)
Font Type
Scale
(3 x 3 is displayed as 2 x 2)
Smoothing
Text (Fixed
Display)
NTH25/NTH25C
(displays without smoothing)
Attribute
Color--Foreground
Color--Background
NTH25:
NTH25C:
(”Transparent” is displayed as
”White” on the NTH25 and ”Black” on
the NTH25C.)
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NT31:
NT31C:
NT31:
NT31C:
Insert Mark
Insert Image
(”Box”, ”Grid” and ”Border” are
displayed as ”Uniform”.)
Pattern
Color--Foreground
Tiling (Fixed
Display)
Color--Background
Color--Border
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NTH25:
NTH25C:
(”Transparent” is displayed as
”White” on the NTH25 and ”Black” on
the NTH25C.)
(displays Foreground color)
Code
FF20 to FF72 Hex
Scale
NT31:
NT31C:
NT31:
NT31C:
NT31:
NT31C:
FF20 to FFFF Hex
(3 x 3 is displayed as 2 x 2)
Attribute
Smoothing
(displays without smoothing)
Mark (Fixed
Display)
Color--Foreground
Color--Background
NTH25:
NTH25C:
(”Transparent” is displayed as
”White” on the NTH25 and ”Black” on
the NTH25C.)
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NT31:
NT31C:
NT31:
NT31C:
Image Display (Fixed Display)
Color--Fore
ground
Color--Back
ground
(In the 2--Colors mode, displayed as
black and white)
(In the 2--Colors mode, displayed as
black and white)
NT31:
NT31C:
NT31:
NT31C:
Library Display (Fixed Display)
311
APPENDIX F
Differences with NT31/NT31C Screen Data
Items
Items
Max. No. per screen
Function--Notify Bit
NTH25/NTH25C
NT31/NT31C
Max. 192 (overlapping of touch
switches is not allowed)
Max. 256
(On the host link or NT link (1:1),
”Set” and ”Reset” act as ”Momentary”
switches, and on the memory link, all
act as ”Momentary switches.)
Function--Switch Screen
Function--Input Key--Control
Function--Input
Key--Keyboard
Function--Input Key--String
Function--Copy Setting
Function--Cursor Move
(Some keys cannot be used.)
(”Toggle” is operated as ”Open”.)
(not supported)
(no memory table)
(automatically generated for numeral
key elements)
Function--Screen Print
PC (PLC) Bit Address
(for lamp function)
Shape--Standard
Touch Switch
(no lamp function)
(displayed as double frame)
Shape--Shadow
(normally displayed as ”double
frame”)
Shape--3--Dimension
(normally displayed as ”double
frame”)
Shape--Rectangle
Shape--Circle
Shape--Polygon
Shape--Sector
(displayed as fixed display element)
(displayed as fixed display element)
(displayed as fixed display element)
(displayed as fixed display element)
Frame
Color--Frame
Show ON State
Lamp Attribute
Color--ON
Color--OFF
Max. No. of Characters
312
(displays at OFF color)
NT31:
NT31C:
(valid only when shape is set to
”None” or ”Standard”)
(fixed to ON)
(displayed at inverse color of ”OFF
color”)
NTH25:
NTH25C:
40
NT31:
NT31C:
NT31:
NT31C:
40
APPENDIX F
Differences with NT31/NT31C Screen Data
Items
Items
Label--Font Type
Label--Scale
Label--Smoothing
NTH25/NTH25C
NT31/NT31C
(”Half Height” is displayed as
”Standard”.)
(3 x 3 is displayed as 2 x 2)
(displays without smoothing)
Label--Attribute
T
Touch
h Switch
S it h
Label--Color--ON
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NT31:
NT31C:
Label--Color--OFF
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NT31:
NT31C:
Label--Color--Background
(fixed to Transparent)
(fixed to Transparent)
No. of Displayed Lines in
one graph
Max. 8
Max. 50
No. of Registered Frames
in one screen data file
Max. 20
No limit
No. of Registered Lines in
one screen data file
Max. 40 (all subject to data logging
function)
No limit (Max. 8 lines subject to data
logging function)
2 to 320
2 to 320
Label--Insert Mark
Label--Insert Image
Standard/Pen Reco
Drawing Width
Sampling Cycle
(rounded up to nearest second)
Table Entry
100%--Table Entry
100%--Value
(Minus numbers are treated as 0.)
0%--Table Entry
Trend Graph
0%--Value
--100%--Table Entry
--100%--Value
(Minus numbers are treated as 0.)
(Minus range cannot be displayed.)
(Minus range cannot be displayed.)
Line--Style
Line--Color
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NT31:
NT31C:
Direction
Display Sign
Frame
Color--Frame
(Minus range cannot be displayed.)
(fixed to With Frame)
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NT31:
NT31C:
313
APPENDIX F
Differences with NT31/NT31C Screen Data
Items
Items
Color-- + Range
Color-- -- Range
Display %
Display %--Font Type
Trend Graph
Display %--Scale
Display %--Smoothing
NTH25/NTH25C
NTH25:
NTH25C:
(Minus range cannot be displayed.)
NT31/NT31C
NT31:
NT31C:
NT31:
NT31C:
(% cannot be displayed.)
(% cannot be displayed.)
(% cannot be displayed.)
(% cannot be displayed.)
Display
%--Color--Foreground
(% cannot be displayed.)
NT31:
NT31C:
Display
%--Color--Background
(% cannot be displayed.)
NT31:
NT31C:
Start Table Entry
No. of Points
2 to 320
100%--Table Entry
100%--Value
0%--Table Entry
0%--Value
--100%--Table Entry
--100%--Value
Broken--line
Broken
line
Graph
Line--Style
NT31:
NT31C:
Line--Color
Direction
Display Sign
Frame
Color--Frame
NT31:
NT31C:
Color-- + Range
NT31:
NT31C:
Color-- -- Range
NT31:
NT31C:
Max. No. per screen
30
Table Entry
100%--Table Entry
100%--Value
Bar Graph
0%--Table Entry
0%--Value
--100%--Table Entry
--100%--Value
314
(Minus numbers are treated as 0.)
(Minus numbers are treated as 0.)
(Minus range cannot be displayed.)
(Minus range cannot be displayed.)
50
APPENDIX F
Differences with NT31/NT31C Screen Data
Items
Items
NTH25/NTH25C
NT31/NT31C
Direction
Display Sign
Frame
Color--Frame
Color-- + Range
Color -- --Range
Bar Graph
p
(Minus range cannot be displayed.)
(fixed to No Frame)
(fixed to No Frame)
NTH25:
NTH25C:
(Minus range cannot be displayed.)
NT31:
NT31C:
NT31:
NT31C:
NT31:
NT31C:
Display %
Display %--Font Type
Display %--Scale
Display %--Smoothing
(”Half Height” is displayed as
”Standard”.)
(3 x 3 is displayed as 2 x 2)
(displays without smoothing)
Display
%--Color--Foreground
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NT31:
NT31C:
Display
%--Color--Background
NTH25:
NTH25C:
NT31:
NT31C:
Function Switches
The NT31/NT31 do not have function switches. The NTH25/NTH25C, however, has function switches capable of
bit notify (notification of switch state) and word notify (notification of specified value) to the host.
315
APPENDIX G
Model List
APPENDIX G
Model List
PT
Model
Specification
NTH25--ST121B
STN Black--and--white display, black
NTH25C--ST141B
STN color display, black
Host Link Unit
Model
Specification
3G2A6--LK201--EV1
CPU--mounted type with RS--232C connector
3G2A6--LK202--EV1
CPU--mounted type with RS--422A connector
C200H--LK201--V1
Rack--mounting unit with RS--232C connector for C200H
C200H--LK202--V1
Rack--mounting unit with RS--422A connector for C200H
3G2A5--LK201--EV1
Features a selectable RS--232C/RS--422A connector
C500--LK203
Rack--mounting unit for C500
CV500--LK201
Features an RS--232C connector and a selectable
RS--232C/RS--422A connector
Rack--mounting unit for CVM1/CV
Applicable PC
C--series
C200H
C1000H
C2000H
C--series
C200H
C200HS
C200HX/HG/HE(--Z)E
C--series
C1000H
C2000H
CVM1/CV--series
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1
CompoBus/S Master Control Unit
Model
SRM1--C02--V1
316
Specification
Features an RS--232C port
Model Name
SRM1
APPENDIX G
Model List
CPUs (For Connection via a Host Link)
Model
*
Specification
PC Type
CPM1--10CDR--j
CPM1--20CDR--j
CPM1--30CDR--j
CPM1A--10CDj--j
CPM1A--20CDj--j
CPM1A--30CDj--j
CPM1A--40CDj--j
RS--232C adapter/RS--422A adapter connected to the peripheral
port
C--series
CPM1
CQM1--CPU21--E
CQM1--CPU41--EV1
CQM1--CPU42--EV1
CQM1--CPU43--EV1
CQM1--CPU44--EV1
CQM1--CPU45--EV1
Features a 9--pin connector for RS--232C connections
C--series
CQM1
C200HS--CPU21--E
C200HS--CPU23--E
C200HS--CPU31--E
C200HS--CPU33--E
Features a connector for RS--232C connections
(selectable/9--pin)
C--series
C200HS
C200HE--CPU32--(Z)E(*)
C200HE--CPU42--(Z)E
Features a connector for RS--232C connections
(selectable/9--pin)
C--series
C200HE(--ZE)
C200HG--CPU33--(Z)E(*)
C200HG--CPU43--(Z)E
C200HG--CPU53--(Z)E(*)
C200HG--CPU63--(Z)E
Features a connector for RS--232C connections
(selectable/9--pin)
C--series
C200HG(--ZE)
C200HX--CPU34--(Z)E(*)
C200HX--CPU44--(Z)E
C200HX--CPU54--(Z)E(*)
C200HX--CPU64--(Z)E
C200HX--CPU65--ZE
C200HX--CPU85--ZE
Features a connector for RS--232C connections
(selectable/9--pin)
C--series
C200HX(--ZE)
CS1G-CPU42-E
CS1G-CPU43-E
CS1G-CPU44-E
CS1G-CPU45-E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin)
CS1-series
CS1G
CS1H-CPU63-E
CS1H-CPU64-E
CS1H-CPU65-E
CS1H-CPU66-E
CS1H-CPU67-E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin)
CS1-series
CS1H
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/9-pin) CVM1/CV-series
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1
One of communication boards C200HW--COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06--V1 is required.
317
APPENDIX G
Model List
CPUs (For Connection via an NT Link (1:1))
Model
*
Specification
PC Type
CPM1--10CDR--j
CPM1--20CDR--j
CPM1--30CDR--j
CPM1A--10CDj--j
CPM1A--20CDj--j
CPM1A--30CDj--j
CPM1A--40CDj--j
RS--232C adapter connected to the peripheral port
(RS--422A adapter cannot be used)
C--series
CPM1
CQM1--CPU41--EV1
CQM1--CPU42--EV1
CQM1--CPU43--EV1
CQM1--CPU44--EV1
CQM1--CPU45--EV1
Features a 9--pin connector for RS--232C connections
C--series
CQM1
C200HS--CPU21--E
C200HS--CPU23--E
C200HS--CPU31--E
C200HS--CPU33--E
Features a connector for RS--232C connections
(selectable/9--pin)
C--series
C200HS
C200HE--CPU32--(Z)E(*)
C200HE--CPU42--(Z)E
Features a connector for RS--232C connections
(selectable/9--pin)
C--series
C200HE(--ZE)
C200HG--CPU33--(Z)E(*)
C200HG--CPU43--(Z)E
C200HG--CPU53--(Z)E(*)
C200HG--CPU63--(Z)E
Features a connector for RS--232C connections
(selectable/9--pin)
C--series
C200HG(--ZE)
C200HX--CPU34--(Z)E(*)
C200HX--CPU44--(Z)E
C200HX--CPU54--(Z)E(*)
C200HX--CPU64--(Z)E
C200HX--CPU65--ZE
C200HX--CPU85--ZE
Features a connector for RS--232C connections
(selectable/9--pin)
C--series
C200HX(--ZE)
CV500--CPU01--EV1
CV1000--CPU01--EV1
CV2000--CPU01--EV1
CVM1--CPU01--EV2
CVM1--CPU11--EV2
CVM1--CPU21--EV2
Features a connector for RS--232C connections
(selectable/9--pin)
CVM1/CV--series
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1
One of communication boards C200HW--COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06--V1 is required.
RS--232C/RS--422A Converter Unit
Model
NT--AL001
Specification
RS--232C: 9--pin connector
RS--422A: 8--pin terminal block
RS--232C Adapter
Model
CPM1--CIF01
318
Specification
Links the RS--232C port of an NTH25/NTH25C and the
peripheral port of a CPM1 (compatible with host link, and NT
link (1:1))
APPENDIX G
Model List
Related Parts and Equipment for PT
Name
Model
Remark
Support Tool
NTH Screen Data
Converter
NT--ZJ3MX1--EV3
Compatible with PC/AT personal computers
For Windows95/98 (English version)
3.5 inch FD (1.44 MB)
NT--ZJCM1--EV3
Compatible with PC/AT personal computers
For Windows95/98 (English version)
CD--ROM
Provided with NTH25/NTH25C
unit
Compatible with PC/AT personal computers
For Windows95/98 (English version)
CD--ROM
Connection Parts
Connector for Control/Power Supply Cable
Name
Model
Remark
IL--M--10P--S3C2--SA
Relay plug housing
Made byy JAE for relayy
IL--M--C2--1--10000
Crimped pin contact (metal--plated)
Required for relay plug housing
Cables with Connectors (PT side 9--pin D--SUB $ PLC/NT--AL001)
Model
Cable Length
XW2Z--200S
2m
XW2Z--500S
5m
XW2Z--200T
2m
XW2Z--500T
5m
Applicable units
Communication Method
Specification
Host link units with a 25--pin
connector
Host link
9 pin $ 25
9--pin
25--pin
pin
Host link units with a 9--pin
connector
Host link,
link NT link (1:1)
9 pin $ 9
9--pin
9--pin
pin
Cables with Connectors (PT side 9--pin D--SUB $ Computer)
Model
Cable Length
2m
25--pin (male) $ 9--pin (male)
XW2Z--S001
15 cm
25--pin (female) $ 14--pin (male)
XW2Z--S002
2m
9--pin (female) $ 9--pin (male)
CV500--CN228
*
Specification
XW2Z--S001 is the converter cable. A separate CV500--CN228 is required for connection to the personal computer.
Connection Cable
Model
Specification
AWG28 x 5P IFVV--SB
Multicore cable, manufactured by Fujikura, Ltd.
CO--MA--VV--SB 5P x 28AWG
Multicore cable, manufactured by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
319
APPENDIX G
Model List
Applicable Connectors
Name
Connector
Connector hood
Connector fixture
320
Model
Specification
XM2A--2501
25--pin type (male), made by OMRON
XM2D--2501
25--pin type (female), made by OMRON (for personal computers)
XM2A--0901
9--pin type (male), made by OMRON
XM2D--0901
9--pin type (female), made by OMRON (for personal computers)
DB--25P
25--pin type (male), made by JAE
XM2S--2511
25--pin type, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON
XM2S--2513
25--pin type, inch pitch screw, made by OMRON
XM2S--0911
9--pin type, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON
XM2S--0911--E
9--pin type, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON
XM2S--0913
9--pin type, inch pitch screw, made by OMRON
DB--C2--J9
25--pin type, made by JAE
XM2Z--0001
Millimeter screw type, made by OMRON
APPENDIX H
PC Memory Map
APPENDIX H
PC Memory Map
OMRON C--Series PC, SRM1 Memory Map
Area
Relay Area
(CIO)
Holding
Relays
(HR)
Auxiliary
Relays
(AR)*1
Link Relays
(LR)
Timer/Coun
ter Present
Values
(TIM/CNT)
Data
Memory
(DM)
Extended
Data Memory
(Current
Bank)
(EM)
C200H
00000 to
00255
00000 to
00099
00000 to
00027
00000 to
00063
00000 to
00511
00000 to
01999
--
C200HS
Ladder
Type
C200HE(-ZE)
C200HG(-ZE)
C200HX(-ZE)
00000 to
00511 *2
00000 to
00099
00000 to
00027
00000 to
00063
00000 to
00511
C500
00000 to
00063
00000 to
00031
--
00000 to
00031
00000 to
00127
00000 to
00511
--
00000 to
04095
--
00000 to
06655
--
C1000H
SRM1
00000 to
06143 *3
00000 to
00255
00000 to
00099
00000 to
00027
00000 to
00063
00000 to
00511
CPM1/CPM1A
00000 to
00019
00200 to
00255
00000 to
00019
00000 to
00015
00000 to
00015
00000 to
00127
00000 to
01023
06144 to
06655
--
C1000HF
00000 to
00255
00000 to
00099
00000 to
00027
00000 to
00063
00000 to
00511
00000 to
04095
--
00000 to
00019
00200 to
00255
00000 to
00019
00000 to
00015
00000 to
00015
00000 to
00127
00000 to
02021
06144 to
06655
--
C2000H
CQM1
Flow
Type
--
00000 to
06655
07000 to
09999
*1 Auxiliary relays (AR) cannot be used on the NTH25/NTH25C.
*2 The available area on the NTH25/NTH25C is 00000 to 00255.
*3 Extended data memory (EM) cannot be used on the NTH25/NTH25C.
321
APPENDIX H
PC Memory Map
OMRON CVM1/CV--Series PC Memory Map
Area
Relay Area
(CIO)
Holding
Relays
(HR)*1
Auxiliary
Relays
(AR)*2
Link Relays
(LR)
Timer/Counter
Present
Values
(TIM/CNT)
Data Memory
(DM)
Extended
Data Memory
(Current
Bank)
(EM)
CV500
CVM1-CPU01-EV j
00000 to
02555
--
00000 to
00511
--
00000 to
00511
00000 to
08191
--
CVM1-CPU11-EVj
00000 to
02555
--
00000 to
00511
--
00000 to
01023
00000 to
24575*3
--
CV1000
CVM1-CPU11-EVj
CV2000
CVM1-CPU21-EV j
00000 to
02555
--
00000 to
00511
--
00000 to
01023
00000 to
24575*3
00000 to
32765*4
*1
*2
*3
*4
On CMV1/CV series PCs, this relay is included in relay area (CIO).
Auxiliary relays (AR) cannot be used on the NTH25/NTH25C.
The available area on the NTH25/NTH25C is 00000 to 09999.
Extended data memory (EM) cannot be used on the NTH25/NTH25C.
OMRON CS1--series CS1G/H PC Memory map (host link connection only)
Area
CS1G
CS1H
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
Relay Area
(CIO)
Holding
Relays
(HR)*2
Auxiliary
Relays
(AR)*3
Link Relays
(LR)
Timer/Counter
Present
Values
(TIM/CNT)
Data Memory
(DM)
Extended
Data Memory
(Current
Bank)
(EM)*6
00000 to
06655*1
00000 to
00511
00000 to
00959
--
00000 to
04095*4
00000 to
32767*5
00000 to
32767
The available area on the NTH25/NTH25C is 00000 to 02555.
Holding relays (HR) cannot be used on the NTH25/NTH25C.
Auxiliary relays (AR) cannot be used on the NTH25/NTH25C.
The available area on the NTH25/NTH25C is 00000 to 01023.
The available area on the NTH25/NTH25C is 00000 to 09999.
Extended data memory (EM) cannot be used on the NTH25/NTH25C.
322
APPENDIX I
Special Characters
APPENDIX I
Special Characters
English Character Codes
Example: Hex code is represented by 30, decimal code by 48, and character by 0.
30
0
48
Code 20 and 32 in the table represents a space, as indicated by “SP”.
Hex Digits
1st
2nd
-0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-A
-B
-C
-D
-E
-F
2-
20
32
21
33
22
34
23
35
24
36
25
37
26
38
27
39
28
40
29
41
2A
42
2B
43
2C
44
2D
45
2E
46
2F
47
3-
SP
!
”
#
$
%
&
’
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
30
48
31
49
32
50
33
51
34
52
35
53
36
54
37
55
38
56
39
57
3A
58
3B
59
3C
60
3D
61
3E
62
3F
63
4-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
40
64
41
65
42
66
43
67
44
68
45
69
46
70
47
71
48
72
49
73
4A
74
4B
75
4C
76
4D
77
4E
78
4F
79
5-
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
50
80
51
81
52
82
53
83
54
84
55
85
56
86
57
87
58
88
59
89
5A
90
5B
91
5C
92
5D
93
5E
94
5F
95
6-
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
60
96
61
97
62
98
63
99
64
100
65
101
66
102
67
103
68
104
69
105
6A
106
6B
107
6C
108
6D
109
6E
110
6F
111
7-
‘
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
70
112
71
113
72
114
73
115
74
116
75
117
76
118
77
119
78
120
79
121
7A
122
7B
123
7C
124
7D
125
7E
126
7F
127
8-
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
80
128
81
129
82
130
83
131
84
132
85
133
86
134
87
135
88
136
89
137
8A
138
8B
139
8C
140
8D
141
8E
142
8F
143
9-
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
î
ì
Ä
Å
90
144
91
145
92
146
93
147
94
148
95
149
96
150
97
151
98
152
99
153
9A
154
9B
155
9C
156
9D
157
9E
158
9F
159
É
æ
Æ
ô
ö
ò
û
ù
ÿ
Ö
Ü
¢
£
¥
Pt
ƒ
323
APPENDIX I
Special Characters
Hex Digits
1st
2nd
-0
A-
A0
B-
á
160
-1
A1
í
161
-2
A2
ó
162
-3
A3
ú
163
-4
A4
ñ
164
-5
A5
Ñ
165
-6
A6
-7
166
A7
-9
-A
-B
A8
D0
E0
176
192
208
224
B1
C1
D1
E1
177
193
209
225
B2
C2
D2
E2
178
194
210
226
B3
C3
D3
E3
179
195
211
227
B4
C4
D4
E4
180
196
212
228
B5
C5
D5
E5
181
197
213
229
C6
D6
E6
o
214
D7
230
E7
183
199
215
231
B8
C8
D8
E8
168
¿
184
200
216
232
A9
B9
C9
D9
E9
169
185
201
217
233
AA
BA
CA
DA
EA
170
186
202
218
234
BB
CB
DB
EB
187
203
219
235
BC
CC
DC
EC
188
204
220
236
BD
CD
DD
ED
189
205
221
237
BE
CE
DE
EE
190
206
222
238
BF
CF
DF
EF
191
207
223
239
AB
1/
2
AC
1/
4
AD
¡
AE
«
174
-F
C0
198
C7
173
-E
B0
B6
172
-D
AF
175
»
*1 Used as the prefix for mark data codes (2 bytes).
324
E-
182
B7
171
-C
D-
a
167
-8
C-
F-
#
F0
-
240
.
F1

241
/
F2
0
242
1
F3
2
243
3
F4
4
244
5
F5
6
245
μ
F6
7
8
246
F7
9
247
:
F8
_
248
;
F9
.
249
,
FA
!
250
<
FB

251
=
FC
n
252
ø
FD
2
253
>
FE
J
254
?
FF
255
*1
INDEX
NUMBER
9--pin D--SUB connector, Pin arrangement of . . . 37
A
Alarm History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Alarm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
alarm list and alarm history,
Differences between . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Alarm list/history function (bit memory table) . . 103
Allocated Bits and Words, Functions of . . . . . . . . 17
Allowable power supply voltage range . . . . . . . . 286
Alternate (function switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Alternate (touch switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Applicable Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 320
Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
B
Background function (trend graph) . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Backlight Auto OFF
(NTH Screen Data Converter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Backlight Auto OFF (configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Backlight OFF Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Backlight mode (PT status control bit) . . . . . . . . . 93
Backlight status (PT status notify bit) . . . . . . . . . . 94
Bar Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Bar graph (PT memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Base display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Baud rate (NTH Screen Data Converter) . . . . . 263
Baud rate (configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
BCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 163, 208
Binary data format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Bit Memory Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Bit memory table (PT memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
C
cable, Making the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Cables with connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
”CANCEL” touch switch (CHECK menu) . . . . . . . 64
Cell size (touch panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Character String Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Character String Memory Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
character strings (character string display), How to
specify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Character size (character string display) . . . . . . 169
Character size and attribute
(character string display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Character string display (PT memory) . . . . . . . . 245
Character string memory table No.
(bit memory table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
CHECK menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
CHECK menu, Calling the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
CHECK menu, Operations with the . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Cleaning method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Clear bit (Trend graph control area) . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Clear trend graph record (PT memory) . . . . . . . 243
Clock Data, Setting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Clock Setting Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Clock data (PT memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Clock data (PT status notify area) . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Clock data output (PT status notify area) . . . . . . 92
Clock function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Color Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Commands/Responses (memory link) . . . . . . . . 225
Comment (Screen attributes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Comments (PT configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Communication board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 53
Communication page
(NTH Screen Data Converter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Communications Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Communications method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 261
Communications protocol (memory link) . . . . . . 224
Communications type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Compatible Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Compatible Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
CompoBus/S Master Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Configuration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Configuration settings
(NTH Screen Data Converter) . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 260
Confirming Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Connecting to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Connection Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Connector cable, Preparing the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connector for Control/Power Supply Cable . . . 319
Contrast adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Control code input function (touch switch) . . . . . 156
Control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Control key function (touch switch) . . . . . . . . . . . 147
control/power supply connector,
Connecting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Control/power supply connector pin
arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
CPU unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 53, 317
Cursor move touch switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
D
Data length (NTH Screen Data Converter) . . . . 263
Data length (configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
325
Data logging function (trend graph) . . . . . . . . . . 184
”DATA TRANSMIT” touch switch
(CHECK menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Data write command (memory link) . . . . . . . . . . 225
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Default (character string memory table) . . . . . . 102
Dielectric strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286, 292
Direct Connection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Display Elements Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Display Language, Switching the . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Display Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Display Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Display color specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Display device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Display elements table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
”DISPLAY MONITOR” touch switch
(CHECK menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Display screen (PT status control area) . . . . . . . . 91
Display screen number (PT memory) . . . . . . . . 236
Display type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 208
dots, Number of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Double--width character, Size of . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
E
Effective display area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
emergency stop output, Use of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Emergency stop switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 36
English Character Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
”English” touch switch (CHECK menu) . . . . . . . . 69
External Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
F
Function Switches, Position Codes of . . . . . . . . 269
Function key settings
(NTH Screen Data Converter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Function switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 214
Functional grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
G
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
H
Hand strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Hardware (NTH Screen Data Converter) . . . . . . 252
Hardware switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Host Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Host Types and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Host link unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 316
Host notification function (touch switch) . . . . . . 146
326
Host notification function (touch switch) . . . . . . 153
”H” touch switch (CHECK menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
I
I/O comment (bit memory table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
I/O comment (character string memory table) . 101
I/O comment (numeral memory table) . . . . . . . . . 98
Image Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
image data, Procedure for creating and using . 130
Image/library lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Image/library lamps (PT memory) . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Initial Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Initial screen (PT configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Initialize page (NTH Screen Data Converter) . . 261
input field when there are multiple input fields,
Specifying the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Input numeral and stored data . . . . . . . . . 200, 208
Inspection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Installation environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Inverse color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
L
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
LCD Contrast, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Library Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
library data display, Procedure for creating
and using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Life expectancy (backlight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Life expectancy (display panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Life expectancy (touch panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
”L” touch switch (CHECK menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
M
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
marks, Procedure for creating and using . . . . . . 126
Memory Link, Communications by Using . . . . . . 22
Memory Link, Operation of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Memory link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 57
Menu Items, Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Message display color (bit memory table) . . . . . 105
Model (NTH Screen Data Converter) . . . . . . . . . 261
Model (configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Modes, Relationships among . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Momentary (function switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Momentary (touch switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
mmi format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
”M” touch switch (CHECK menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
N
P
Noise resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Normal (standard) lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Normal (standard) screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Notify command (memory link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
NT Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
NT link (1:1), When using the . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 56
NT31/NT31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
NT31/NT31C Screen Data, Difference with . . . 303
NTC Screen Data Converter, How to Install . . . 253
NTH Screen Data Converter . . . . . . . . 24, 259, 319
NTH Screen Data Converter, Equipment Needed To
Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
NTH Screen Data Converter, Exiting . . . . . . . . . 260
NTH Screen Data Converter, Setting Up . . . . . . 252
NTH Screen Data Converter, Starting up . . . . . 259
NTH Screen Data Converter?, What is . . . . . . . 250
NTH protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
NTH25 and NTH25C, Comparison between . . . . . 5
NTH25/NTH25C and NT31/NT31C, Comparison
between . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
NTH25/NTH25C for the first time, When using
the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
NTH25/NTH25C, Before operating the . . . . . . . . 26
NTH25/NTH25C, Principal Functions of . . . . . . . . 8
NTH25/NTH25C, Starting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
NTH25/NTH25C, Transporting and
Storing the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Numeral Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Numeral Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Numeral Storage Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 208
Numeral Storage Type (PT configuration) . . . . . . 81
Numeral display (PT memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Numeral input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Numeral input (PT memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Numeral input strobe (PT status notify bits) . . . . 94
Numerals and contents of host words . . . . . . . . 201
Numerical key type (numeral input) . . . . . . . . . . 196
Panel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Parity (NTH Screen Data Converter) . . . . . . . . . 263
Parity (configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Pen recorder type (trend graph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Permissible Display Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Permissible input ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
PLC Address (bit memory table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
PLC Address (character string memory table) . 102
PLC Address (numeral memory table) . . . . . . . . . 99
PLC Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
PLC setting (NTH Screen Data Converter) . . . . 263
PLC settings (configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Pin arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 37
Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Pop--up window/keyboard function
(touch switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Power supply connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Power supply specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
”PROG. CONSOLE” touch switch
(CHECK menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Programming Console Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Programming console function . . . . . . . 74, 84, 217
Programming environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
PT Configuration Settings (support tool) . . . . . . . 80
PT Control/Notify Area (PT configuration) . . . . . . 80
PT Memory, Configuration of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
PT Model (PT configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
PT Status Control Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
PT Status Notify Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
PT memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 220
PT status control bit (PT memory) . . . . . . . . . . . 237
PT status control bit (PT status control area) . . . 92
PT status notify bit (PT memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
PT status notify bits (PT status notify area) . . . . 94
Push--lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 36
O
Operating ambient humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Operating ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Operating force (touch panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Operating system (NTH Screen Data
Converter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Operation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Operation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Operation at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
operation output, Use of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
operation, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Operation switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Operation switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
R
Rated power supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Read command (memory link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
registered screens (touch panel),
Max. number of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
RS--232C Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
RS--232C/RS--422A Converter Unit . . . . . . . . . . 318
RS--232C/RS--422A Converter Unit, Using an . 293
RUN Mode, Switching to the . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 67
327
S
Sampling stop/continue bit (trend graph control
area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Screen Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Screen Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Screen Data (NTH Screen Data Converter),
Transmitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Screen Data Converter, Connecting to the
NTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Screen Data, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Screen Data, Precautions to Be Observed When
Transmitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Screen Data, Transmitting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Screen Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Screen Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Screen Transmit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Screen Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Screen switching function (touch switch) . 146, 155
Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Serial port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
”SET UP TIME” touch switch (CHECK menu) . . 71
SET UP touch switch (initial screen) . . . . . . . . . . 63
”SET UP” touch switch (initial screen) . . . . . . . . . 63
SETUP (NTH Screen Data Converter) . . . . . . . 254
Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Specified value (function switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Standard (trend graph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Standard lamp (PT memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Stop bit (NTH Screen Data Converter) . . . . . . . 263
Stop bit (configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Storage Type (numeral memory table) . . . . . . . . 99
Storage Type and Recognizable Numerals . . . . . 81
Storage ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 319
Support Tool settings, Differences in the . . . . . . 303
switches (function switch), Number of . . . . . . . . 287
switches (push lock switch), Number of . . . . . . . 287
switches (touch panel), Number of . . . . . . . . . . . 287
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
System screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
T
Temporary Input Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Text (Fixed Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Thumbwheel type (numeric input) . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Tiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Touch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Touch switches, function switches
(PT memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Transparent display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Trend Graph Control Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 186
Trend Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
328
Trend graph (PT memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Trend graph control area settings (NTH Screen
Data Converter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Trend graph sampling stop/continue
(PT memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Type setting (configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
U
Uninstall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Upper/lower (max./min.) limit check . . . . . 202, 209
Usable Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
V
Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
View angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
W
Waterproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Window Control Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Window Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Window Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Window Screens and Display Elements . . . . . . 212
Window control address settings (NTH Screen Data
Converter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Window key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Window key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
window, Opening/closing a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Wiring cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Word contents and displayed numeral . . . . . . . . 163
Word contents and displayed numeral . . . . . . . . 163
Z
Zero suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. V054-E1-1
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code
Date
1
May 1999
Revised content
Original production
9650
Corrections Insert
Manual:
Catalog No.:
Date:
NTH25/25C Programmable Terminal Operation Manual
V054--E1--1
June 1999
This corrections insert lists corrections made to this manual since it was printed.
Only corrections that affect the proper and efficient operation of the device are
listed; minor changes, such as those in spelling and syntax, have been omitted.
Please mark your manuals so that the corrections are noted on the pages concerned, and then securely add any
required pages from the Corrections Insert to the rear of the manual.
7--1 Troubleshooting
The error message that is actually displayed may differ from the error message indicated in the Symptoms column
in 7--1 Troubleshooting.
Incorrect
Correct
276P
The ”Data Communications Error” message is
displayed.
277P
When an attempt is made to enter the RUN
When an attempt is made to enter the RUN
mode, the initial screen and the ”No Reply from mode, the initial screen and the ”No Response
Host” message are displayed alternately.
from PLC” message are displayed alternately.
278P
279P
The ”ERROR” message is displayed.
The ”Device Setup Error” is displayed.
The ”CPU type Error” is displayed.
Cannot communicate with the host Example)
-- The ”No Reply from Host” message is displayed.
-- Communications error message is displayed
during communications with the host.
Cannot communicate with the host Example)
-- The ”No Response from PLC” message is
displayed.
-- Communications error message is displayed
during communications with the host.
The ”No Reply from Host” message is displayed from time to time during normal operation.
The ”No Response from PLC” message is displayed from time to time during normal operation.
The ”Date Communications Error” message is
displayed.
The ”Error” message is displayed.
The ”Device Setup Error” is displayed.
The ”CPU type Error” is displayed.
The following information was omitted from the description under
”Display of lamps” on page 142:
! Display of lamps
Lamps are displayed as follows according to the state of the allocated bit.
0 (OFF): OFF
1 (ON): ON, or flashing
Whether a lamp is lit continuously or flashes when the lamp bit is set to ”1” (ON) is
determined by the ”ON Type” attribute.
On the NTH25C, the light/flash display state changes according to
whether or not the lamp is assigned a frame.
On the NTH25, the lamp stays lit and only labels flash regardless of
whether or not the lamp is assigned a frame.
[NTH25C]
Frame:
The frame is always displayed.
No frame:
The lamp may be invisible when the frame is OFF or flashing depending on the OFF color.
[Frame]
[No frame]
(OFF)
(OFF)
Light
Light
Flash
Flash
Label
Only the area inside
the frame flashes.
The lamp alternates
between displayed and
non--displayed states, and
only labels remain.
[NTH25]
The lamp stays lit and only labels flash regardless of whether or not
the lamp is assigned a frame.
(OFF)
Light
Label
Flash
Label
”Display result” on page 174:
! Display result
Position
(Top left corner of the rectangular area
including the graph and percentage display)
Frame color
Percentage display
Size
(Y direction)
60%
Display color for the + range
Size (X direction)
0% position
100% position
(The frame is not displayed on the NTH25/NTH25C.)
On the NTH25, the + range turns the same color as the graph area, resulting in the
graph no longer being visible when the + range color is set to black.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement